Home

Obsession II 4.1 User Manual

1. Clear All The Clear All softkey performs the same function as the Clear to End softkey except that all levels are cleared 270 Chapter 18 Profiles Fill Between Use Fill Between to fill in a gap in a profile where fade points lack assigned values Unassigned values can come from the use of Clear To End or Clear All The region to be filled with Fill Between must be bordered on both sides by one or more fade points with assigned levels zero is an assigned level but is not The Fill Between function fills the gap by creating a linear profile between the ends Consider the following profile with an unassigned region between the fade points at 60 and 80 Complete 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 Intensity 02 4 5 7 8 10 12 13 15 17 18 20 80 85 90 95 FL 85 90 95 100 LT 80 80 Intensity J 4 20 o Trl Fade Completion 90 100 Execution of a Fill Between press S3 Fill Between Enter sets values in the unassigned region that bridge the gap in a linear fashion The result is shown below Complete 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 Intensity 02 4 5 7 8 10 12 13 15 17 18 20 35
2. Installi ng a Designer s Remote Console Install the DRC as you would an original Obsession remote console in an Obsession Il system See Installing an Obsession remote console page 386 The following illustration shows the rear panel connectors Fuse 6 25 amp 1 5 pin female XLR Keyboard 536 DMX outputs 5 pin DIN Parallel printer 25 pin female D GAL O6 6500 I OO O 2 F L CRT displays ETCNet connectors 15 pin female D Power cord RFU Digitizer table 6 pin female XLR 9 pin male D When finished with the installation refer to Node board configuration page 391 for net jumper connections DRC Main DIP switch settings Node Board A set of DIP switches are located inside the Designer s Remote Console DRC on the back left corner of the circuit board Change the settings of these DIP switches if the console addresses DMX512 outputs higher than 1 536 To change the DIP switch settings open the DRC Find the switches and adjust the settings as shown on the list below Switches are either On Closed or Off Open The DRC does not use DIP switches 7 or 8 DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the DRC will not start Switch Normal State Function 1 Off Open Factory use only normal operation 2 On Closed Factory use only normal operation 3and4 On
3. All other attributes are in the None category These attributes include Speed Control Reserved etc To change an attribute s category follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 3 Attribute Dis Selects the Attribute Display play Setup Enter Setup display Attribute Display Setup 3 Press 1 0 Selects attribute 10 Attribute Display Setup ATTRIBUTE 10 4 Press S2 Category S4 Specifies the Color category for Color the selected attribute 5 Press Enter Assigns the specified attribute to the Color category Attribute Display Setup ATTRIBUTE 10 COLOR 108 Chapter 8 ML setup Labeling an attribute To change the label for an attribute follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 3 Attribute Dis Selects the Attribute Display play Setup Enter Setup display Attribute Display Setup Press 11 5 Selects attribute 15 Press Label and enter Specifies the label your label such as Show 1 on the alphanumeric keyboard 5 Press Enter Labels the attribute Attribute Display Setup ATTRIBUTE 15 LABEL Show 18 Moving attributes You can move an attribute to another attribute number and when you do higher numbers are renumbered Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup
4. 51 Operations rre enre eii reni 72 Group Clearall 301 COPY TA am rure a Mo ee 207 A A e 199 A eee 207 Deletes e205 aid PAS 206 Display Jie et odes 17 Group List 35 40 211 Group Spreadsheet 209 Label ums eon 206 Loading to submasters 230 Modifying 201 204 Patek uet da 276 Playback o o 200 Range edit 209 Range edit in Group List 211 Record minus sub 200 Selective record 199 Set channel levels 73 Set fixture levels 132 Obsession Il User Manual 411 Spreadsheet 209 210 Submasters 207 Touchscreen o 99 Update sss 203 206 Using to modify 208 H Hard drive DIFECTORY 3a dese e 286 Erase show 5 290 Management 285 Read ShOW 288 Replace show 290 SOR Secr SET UR Ie rs 286 Store show 287 Hardware Setup menu 365 Help eb etched 2 Highest level 3 Hold Submaster time 219 Hold for inp t erst 258 Home position 214 l I O configuration 308 314 Independent Assigning to channel 67 CHANGING eee e 95 Channel check 79 Inhibitive submasters 214 229 Insert SMPTE 338 Installation ETCNSE Rc tro ee 359 MD astros bos 383 Monitors o o oo o o
5. 99 Libraries 139 POE a A orf ar o 297 Tracking Explained 173 FIXtUIGS sce bee ten ahem AE 174 Multipart cue 184 185 Selecting mode 45 Trackpad Accelerati0N 102 Auto SETUP oooooo 103 Introduced ss kk rs 98 SUD csetera ce 100 101 U Undo s sei ev Rcs 78 Unload submaster 231 Unpark Attributes oooo 137 Cues Groups Subs 276 Dimmers amp Channels 275 Unpatched dimmers Unable to park 274 Unpatching dimmers 59 A a a a a a 182 Cue Only Track key 175 CBS o nii oie aa a es 157 GIOUDS ced emanate 203 206 Submasters 226 228 UsernT 0F Zea oe ate be RIP 303 V Video Expand 308 View ChannelS 34 Virtual faders 155 187 WwW Wait time Record cue 05 149 Waranty 24 halt kee RES iv Websites euer edes eode unt ae 6 Wheel Rate wheel 192 Use with profiles 269 Obsession Il User Manual 417 Electronic Theatre Controls North America 3030 Laura Lane e Middleton Wisconsin 53562 USA e Tel 1 608 831 4116 e Fax 1 608 836 1736 Europe 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road e London W3 6UU England e Tel 44 181 896 1000 e Fax 44 181 896 2000 Asia Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road e Kowloon Bay Hong Kong
6. 0202000005 346 Selecting keyboard mode 00 ee 346 Alphanumeric MO 347 Face panel mode esi ade ek Pe eee e ee 347 Remote display mode 22220 5 350 Remote Focus Unit RFU 220 351 Obsession Off Line liess 352 SHOWS Translator xoc b a ERO Pt 353 Why a translator is needed 353 Operating the Show Translator 353 Appendix A Installation and setup o 355 Console installatiON oo o oooooo ooo oo 356 Single processor SySteM ooo ooo ooo ee 356 Dual processor SysteM ooooooooooooo 357 Remote console setup 0000 000 e eee 358 Redundant tracking 200000 cee eee eee 362 Processor features 0 6 elles 362 DMX SWITCHER A ecw tne al ad 363 GONSOlE osos tese A ee oe EA P P 364 Hardware Setup as cree rta de erint dearest 365 Installing MONTOS 367 Connecting DMX512 devices oo o ooooo oo 368 Setting DMX512 configuration 0 00005 369 DMX512 starting numbers 369 Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling 370 Setting DMX512 speed 0 00 eee 370 Obsession ll User Manual Xvii Installing the alphanumeric keyboard 371 Installing a printer a csse eoe eere ht 372 Remote Focus Unit RFU 220 373 Installing the RFU coto caia eS RO obs 374 Gonfiguring an EU dus ya aet A etes 375 Setting jump
7. For Personalities Fixture Patch Fixture List Libraries and Library List you may restrict the printout to a partial list with the Thru or keys Obsession Il User Manual 297 298 Chapter 22 Print functions Chapter 23 Clear functions In certain circumstances you may want to clear some portion of your show or reset to defaults The following clear and reset functions are explained in this chapter Show Cues Submasters Groups Effects Profiles Macros SMPTE Events Reset Patch 1 to 1 Fixtures Libraries Personalities Clear All Reset System Obsession Il User Manual 299 Clear Functions menu Go to the Clear Functions menu by pressing Setup 5 Clear Functions Enter Clear Functions Menu 10 Clear Patch Clear Functions Each clear function erases show information that resides in program memory To guard against loss of valuable data back up show information and O configuration information to the hard drive and or a diskette before executing a clear function If that show information is saved you can restore it if needed For example the following procedure resets the channel patch to the default 1 1 patch e g channel 1 patched to dimmer 1 channel 2 patched to dimmer 2 and dimmers wrap around if there are more dimmers than channels This reset is independent of your show Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 5 Clear Func Displays Clear Functi
8. Labeling an attribute o oo ooooooooo Moving attributes o ooooooooooooo LASS c ot em A tu a ar Dra pde m ao CA gents Library EIS auis eut tue sutura utem a CUA Attribute LISt 5i o Ern gw gere FIXtUFOEIST 2 1 4 exce t acest occas se ari ErameTabl8S ic vs vxor ate e SUN o S CAN AR FEarQe GdltOE iaraa eden cha ees A dp ht es Setting up a new frame table Editifigzas frames dao sir ek oh kab oped erp OR An Inserting or deleting frames o o o Copying a table o o ooooo ooooooooo Labeling a table nnana anaana Personality Edi boe RO PE RUE ER Attribute Options 0 0 0 0 0 ee Creating a personality o o oooooo o Editing a personality 20 0 0 ee eee Deleting a personality o o o o o oooooo Re naming a personality o o oooooo Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Characteristics of ML displayS o ooo o Using the keypad to set attribute levels Using encoders to set attribute levels Using groups to set attribute levelS Setting levels with the Group command Setting levels with the Focus Group command Using grouped channels to set attribute levels Sneak attributes ccce eid beeen DW DCN Parking attriDUteS o oooooooooo o oo ooooo Unparking attributes oooooooooo oooooo Copy
9. 152 Macro to macro 259 Lists Attribute 111 Effectsin omei ete eh he dt 254 FIXTUTCS gt d Snack Ere da ifta 111 GOW De sed ERES AES 211 Libraries 110 Submasters 234 Live display o o ooooo o 15 O AMA 319 OAC CUCL fe esent tia 189 Load effect to submaster 252 Load errors e A 321 Load SUD reg EE RES 230 Loop sequence 151 Loop SMPTE 337 M Macro Cancel 22e pres 261 CISA eins aaa oti ett Mts 262 Glear all i ed ees cens 301 COD etx e e A E 262 Creating onanan anaa 255 257 Display nananana aaa 257 Editan ite aras 261 Hold for input 258 Insert mode 261 Ie apu us su oae Ee t fts a 256 Link macro oss 259 LAKTO ees ete 152 Macro wait 257 Modyo io rd 261 Playback oves 261 Replace mode 261 Samples lusu 263 Using submasters 260 Manuals seem eR rue 149 Override of cue 191 Override of submaster fade 223 Submaster dwell time 219 Memo display 28 Menu Clear Functions 301 Diagnostics 27 Dimmer Monitoring 315 1 O Configuration 282 317 1 0 Options 305 316 MIDI Show Control 328 Seti ceto Pete ed ine 27 Message Log 27 MIDI Installation 383 Interfacing with 383 Show control
10. 9 See Creating a custom patch page 55 for examples of the use of Patch 24 Chapter 3 Monitor displays By Channel In the By Channel display the command line defaults to channel selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 El Pate S e ONO N ONAA A UU N h By Channel Chan Channels available for patching Live Chn Current live level of the channel You may set live levels from this display Ind Indicates whether channel is independent Dimmer Dimmer number Level Level at which dimmer is patched Full is not displayed Profile Profile assigned to the dimmer Command line Softkeys Press S4 to toggle between display labels or display dim mers Obsession Il User Manual 25 By Lahel In the By Label display the command line defaults to dimmer selection O 0001 _000Z 0003 0004 0005 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0026 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0039 0040 0041 Patch By Label 0 O Dimmer Dimmers available for patching O Label Labels of dimmers available for patching Chan Channel to which dimmer is patched O Level Level at which dimmer is patched Full is not displayed O Profile Profile assigned to the dimmer O Command line O Softkeys Press S4 to toggle between display or suppress dimmers Patch colors Dimmer or channel numbers and levels display in all three Patch mo
11. 149 Cue wprofile 152 Cue w split fade time 148 Effect as cue 250 Follow cueS 150 Group minus sub 200 Grosa ose lc eR EYES 199 MRK GUOS vex ges ad 150 loads escape entered 318 Loop sequence 151 Multipart cues 180 185 Next Ub es s 218 Range of cues 163 Renumber cue 169 Show to diskette 279 Show to hard drive 287 Submaster 158 205 217 225 Submasters 221 Using Cue Only Track 175 Redundant tracking Enable disable 365 OVeIVIieW ooooo 362 Setting primary secondary 366 SMEPITE is cet pr E ms 342 Remote dimmer ASSIQN 20 44 iie UE ARIA 123 Introduced 0 4 90 Remote display control 350 Remote Focus Unit 309 351 Remote Interface 377 378 Remote Video Interface 379 382 Renumbering acue 169 Replace show 005 290 Replace With 164 Reset patch 300 Reset system IAT eos 302 Restore oeil 282 291 Resume fade 189 REU suite caue RE esie 309 351 Backlight 309 Number 000 309 Run SMPTE 2 257253327152 341 S Scale ValueS o o o ooo 322 Secondary Messages 396 Select ShoW o o o o o oooo 288 Selecting channels 70 Selective record 199 SEN
12. O Grandmaster Blackout Current Grandmaster level setting indicates when Black out is active O Show info and time Name and comments assigned to show if any current time and SMPTE time if enabled Submaster page Current submaster page Use Sub Page to switch pages Event Number of the SMPTE event O Time The SMPTE time when the event executes O Element The cue submaster macro or Go command that the event executes Rate The rate at which an event that executes a cue runs Label The event s label if any Fader Status display Current state of all pending and fading cues Obsession Il User Manual 41 42 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Chapter 4 System settings The System Settings Menu shows the current system settings in your system and allows you to make changes You can customize the number of dimmers and channels set system modes and screen formats and choose default settings for a variety of system functions System Settings Menu System Settings This chapter includes the following sections e Set number of dimmers e Set number of channels e Select Cue Only or Tracking mode e Select screen format e Enable or disable Level Wheel e Set default Level e Set default fade times e Set default Back and Go To Cue times e Set default Sneak time e Set default cue profile e Enable or disable Blackout and Grandmaster e Enable or disable clearing channels in Cue Only e Rese
13. S1 Grandmaster S2 Fader S3 Sub S4 All Sliders If you selected S2 or S3 enter the number of the Fader or Sub to assign Use and Thru to enter multiple items Press the softkey for the User S5 User 1 S6 User 2 S7 Shared By Both Press Enter Chapter 24 Multiuser Action Command line Selects Input Output Configuration menu Selects Multiuser Configuration display Selects Slider Allocation screen Slider Allocation SUB Slider Allocation SUB gt Slider Allocation SUB gt 4 USER 2 Submasters through are assigned to User 2 and disabled for User 1 Slider Allocation SUB gt USER 2 Deleting devices Once you add a device to your device list it remains on the list even if you disconnect the device from the system This means you don t need to reconfigure Multiuser every time you disconnect a device or turn the system off You may remove a device that is no longer on the network from the device list Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects Input Output Configuration Enter Configuration menu 3 Press 2 Multiuser Selects Multiuser Configuration Configuration Enter display Press S5 Delete Device I O Devices DELETE DEVICE Enter the device number I O Devices DELETE DEVICE of the device to delete 6 Press Enter I O Devices DELETE DEVICE E Please Confirm 7 Press Enter
14. 2 Press Sub Label Live SUB 4 LABEL 3 Use the alphanumeric key Live SUB 4 LABEL board to enter the label Bedroom wash 4 Onthe Obsession l key Live SUB 4 LABEL pad press Enter Bedroom wash 8 222 Chapter 15 Submasters Controlling submaster fades manually When you press the bump button on a timed additive submaster recorded fade times play back as you recorded them You may take manual control of submasters recorded with fade times Capture the fade by pushing the slider ahead of the programmed fade Once the slider passes the level of the programmed fade control transfers to the slider and you have full manual control of the submaster Modifying submasters in Sub display Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub and enter the Sub SUB 6 submaster to modify 3 Press Enter Brings up current level settings for the submaster Sub SUB 6 m 4 Enter channel numbers Sets new levels and set desired new lev Sub SUB 6 8 CHAN 3 50 els Note To set a channel to zero press Out and skip step 5 5 Press Enter Changes to the submaster are automatically recorded Sub SUB 6 E CHAN 3 50 m Note If the submaster is active the changes appear on stage as you make changes Obsession Il User Manual 223 224 Modifying submasters in Live Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Use its slider to raise the Brings up current level submaster you want to settin
15. 00000000 022 ee Load and play cues 200000 022 ee eee Load CUCM ine iris su le Dido p Ae s a t s nee ennt the ete eed E D e E uet hs ent as StOp BaCck bre RE ERR UTERE GOTO CUBO uit iia queer Eee A i bep C e cheeck decals est M tes aerei ARP S N gt Controlling fades manuallY oo oooo oo Manual override llle R te override xi iA E Ib PES All Man All Manual oana 20 0 0 000 eee eee Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups o Channels and attributes in groupS 0 Determining what is recorded into a group Understanding the focus group link Creating groups 6 ca eee bh eh a cM aid Using the entire l00k o o o o o oooooo Creating a selective group 0 eee Creating a group without submasters Viewing a group on stage o Modifying groups eal Le C3 Special rules for focus groupS 00 In GEOUpITTOdG para Mive mode sei preesse Removing all focus group lINkS Using Update to modify groups Removing designated focus group links Labeling groupS 0000s Deleting groups ooo COPYING groups euet ees pH HS MER SUE Using cues or submasters as groups Using Groups to modify cues groups or submasters Group Spreadsheet 0 00 0 Range editing in the Group Spreadsheet Copyranges o GrOUp JEISt o Gps uA RIAM PRI
16. 328 329 MIDI Show Control Input 328 MIIFEOR 2 i ta 314 ML Displays Description E mg 18 Tero o M CE 19 When to use 130 Modifying Cue attributes 158 Groups 0 0 0 0 eee 201 SubmasterS 223 224 Monitor Remote video 381 More SoftkeyS 12 Move A A Re Eos tlh ek 166 GUSTINE ced aestu 167 SMPTE e erum e art cee on 339 MISC i oh uh oc eee dc eed 327 Multipart cues 179 185 Attributes ia cene emn 182 Converting Blind 184 185 V6 2 a octets 4x 181 Delete part c ese uva 185 Recording Bliridsa suere huis sers 183 BU E RERO 180 MV OVE esterase eere aye rane cosa 182 Multiuser Assigning devices to Users 307 Channel conflicts 304 Configuring 306 Disable devices 314 Display notes 304 Enabling s eet tens 305 Labeling devices 308 Slider allocation 311 slider controls 311 To chpad eri iu ores 307 User 1 01255 tu e at 303 Video Expand 308 Obsession Il User Manual 413 N New Features 005 27 O Obsession Device ID 328 Off Line program 352 One to one patch 54 Output level conventions 3 Overwrite show 290 P ARA A 155 AttributeS 137 CU Ue otek ay siue 276 Cue to fader 155 DIMMER tana an Y 274 DISDl8y
17. 5 Press 1 5 6 Press Enter Action Command line Selects cue 3 Live RECORD CUE 3 Enters an upfade of ten seconds Live RECORD CUE 3 TIME 10 Enters a downfade of 15 seconds Live RECORD CUE 3 TIME 10 15 Records cue 3 with an upfade of ten seconds and downfade of 15 seconds Live RECORD CUE 3 TIME 10 15H Recording a cue without submasters You may record a cue from the look on stage but exclude the contributions of specific submasters Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press S7 Rec Minus Sub 4 Press 5 5 Press Cuel 3 6 Press Enter Action Command line Live RECORD SUB Instructs that levels raised by submaster 5 be ignored Live RECORD SUB 5 Selects cue to be recorded Live RECORD SUB 5 CUE 3 Records cue 3 minus submaster 5 Live RECORD SUB 5 CUE 3 a If you skip this step the cue will exclude levels contributed by all submasters Chapter 10 Cues Recording a manual cue Manual cues must be controlled by hand with a fader slider See Controlling fades manually page 191 for more information Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 4 4 Press Time Enter Recording with wait times Action Command line Selects Live display mode Selects cue 4 Live RECORD CUE 4 Enters manual up and down fade times Live RECORD C
18. Follow Follow allows you to play one cue automatically after another A time can be specified with the Follow command to control how many seconds later the next cue starts The next cue to play is in the normal sequence unless Link was used Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 7 Selects cue 7 Live RECORD CUE 7 4 Press Follow 5 Enter Records cue 7 with a Follow time of five seconds After you start cue 7 the next cue in the Cue List plays automatically five seconds later Live RECORD CUE 7 FOLLOW 5 Chapter 10 Cues Combining Link and Follow to create playback loops You may use Link and Follow to create cue playback sequences in which groups of cues play automatically and repeatedly Follow these steps to create a five cue sequence Keystrokes e Create five cues numbered 1 2 3 4 and 5 Press Cue then enter 1 the number of the first cue you want to include in the playback loop Press Follow 5 Enter Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cues 2 through 5 Press Cue then enter 5 the last cue in the playback loop Press Link then enter 1 the first cue in the playback loop Press and enter the number of times you want the link to execute 1 9 then press Enter Action Command line Cue list displays cues 1 through 5 Selects the first cue Assigns a follow time of fi
19. has 118 virtual faders numbered 9 126 Virtual faders have no slider or fader key so you cannot take manual control of the fade You can use Rate and the rate wheel to take control of a cue running on a virtual fader Obsession Il User Manual 187 Fader status display The fader status display is a series of fields across the bottom of the Playback monitor It provides information about the cues loaded to physical faders including times and rates Each fader has two fields one gray and one blue The gray field provides information about pending cues including cue number fade time and rate The blue field provides information about currently running cues F3 F4 g3 pg Ta Ei 600 p ab O a de Pending cue number Pending part number Pending cue fade time Pending cue rate Running cue number Running part number Running cue fade time in red wait time in magenta Running cue rate 00003000 At the right end of the fader status display are four lines of information giving current follow and rate status 188 Chapter 13 Playing back cues Load and play cues Load cue Go Load cue places a cue in a fader in the pending position and highlights it on the cue list A loaded cue will not run until you press Go Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Load cue Live LOAD CUE 3 Enter the number of the cue Selects cue to run next Live LOAD CUE2 4 Press Enter Cue pending
20. nct cO nic ac 21 OU Presa we 8 276 Submaster 276 Unpark ed RR 275 276 A nee ey aay ante 179 180 Patch By channel 56 By dimmer 55 By label st o v vs 57 Channel zeros ecard et 59 Cleau 1s Dia ans estados doce xut 300 Dimmer label 60 Dimmer profile 61 DISPIAVi s s ERR 24 25 FIXtEG 2 22 cen ca as 91 93 One to one 54 PEOTIG 2 aite s moin 265 272 Proportional patch 58 Read from diskette 281 RES acd nce edes 300 Unpatch dimmer 59 Pause Fade 2 24 5 4 cose ia ala 189 SMBBE osa e 341 342 Pending cues 188 189 Personalities Create s LE unc 120 125 BI PEE ee 126 Deleting from show 88 Editan dee asc 122 Introduction 84 Pa Meats os aA 297 Rename 2x EIE 127 414 Index Using Attribute List 121 Personality Editor Channel Order 118 Data type 1 eee eee 119 DMX512 Order 119 Phantom o o 303 Phantom mode 310 Physical faderS 187 Pinout Monitor 05 367 381 Printe e iei do ia 372 Playback CUES eR po 189 190 LOU Sad 200 LiStS ic a hed 110 MECA A dpa Ar 261 Manual override 191 SMPTE events 341 Playback display 35 215 Playback monitor 188 PreMI W ous vot zn ee dee 30 Print Carnicel ccm 246 is oe 294 Flexichannel
21. 1 2 Enter Profile to select profile 12 2 Press Label Profile 8 LABEL Enter your label on the alphanumeric key board 4 Press the console Enter Profile 4 8 LABEL yourlabelB Reset all profiles at once from the Clear Functions menu 272 Chapter 18 Profiles Chapter 19 Park Park lets you set channels or dimmers at a level and maintain that level on stage regardless of other instructions Only dimmers that are patched may be parked Parked channel and dimmer levels aren t affected by any other instructions and won t be recorded into cues Parked channel and dimmer information isn t saved when you back up your show The following options are described in this chapter e Park dimmers and channels e Unpark dimmers and channels e Park groups cues and submasters e Park display Shortcut In Park mode you may omit use of the Park key for all procedures except Unpark All 5 Blackout will turn off parked dimmers and channels Obsession Il User Manual 273 Parking dimmers and channels Select the dimmer or channel to park and the level at which to park it If the dimmer is not patched you will get an error message when you try to set the level and you will not be able to park the dimmer Once a dimmer is parked nothing you do at the console affects that light except for Blackout until you unpark it When dimmers or channels are parked a message Parked Dimmers or Parked Channels ap
22. 1 Press Setup 2 Press 4 Hard Drive Functions Enter 3 Press S2 Store show Enter 4 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Action Command line Selects Setup display Selects Hard Drive Functions menu Command line reads Hard Drive Functions STORE SHOW Please confirm Message appears on screen Operation in progress Please stand by Command line reads Hard Drive Functions STORE SHOW E Complete 10 Parked channel and dimmer information is not saved when you back up your show Obsession Il User Manual 287 288 Reading all information When you read all show information and system settings from the hard drive and load it into memory the new show completely overwrites the current show including system settings Fades are interrupted during the read operation fades do not resume when read is complete Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 4 Hard Drive Selects Hard Disk Functions Functions Enter menu 3 Uselevel wheel or Next Highlights the selected show Last Page Page to select show You may also press S1 Select By Name enter the show s name on the alphanumeric keyboard and press Enter 4 Press S5 Read All Hard Drive Functions READ Enter ALL Please confirm 5 Press Enter or press Console reads system settings Clear to cancel patch and show into memory Message appears on screen Opera
23. 3 to replace the 1 with 3 Press Enter 3 While you edit the command line Obsession ll doesn t check to see if the command is legal Error messages won t appear until you move the highlight off the command line by pressing or press Enter Obsession Il User Manual 13 14 Colors Display colors for channels and fixture attributes signify current status and recent moves Following is an explanation of those colors for conventional channels displays as well as for ML displays Colors in Effect Park and Patch displays are included with each of those sections later in this chapter Channel attribute numbers Gray A iees Unselected channel unselected attribute in ML displays Yellow Selected channel selected fixture and attribute in ML displays Channels are selected when you press At and controlled by the fader wheel Cyan Attributes in ML displays that are on the encoders and trackpad White Parked channel Output levels White on Red Selected channel selected attribute in ML displays with level set directly by operator s command To Channel attribute in ML displays has been de selected with level set directly by oper ator s command Orange Focus group number for a channel or attribute set with reference to a focus group After you press Go or override the channel s level with a submaster the c
24. 367 Original Obsession console 386 PENSO aratro a bees 372 Remote video 381 A A 6 Invalid Input ooo o 13 J Jumper settings 391 JUMPE Sita ep Tee 376 K Keyboard see Alohanumeric keyboard Keys About ve oe ee 63 79 170 412 Index AI MAT 4s See ieee Se Rawr 193 Blae Kolb s cts ins da iaa 76 Load Subs edu i LPS 230 VIO Les ine lit ot act 314 SUD istic uo beanie USE Race 38 Sub Page 215 L Label CU eese ce ada 170 DEVICES i cd ds sb IM 308 Dimmer os ti lito a err ius 60 Effects e seo oa we 252 Frame table 117 A 206 Profile fi ea Oe Dg Oe e Le 272 S ubriasters ws Levee 222 Learn SMPTE m ova bat ria 336 LEDs Console int ps 364 DMX Switcher 363 Processors 1 ee sss 362 Submaster 215 Level Wheel enable disable 46 Levels Copy from fixture 138 Default Level 47 Set with cue or submaster 75 134 Set with library 141 Setting for fixtures 75 131 134 Sneaking 005 135 Libraries Clear attributes 142 Delete env 143 Display dee RRS 139 INTRODUCTION cos nd 85 Labels o ord tata 142 a a ad 110 LASTS 64 Aoi as ciun Ade 110 PP es uo plete dU 297 Recording 139 Set attribute levels 141 Touchscreen 99 139 Updating s omm TES se 140 Link Cue tocue 150 Cue tomacro
25. 370 DRG vios m Dura iden 388 E Edit Clear submasters 231 Copy cues 162 176 177 Copy groups 207 Copy submaster 231 Cue attributes 157 158 202 224 Cue in Blind 161 Cue Esta cederet 168 Delete cue 159 176 177 Delete groups 206 Delete part from multipart 185 Effects oed odes 246 248 GIOUDS eu temere 201 206 MOCO PEE 261 Profiles oi eres 269 271 Range of effect steps 240 Range of groups 209 211 Range of submasters 233 235 Renumber cue 169 Replace with 164 SMPTE aac erate ncn s 338 340 Submasters 223 228 Update cue 157 Effect Alternate 242 Assign channels 1 to 1 240 Attributes 241 A RS aad 242 BUG ea cu meret 242 Clearall 301 Configuring 241 Copy effect ere as eds 253 Creating StepS 239 Delete effect 253 Delete from cue 251 Delete step 247 410 Index DiSplay sos ridet ts ean 22 DwelltiMe 238 Edit se Sat dt 246 248 Edit range of steps 240 Effect ist tea 254 Fade time 005 243 High and low levels 238 PANTING tet S9 A ee 1S 238 Insert step 246 Ed E 252 Lit a ice eat ds 254 Loading into submasters 230 252 Loading to submasters 230 MoOdIfyiINQ oooo o o o 246
26. 5 Note You can also set the output level by pressing Level 4 5 Press Enter Press Next or Last to select the next or previous channel Press any other key to end channel check Live CHAN 1 50 m Note Entering a new command ends the channel check and returns channels to their previous levels About channel Press About and enter a channel to display a window containing attribute and status information Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press About Press 7 Press Enter Press Clear Action Command line ABOUT ABOUT CHANNEL 7 About Channel window appears ABOUT CHANNEL 7 About Channel window is cleared Note Press Next or Last to page through channels Obsession Il User Manual 79 About Channel 2 Cue 20 0 Cue 19 80 Cue 7 Cue 201 34 23 Not Parked e Most recent move The most recent cue in which this channel changed levels e Preceding move The second most recent cue in which this channel changed levels e First used The first cue in which this channel appears e Last used The highest numbered cue in which this channel appeared e Number of cues The total number of cues in which this channel appears e Non block moves The total number of cues in which this channel moves not counting blocked cues or blocking channels e Source The control device setting the channel s current level Possible sources include Keypad Fader Sub
27. AA A a cin 253 GIOUDSc cL Pat IR 207 MACON ASE ouv r nasa Ea 262 Profile te th tt 272 Range CUE sete erate ee 167 Submaster 210 233 SMPTE 4 ette o mU de V 339 Submaster to other page 221 Submasters 231 Cue AS groups cura ees 207 Block CUES soci 154 Cl arall etic ees erste 301 CODY 4 ou faired ea eee bee 162 COPY rame icone aor 167 Create loop sequence 151 Cue PISE fees iva BE aay i Ba 36 168 Cue Only 174 175 Default Fade Time 48 Delete caos a uta ed 159 Delete effect 251 Display colors 37 Follow CUBS 150 GOTO CUE ve eund 190 Label cues o oooo 170 Linkcues o o ooooo 150 Link tO Macro a 152 08d CU6 Los a ta e 189 Loading into submasters 229 Modifying attributes 158 Move range 167 MOVING S seite cand nase 166 Multipart cues 179 185 Park to fader rs sensa 155 Parked 6 8z v oes va 276 Playback 187 193 Range edit 163 Record as effect 250 Record in Blind 161 Record minus sub 148 Record w default time 147 Record w manual time 149 Record w profile 152 Record w splittime 148 Record w wait time 149 Recording 180 Remove FG references 157 202 224 Remove focus groups 158 205 225 Renumber
28. Enter ALL E Please confirm 5 Press Enter or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel Operation in progress Please stand by Command line reads Diskette Functions READ ALL Y Please confirm 8 Once the show information is read into memory the screen Switches to the Live display Reading only a show from diskette When you read only a show from a diskette and load it into memory the new show overwrites the current show but does not affect the current system settings To read only the show information follow the steps listed above but press 4 Read Show Enter Enter in step 4 Chapter 19 Diskette functions Reading patch or cues from diskette Patch Cues When you read patch or cue information from a diskette and load it into memory the new information overwrites the old Running fades are interrupted during the read operation and resume when read is complete Keystrokes 1 Insert diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setupl 3 Press 3 Diskette functions Enter 4 Press 5 Read patch Enter Enter 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the opera tion Action Command line Selects Setup display Selects Diskette Functions menu Diskette Functions READ PATCH Y Please confirm Message appears on screen Operation in progress Please stand by Command line reads Diskette Functions READ PATCH E Complete To read cue information follow the steps l
29. Libraries Libraries let you store commonly used attribute levels Libraries are particularly useful for creating color and gobo matches Unlike groups which store a different level for each and every fixture libraries set the same level on any fixture of the same personality Recalled levels may be applied to the whole fixture or only to selected attributes of a fixture Each personality has its own set of libraries that may not be used on other personalities If you record similar looks on different types of fixtures and record them into the same library number however then you can use that library number to set both types of fixtures Library zero is called the Home Library Use it to store the default values for each attribute that you want the fixture to go to when you select library zero or press Home Use Clear Library to clear the recorded value of a specific attribute in the library When all attributes in a library are cleared from all personalities Clear Library will remove the library from the library list Select a fixture to indicate which personality to clear If a range of fixtures are selected it clears the libraries of each personality within the range Obsession ll User Manual 85 Getting started with personalities Personality Setup display The Personality Setup display allows you to work with personalities in a variety of ways You can copy them to or from a diskette or hard drive You can view them on the s
30. O Step Steps in effect O Elements Channels or groups in each step O Time Time between the beginning of a step and the beginning of the following step O In Time it takes the step to fade from its current level to its high level 22 Chapter 3 Monitor displays O Dwell Time the step holds levels between the In fade and the Out fade Out Time it takes the step to fade from its current level to its low level Lo The lowest level channels or groups in the step are allowed to reach Oo Hi The highest level channels or groups in the step are allowed to reach amp Command line Softkeys Effect colors Steps display in Effect mode in the following colors Steps Gray ew Unselected step White Selected step Black on Gray Item being edited Obsession Il User Manual 23 Patch Patch allows you to create and modify your patch You may work in any of three displays By Dimmer By Channel or By Label 5 By Dimmer In the By Dimmer display the command line defaults to dimmer selection Patch By Dimmer O Dimmer Dimmers available for patching O Label Labels of dimmers available for patching Use Display Labels softkey to reveal Chan Channel to which dimmer is patched O Level Level at which dimmer is patched Full is not displayed Profile Profile assigned to the dimmer Command line O Softkeys Press S4 to toggle between display or suppress labels
31. or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel Operation in progress Please stand by Command line reads Diskette Functions STORE SHOW E Please confirm Y Viewing the show diskette directory Each diskette holds information for one show Use the Read directory option to find out the name storage date and time of the show on any diskette Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Insert a formatted diskette in the drive 2 Press Setupl Press 3 Diskette Selects Diskette Functions menu functions Enter 4 Press 2 Read directory Diskette Functions READ Enter Enter DIRECTORY Please confirm 5 Press Enter or press Advisory message appears with Clear to cancel show information Diskette Functions READ DIRECTORY 8 Please confirm 8 Obsession Il User Manual 279 280 Reading a show and system settings from diskette When you read a show and system settings from a diskette and load it into memory the new show completely overwrites the current show including system settings Therefore if you want to keep the current show store it as described on page 279 before you read a new show Fades are interrupted during the read operation and do not resume when read is complete Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Insert diskette in drive 2 Press Setupl 3 Press 3 Diskette Selects Diskette Functions functions Enter menu 4 Press 3 Read all Enter Diskette Functions READ
32. press 1 2 IS 1 HI9I 9 to enter December 31 1999 4 Press Enter Setting the time Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press S1 Set Time 3 Enter the current time in 24 hour format i e press 9 3 0 to enter 9 30 AM press 1 6 2 5 to enter 4 25 PM 4 Press Enter Chapter 4 System settings Action Command line Setup SET DATE Setup SET DATE 12 31 99 Setup SET DATE 12 31 99 Action Command line Setup SET TIME Setup SET TIME 16 25 Setup SET TIME 16 25 7 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights This chapter explains how to patch conventional lights and work with dimmers For information on patching moving light fixtures see Chapter 7 Patching moving lights page 83 An Obsession ll with 750 control channels can be patched to as many as 1 024 dimmers One with 1 536 control channels can be patched to as many as 1 536 dimmers The The Obsession II with 3 072 channels can be patched to as many as 3 072 dimmers You can use Obsession II s default one to one patch or you may create a custom patch In addition Obsession II s proportional patching capability allows you to scale dimmer output levels or assign one of 32 output profiles to dimmers This chapter includes the following sections e Select one to one patch e Create custom patch e Proportional patch e Label dimmers e Assign profiles to dimmers e Dimmer check e Flash dimmer e About dimmer e Multiplexed dim
33. you may modify it in the Obsession II Personality Editor For example you may edit existing attributes add new ones or delete some You may move attributes around in the Channel Order You may assign a remote dimmer to the personality Edit attributes Edit the attributes in a personality with the procedure given below Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 1 Personality Setup Enter Press 9 Enter Press S5 Pers Editor Press 6 Enter Press S2 Data Type S1 8 Bit Press S4 Independent Press S5 DMX Order 6 Press S6 Home Value 1 0 0 10 Press Enter 122 Chapter 8 ML setup Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies personality 9 to edit Personality Setup PERSONALITY 9 8 Enters the Personality Editor display Selects channel 6 to edit Specifies 8 Bit data type Specifies the attribute will be independent Specifies that this attribute is number 6 in the DMX512 Order Specifies a home level of 100 Modifies the attribute in the personality using the above specifications Personality Setup CHAN 6 8 BIT INDEPENDENT DMX512 ORDER 6 HOME VALUE 100 8 Assigning a remote dimmer Most moving lights have a dimmer built into the fixture itself but others need one assigned by the console The assigned dimmer may be in a special rack or it may be in the convention
34. 26 29 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 45 45 45 2 53 54 58 5 2 64 65 66 67 68 69 7 91 92 93 94 76 7 9 45 45 45 45 Foll Link Prof Rate Bl Pk Label Show Channels does not show channels used only in a group This makes it possible for you to create a library of frequently used groups without adding their channels to the display This also means that Show Channels is not available in the Group or ML Group displays 32 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Current Channels Press S3 Current Channels Enter In Live Current Channels displays all channels used in the show In Blind Submaster or Group Current Channels mode displays only the channels recorded in the currently viewed object The display below only shows the channels used in cue 1 Memory 1 Cues le Flexichannel 1 2 3 7 9 11 12 13 14 75 75 75 45 45 75 75 75 75 75 76 77 78 79 80 90 91 92 93 9 FL 45 45 45 45 45 63 63 FL 6 Foll Link Prof Rate Bl Pk Label S1 YA 5 S6 zum FOE EDGE UA sheet List Cue Note When Current Channels is used with the Preview command the channels shown are always the channels for the primary item not the previewed item If as a result channels are missing from the previewed item this is indicated by aW character where the missing channels would have appeared Obsession Il User Manual 33 View Channels Press S4 View Channels to make a range of channels visible If Show Channels or Current Channels are active View Ch
35. 4 Press Enter Enter the channels through which to search for the selected level 6 Press At and enter the level to search for 7 Press S8 Replace With 8 Enter new level for all chan nels in the range currently set at 55 percent 9 Press Enter Chapter 10 Cues Action Command line Displays Cue Spreadsheet Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 Spreadsheet CUE 1 58 Spreadsheet CUE 1 58 CHAN 8 12 Spreadsheet CUE 1 58 CHAN 8 gt 12 55 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 CHAN 8 gt 12 55 REPLACE WITH Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 CHAN 8 gt 12 55 REPLACE WITH FULL All levels in cues 1 through 5 and channels 8 through 12 that were at 55 percent are now set to full Spreadsheet CUE 1 5 CHAN 8 12 55 REPLACE WITH FULL 9 You may also use Replace With to replace the levels in a channel or channels with the levels in another channel across a range of cues This allows you to shuffle channel levels around easily or copy one channel s level into several channels Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 3 Press Cue and enter the cues to modify in this case 1 Thru 2 0 4 Press Enter Press 1 Thru 3 the channels to replace 6 Press S8 Replace With 7 Press 7 the channel to copy levels from 8 Press Enter 9 Press Enter Action Command line Displays Cue Spreadsheet Spreadsheet CUE 1 20 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 20 8 Spreadsheet
36. 75 134 Suppress Dimmers 57 Suppress Labels 55 SUD esteem andr caer 11 Swap focus 0 90 System settings Back Go To Cue 49 Blackout enable disable 51 Clear Channels enable disable 51 Cue Only Tracking 45 Default Cue Profile 50 Default Fade Time 48 Default Level 47 Default Sneak Time 49 Grandmaster enable disable 51 Number of channels 44 Number of dimmers 44 Screen format 46 System Shutdown Normal procedure 5 System shutdown ON BOOTUP Ss cried 8 T Take Control On boot Ups bet hee ewes 8 Target Device ID 328 Time Cue w default 147 Cue w manual time 149 Cue w splitfade 148 Cue w waittime 149 Default Back Go To Cue 49 Defaultfade 48 Default Sneak 49 Effect fade time 243 Effect In Dwell Out time 237 Effect step time 237 Effect Up Dwell Down 243 244 Follow time 150 Macro wait 257 Manual override 191 Rate override 192 Set system 20 52 Submaster 218 221 Wait time in multipart cue 182 Touchpad Multiuser 307 Touchscreen Auto setup 104 Backlighting 360 Button setup 105 Calibration zi eres 359 Introduced
37. CUE 1 gt 20 CHAN 1 gt 3 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 20 CHAN 1 gt 3 REPLACE WITH Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 20 8 CHAN 1 gt 3 REPLACE WITH 7 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 20 CHAN 1 gt 3 REPLACE WITH 7 Please confirm Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 20 CHAN 1 gt 3 REPLACE WITH 7 Please confirm Obsession Il User Manual 165 166 Moving cues You may move a cue to a different position in the cue spreadsheet If a cue is already recorded at that position the move replaces it Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 3 Press S5 Move Cue 4 Enter the number of the cue you wish to move Press At 6 Enter the new cue num ber e 7 Press Enter Cue is now located in a new position in the cue list Chapter 10 Cues Action Command line Selects Cue Spreadsheet Spreadsheet MOVE CUE Spreadsheet MOVE CUE 1 Spreadsheet MOVE CUE 1 Spreadsheet MOVE CUE 1 5 Spreadsheet MOVE CUE 1 DE Moving and copying ranges When you move or copy a range of cues the spacing between items in the new range is either identical to the original range or it is renumbered to consecutive whole numbers or consecutive tenths For example suppose you copy a cue range including cues 1 1 2 and 1 7 to a new range starting with cue 5 The cues in the new range can be numbered three ways To a matching range To match the original range specify only the starting cue number of the ne
38. Closed Remote Console enables Designer s Remote Obsession Il User Manual 389 390 6 7 amp 8 Appendix B References Off Open Off Open Console Reserved normal operation Unused normal operation Node board configuration Components of the original Obsession use one of two main circuit boards Each component contains either a Serf board part 4052B401 1 or a Node board part 4052B4014 Each of these boards has two versions depending on its date of manufacture Identify the circuit board by the revision character and part number printed on the board Illustrations of the four boards follow Node Board Revision 0 The Revision 0 Node Board appears in older Remote Interfaces original Obsession remote consoles and Designer s Remote Consoles It contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit and a set of 14 jumpers This illustration shows the board as oriented in a Remote Interface Main Processor WSN JHL NI 3QVIA 941 513 Z661 14BLAdO9 0 Add vLOvGZSOU Net ETCNet card jumpers Main DIP Video card Video card Switches W11211987654321 To enable the device for use on the ETCNet network adjust the settings of a number of jumpers on the circuit board 1 Locate Net jumpers 1 through 14 See illustration 2 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC connector
39. Convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in Blind When you create the first part all channels in the cue that you don t assign to the first part are placed in part 8 even if part 8 is the first part you create From part 8 you can assign them to other parts as you create them In this example cue 4 contains channels 1 through 20 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Bling 2 Press Cue 4 Enter Blind CUE 4 3 Press 1 Thru 2 0 Full Adds channels 1 through 20 Enter at Full to cue 4 Blind CUE 4 CHAN 1 gt 20 FULL 4 Press Part 1 Enter Creates part 1 Places channels Enter 1 Thru 5 Press 1 through 5 in part 1 Remaining Enter channels are placed in part 8 Blind CUE 4 PART 1 CHAN 1 gt 5N 5 Press Part 2 Enter Creates part 2 Moves channels Enter 6 Thru 1110 Press 6 through 10 from part 8 to part Enter 2 Blind CUE 4 PART 2 E CHAN 6 gt 10 6 Press Part 3 Enter Creates part 3 Moves channels Enter 1 1 Thru 1 5 11 through 15 from part 8 to Press Enter part 3 Blind CUE 4 PART 3 CHAN 11 gt 15 Note If the Obsession ll system is in tracking mode press Cue Only Track after you enter channel levels before pressing Enter This keeps modifications from tracking into subsequent cues If in Cue Only mode Cue Only Track will force changes to track 184 Chapter 12 Multipart cues Convert a multipart cue to a standard cue To con
40. Enter to select the I O Configuration Menu 3 Press 4 Enter to select the MIDI Show Control Menu The following display appears MIDI Show Control Menu 4 To allow your console to receive MIDI signals from another MIDI device press 1 Enter Enter to enable MIDI Show Control Input 5 If input is enabled the console s Obsession Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI device from which you want to receive signals Press 2 Enter and enter an ID 1 126 6 Toallow another MIDI device to receive MIDI signal from your console press 3 Enter Enter to enable MIDI Show Control Output 7 f output is enabled the Target Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device to which you want to send signals Press 4 Enter and enter an ID 0 126 328 Chapter 26 MIDI Show Control MSC commands received MIDI Show Control MSC lets devices send the following five commands to the Obsession ll console If MSC input is enabled on the console the console automatically executes the MSC commands Go If no cue number is specified Go is executed on the Obsession II The pending cue runs If a cue number is specified a Load Cue for that cue is executed followed by a Go The cue runs in its programmed fade time Stop The Stop command holds all fades Unlike pressing the Stop Back key consecutive Stop commands do not execute a Back command Resume Resumes all holding fades
41. Fixture Patch FIXTURE 6 E Sets the label of fixture 6 Fixture Patch FIXTURE 6 LABEL Show 1 8 Makes dimmer 100 the fixture s remote dimmer Fixture Patch FIXTURE 6 REMOTE DIMMER 100 8 Swaps Pan and Tilt Specifies a change to Frame Table 1 Selects Frame Table 1 Fixture Patch FIXTURE 6 FRAME TABLE 1 18 See Frame Tables page 112 for more information on setting up and using frame tables 92 Chapter 7 Patching moving lights Editing in Fixture Patch Move or delete fixtures in Fixture Patch either one at a time or multiple fixtures at once Moving a fixture Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Action Command Line Selects the Moving Lights Setup menu Selects the Fixture Patch display Fixture Patch Specifies fixture 9 to move Specifies move to fixture 2 Moves fixture from 9 to 2 Fixture Patch MOVE9 28 a If moving to a fixture number that is already assigned to a fixture the previously assigned fixture is deleted 2 Select 2 Fixture Patch Enter 3 Press More Softkeys S5 Move Fixture 9 Press At 2 Press Enter Enter from the list Deleting a fixture Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 2 Fixture Patch Enter Press More Softkeys S5 Delete Fixture 9 Press Enter Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML menu Selects the Fixture Patch display Fixture Patch Specifies fixture to delete Del
42. Group and enter the group 3 Press Full or press At and use the keypad to set a level 4 Press Enter Action Command line Live GROUP 1 Live GROUP 1 FULL Live GROUP 1 FULL a You may also select the group from the touchscreen 200 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Modifying groups You may modify groups in Group ML Group Live or ML Live modes Unless itis further specified below Group mode refers to either Group or ML Group and Live mode refers either to Live or ML Live Special rules for focus groups When a group is used as a focus group such as to set levels in a cue or submaster special rules apply when modifications to the group are made e f you delete a channel from a group used as a focus group Obsession ll replaces any reference to the focus group by a zero No other references to the focus group are affected e f you delete an entire group used as a focus group Obsession Il replaces all references to the focus group by the actual levels in the focus group e fa group contains references to a focus group you can update the focus group by re recording or updating the group on stage If you change the level of a channel that references a focus group the focus group updates and the group retains the reference If you change a level that is in the group itself the change is made directly to the group In Group mode Follow these steps to modify channels in a group in Group d
43. Load Executes a Load Cue command Fire Executes the specified macro Macro number must be in the range 1 127 MSC commands transmitted MIDI Show Control MSC lets the console send the following commands to MIDI devices If MSC output is enabled on the console the console automatically sends the MSC commands Go or Obsession Il transmits Go with cue number GoToCue Load Cue Obsession II transmits Load with cue number Macros For macros 1 127 Obsession ll transmits Fire with macro number Load If a fade is running Obsession ll transmits Stop Otherwise Obsession ll transmits Go with the number of the previous cue Obsession Il User Manual 329 330 Chapter 26 MIDI Show Control Chapter 27 SMPTE Your console lets you create and run shows by a SMPTE time code either in Pause Mode or in Run Mode The system will run recorded SMPTE events in response to a SMPTE time code it receives from an external source If the external SMPTE time code is interrupted the internal clock can take over with its own SMPTE time code A SMPTE program consists of as many as 500 individual SMPTE events 3 000 for Obsession II 3000 A SMPTE event consists of a cue a submaster bump button or a macro The event is set to play back at a specified time along the time code stream SMPTE times are expressed in hours minutes seconds and frames with each second broken down into thirty frames The
44. Negative 241 Out times uan daa 238 POSI Brisas pe eR 241 RaNndOM coco 242 Random rate 245 Record as cue 250 Reverse este Rae pas ds 242 Step time 0 237 Sl6pS zr xS 237 239 248 MESA n ads eru de a Er 249 TeststepsS Lose eed uA 249 Up Dwell Down time 243 244 Email goin Ll Suh Wet feted a od 6 Encoders Accelerati0N 102 Auto SETUP o 103 BacklightinQ 360 Introduced o o o o 98 Placas Rs 297 SetlevelS 131 Setting levelS 131 SOU tos 100 101 EBteruc ce reta ur tec Dota had 69 Erase show 00 0000 290 Error messages ETC Ike d ua ndn 396 397 ETCLink Secondary 326 Programming 393 395 Errors ETCLink Critical 396 ETCLink Secondary 396 ETC locati0NS o o oooo oo 6 ETCLink Advisory messages 396 Conflgule votre ees 316 Dimmer Status 322 Enable Disable messages 326 Error messages 396 397 Rack Status 323 System Status 324 System Status 324 ETCNet Diagnostics eos 27 Enable disable 365 Multiuser 00 303 Planning Guide 359 386 Set pici eve sees 359 Expands ec ume cette n Lees 35 F Fade Tate lianas s 192 Fader A 191 Physical enn er Mss 187 Statuses ios een eee le ae eae 35 Status display 188 MI
45. Press Sub Pagel 2 Switch from Blind submaster Enter page 1 to page 2 3 Press Sub Pagel 1 Switch from Blind submaster Enter page 2 to page 1 234 Chapter 15 Submasters Range editing in Submaster List Submaster List allows range editing of all attributes visible on the screen For example you can assign a five second wait time to submasters 1 through 5 in one command Follow these steps to do so Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub S4 Sub Displays Submaster List List Press Sub 1 Thru 5 Sub List SUB 1 5 Press Time 5 Sub List SUB 1 gt 5 TIME 5 Press Enter Sets upfade for submasters 1 5 to five seconds Sub List SUB 1 gt 5 TIME 5 E Obsession Il User Manual 235 236 Chapter 15 Submasters Chapter 16 Effects Steps You may create up to 100 effects each with up to 99 steps and record them into cues or load them to submasters Each effect includes level and timing controls for the steps in the effect and overall timing controls for the effect itself This chapter includes the following sections e Steps e Creating effects and steps e Assigning effect characteristics e Modifying effects e Testing effects and steps e Recording an effect to a cue e Loading an effect to a submaster e Labeling effects e Deleting effects e Copying effects e The Effect List A step contains channels groups and or submasters also known as elements Each step in an effect is a
46. Preview Enter Levels currently on stage appear immediately under the channel numbers The levels for the next cue appear under the current level Above the command line the display indicates what is being previewed 26 27 26 29 3H 31 Channel Namber 31 6352 33 34 35 Current 36 77 78 79 88 81 cue levels Next cue level Cue in ne preview 2 Previewing Live Preview ERI softkey e Press S1 Preview in Live or Blind enter the desired number and press Enter to preview a specific cue e Press S1 Preview Sub enter the submaster number and press Enter to preview a specific submaster e Press S1 Preview Group enter the group number and press Enter to preview a specific group Use Next and Last to page through the function you are previewing Focus group numbers are hidden in Preview 30 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Hexichannel The Flexichannel feature allows you to control which channels are shown in the Live Blind Group and Submaster and spreadsheet displays Flexichannel has three modes Show Channels Current Channels and View Channels The channels may be in cues effects or submasters or may be channels you have selected recently You may also display any specific range of channels Gaps in the channel list are marked by a vertical grey line All other screen elements are unchanged Using flexichannel Press S8 Flexichannel and then select the mode
47. Specifies a frame ber 1 6 Press Label and enter your label for the frame such as Amber using the alphanumeric keyboard 7 Press Enter Labels the frame Frame Editor FRAME NUMBER 1 LABEL Amber 8 a For efficiency you could press T or 4 to move the cursor to one or more additional frames for labeling finishing at the last frame by pressing Enter You must press Label for each frame you label Obsession Il User Manual 115 Editing a frame You may edit the settings for an existing frame To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Gotothe Frame Editor see Frame editor page 113 2 Press S1 Frame Num Specifies a frame ber 2 Press Label or the soft If editing the label enter your key that corresponds with long label for the specified the setting you wish to frame change Enter the change Specifies the change Press Enter Assigns the change Frame Editor FRAME NUMBER LABEL yourlabel m Inserting or deleting frames You may insert new frames into the frame list and delete frames from the list 22 All frames for the attribute are similarly affected Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Gotothe Frame Editor see Frame editor page 113 2 Press S5 Insert Frame Specifies the number of the 4 or frame to insert or delete Press S6 Delete Frame 8 3 Press Enter Inserts frame Frame Editor INSERT FRAME 4 22 All existing frames
48. Tel 852 2799 1220 e Fax 4852 2799 9325 Web www etcconnect com e Email mail etcconnect com e Copyright 1999 e Specifications subject to change 4152M11002 e Released 4 99
49. and enter the last number press 1 Thru 9 e To select all but one of a group of consecutively numbered channels enter the first channel press Thru enter the last channel then press and enter the channel to leave out press 1 Thru 9 5 Once you have entered your channel selections you are ready to set channel levels Selecting channels with Flexichannel active Working with Flexichannel active differs from working without Flexichannel in only one respect selecting channels with Thru In All Channels mode pressing 1 Thru 5 Enter selects all channels from 1 to 5 When Flexichannel is enabled the Thru key functions slightly differently In Show Channels Current Channels or View Channels mode pressing 1 Thru 5 Enter selects all visible channels from 1 to 5 To select all channels from 1 to 5 visible or hidden press 1 Thru Thru 5 Enter 8 amp If the first channel in the selected range is unused you don t need to use Thru Thru 70 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Setting channel levels You can assign levels to channels in any of the following ways Number pad Use the format At Enter where the first number is the channel and the second is the level If you enter a single digit for the level Obsession multiplies it by ten In other words 4 At 1 sets channel 4 to 10 percent To set channel 4 to 1 percent enter 4 At
50. follow these steps 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 VO Configuration Enter 3 Press 3 DMX Ports Enter 4 Press S1 DMX Port enter the port number and press En ter or use 1 to select a port 5 Press S2 Toggle Mode and press Enter twice to confirm your choice 6 Console indicates mode as either Normal or Dim Dbl Setting DMX512 speed Obsession ll is designed to run at the highest rate provided for in DMX512 specifications Some dimming systems including some Colortran ENR dimmers may require a signal slower than the full DMX512 specification If necessary adjust the console s DMX512 signal speed Speed choices are Slow Medium Fast and Max If you have problems with outputs flashing fades not running smoothly or unselected dimmers rising spontaneously experiment with slower speeds until the symptoms disappear If they persist please contact ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 1 Press Setup Select 2 I O Configuration Enter Press 3 DMX Ports Enter Press S4 to select the speed Press Enter to confirm your choice 0701 35 eU IS New speed setting appears on the display Appendix A Installation and setup Installing the alphanumeric keyhoard You may substitute any standard PC AT compatible alphanumeric keyboard for the keyboard that shipped with your Obsession II system If the keyboard is switchable use it only in AT compatible mode ETC recommends the Ch
51. intensity pan and tilt Pan and tilt control the fixture s vertical and horizontal movements Each attribute is controlled by a separate DMX512 channel This fixture would require three channels to control it Most attributes fall into one of four categories The categories are Beam Image Color and Position and you can change the attributes included in each Beam attributes include Intensity Zoom Focus Iris and Frost Image attributes include Gobo and effects F X Color attributes include Color Cyan Magenta and Yellow Position attributes include Pan and Tilt Personalities A personality is a file containing a description of the attributes you use to control a given fixture or device and the order in which the attributes are mapped to DMX512 addresses You may have up to 20 personalities in a show and these can be copied to the show from hard drive or diskette Once a personality is copies to the show you can use it to patch all fixtures of that same type to DMX512 addresses Personalities for most of the leading moving lights on the market are included on the Obsession II hard drive If your fixture s personality is not there you can create it in Obsession Il Also Obsession Il allows you to edit existing personalities ETC will continue to develop new personalities for ML fixtures and make them available for download from ETC s internet website at www etcconnect com html service htm Chapter 7 Patching moving lights
52. or Update to keep modifications from tracking into subsequent cues If in Cue Only mode Cue Only Track will force changes to track For further information see Cue Only Track key page 175 e fthere are levels for a channel on stage that has a focus group reference the focus group s level is updated while the cue retains the reference If the focus group no longer exists levels for those channels are stored in the cue that referenced the non existing group Modifying channels or fixture attributes in a cue Use the procedure below to re record a cue from a modified look on stage Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Go To Cue enter Plays back selected cue cue number and press Enter 3 Select channels or fixture Modifies cue channel levels attributes set levels to make the desired changes to the cue 4 Press Record Enter Re records cue with desired Enter Second Enter modifications confirms 156 Chapter 10 Cues Removing all focus group links You may re record a cue to remove all focus group links in it Remove those links with the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Goto ML Live Select a display 2 Press Record Focus ML Live RECORD FOCUS Group GROUP 3 Press Cue 5 Selects cue 5 ML Live RECORD FOCUS GROUP CUE 5 4 Press Enter Re records cue 5 without any focus group links ML Live RECORD FOCUS GROUP CUE 5 m Usin
53. to delete the I O Devices DELETE DEVICE device or Clear to cancel Please Confirm Obsession Il User Manual 313 Storing Multiuser configuration Mirror Your Multiuser configuration remains in your system s memory until it is replaced or you reset the system You may back up configuration information on a diskette or the hard drive See page 282 or 291 for instructions In Multiuser mode the Mirror key located between Memo and Expand on Remote Consoles and Designer s Remote Consoles lets you monitor the actions of the other User As soon as you use a slider run a cue or generate a command line instruction your displays return to normal Enable Disable Multiuser devices You may disable any device on the network from any Full Console Remote Console or Designer s Remote Console The device stays disabled until it is either enabled from a console or turned off and on At least one console must remain enabled Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects Input Output Configuration Enter Configuration menu 3 Press 2 Multiuser Selects Multiuser Configuration Enter Configuration display 4 Press S1 Device I O Devices Number and enter the DEVICE NUMBER device 5 Press S4 Enable I O Devices DEVICE Disable NUMBER ENABLE DISABLE 6 Press Enter to confirm Device is disabled the assignment I O Devices DEVICE NUMBER ENAB
54. 169 Replace with 164 Spreadsheet 163 167 TLC Oo s sem Scu 173 175 lJpdates i cer stets 157 Use to set levels 75 134 Cue check 190 264 Cuento hoa an t 35 168 COlOTS Bits delle ts puce mede wane 37 DIS Si dan 36 Cue Only 174 175 176 Clear Channels 177 Explained med 174 System settingS 45 Cue Only Track key BIN Ie e were err ir 176 177 Change level 176 CODY S este c eei e aes 176 Delete ici E k 176 Explained 175 PIVEN ossa cd ce ERE 175 Record a A 175 Updates zie Bag Ph epee 175 Custom patCh 55 D Data types eee eee 119 Date set system 52 Default Level 47 Delete Ce sinc Seek 159 176 177 Cue Only Track key 176 Devices from list 313 Elec utere a edo 253 Effect from cue 25 Effect steps n sees 247 E eu PLE et 206 Lib arie Dti 143 VE el eee i 262 Part of multipart cue 185 Personality 126 Show from hard drive 290 Submaster 0 231 Designer s Remote Console 388 DIP switch settings 390 Diagnostics 27 360 Dimmer Assign remote 123 Dimmer check 62 Flash ese oet 62 Installation 368 Label eer A 60 LASA a hee 317 321 Park dimmer 274 Patel utem mc orto 53 59 PIROUE ism decree pr
55. 274 Unparking dimmers and channelS 275 Unparking one dimmer or channel 275 Unparking all dimmers or channels 275 Parking groups cues and submasters 276 Chapter 19 Diskette functions 0 2 2 0 277 Diskette management 0 0000 eee eee 278 Formatting a disSkette 25 a vues wee eee eS 278 Storing a show and system settings on diskette 279 Viewing the show diskette directory 279 Reading a show and system settings from diskette 280 Reading only a show from diskette 280 Reading patch or cues from diskette 281 A atem ite at ol cx bp d 281 CUA iue Party die ered err bare neutr x Dag 281 Storing I O configuration 0 0 ee 282 Restoring configuration s saaa saarea 282 Other optiols Isso seat oN poh arses aa es 282 Transferring shows between consoles 283 Chapter 21 Hard drive functions oos 285 Drive management 2 0000 cee ee eee 285 Viewing hard drive directory 205 286 Storing a show and system settings 287 Reading all information 0 00000 ee eee 288 Reading only ashow 00000 22 eeeeeee 288 Reading part of ashow 0 2 ee eee 289 Erasing a ShOW i sages scx dere in a dap d qun oe 290 Replacing a Show 000200000 less 290 Storing I O configuration 0 0000 eee eee 291 Restoring conf
56. 296 one and one half percent per month late payment penalty ETC will have the option of withholding performance under any and all orders from the Customer if an invoice remains unpaid after 30 days All disputes otherwise unresolved between ETC and Customer shall be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction for the location of ETC s offices Dane County Wisconsin If suit or action is instituted by ETC to enforce payment or performance by the Customer the Customer agrees to pay all costs and attorney s fees incurred Claims for shortage or damaged must be made within ten 10 days Equipment is carefully packed and delivered in good condition to the carrier All claims for loss or damage in transit must be made by the consignee directly to the carrier ETC will render every aid and assistance in the presentation and enforcement of such claims without waiver of our rights to have compliance with the terms of payment of our invoices Equipment returned without ETC s written permission will not be accepted Equipment returned for credit must be in accordance with established RMA procedures Equipment must be unused in original cartons and in saleable condition subject to ETC s quality control and test inspection Restocking charges of 25 00 or 2596 whichever is greater plus any repacking or reconditioning costs will be deducted Returns for warranty work will be via warranty procedures In no case will permission be gran
57. 51 65 80 85 90 95 100 85 90 95 FL Intensity Fade Completion 3 Fade points at zero remain at zero when executing a Fill Between Obsession Il User Manual 271 Resetting a profile You may return one edited profile at a time to its original state 4 Edited preset profiles return to the curves specified on page 266 and an edited user defined profile 10 32 returns to a linear curve Reset a profile within the Profile Display by pressing 7 Reset Profile Enter You are given an opportunity to either confirm by pressing Enter or disregard the reset command with Clear Copying a profile You may copy a profile in the Profile Display to another profile number for instance to produce an edited version of a profile while keeping the original intact Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press S6 Copy Profile Specify to copy 4 Profile COPY PROFILE 2 Press At Specify where to copy 3 Press Enter Enter Profile amp COPY PROFILE it O 1 Please confirm Labeling a profile While in the Profile Display use the alohanumeric keyboard to name profiles up to 25 characters For example name profile 12 Fast Rise with the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Profile
58. 64 If you are entering multiple attributes use Thru or the softkey All Enter attribute category commands using Position Image Beam and Color keys on the keyboard or softkeys Navigating in ML displays Once you select a fixture and attribute press T or 1 to select the preceding or following attribute If an attribute does not exist in the selected fixture it is skipped and the next one is selected The display centers if possible on the selected attribute If a fixture is selected press e or gt to select the preceding or following fixture selecting the same attribute If the new fixture doesn t have the currently selected attribute it skips it The display centers on the selected fixture to keep it on the screen If no fixture is selected press or gt to select the cue before or after the current one Press Page or Page to scroll the screen five fixtures to the right or left This doesn t affect selected attributes or fixtures If Library is on the command line Next and Last scroll through the libraries applying their levels to the selected attributes of the selected fixtures If you hit a library that doesn t have a setting for the selected attribute the fixtures revert to their original levels Chapter 3 Monitor displays Undo ML displays Press Undo to clear an unterminated command line or toggle the level of the last channel or attribute changed by a command line co
59. 9 10 Channel Usage SMPTE Events Macro Editing Select Range Select Event Replace Mode Cues Insert Event Delete Entry Cue Moves Levels Bump Clean Macro Groups Bump On Copy Macro Effects Subs Bump Off Go Sub Bump On Sub Bump Off Used Unused Rate Macro Wait Sort Dimmer Monitoring Return New Features Hold for Input Personality Setup Replay Backup Hard Drive Record Backup Diskette Go To Start Show Go to End Personality Ed PE Print Screen Delete Personality Print All Copy To Return Personality Ed PE Return Date Type DT Return Personality Ed MS Attribute 8 bit Personality Data Type DT 16 bit Remote Dimmer Independent Discrete Insert Channel DMX512 Order Move Channel Home Value Delete Channel Frame Editor FE Attribute List Return Frame Editor FE Return Snap Type ST Return Frame Editor MS Frame Number None Start Value Snap Type ST Snap High Snap Low Short Label Snap Mid Insert Frame Snap Value Delete Frame Skip Frame Frame Table Copy Table Return Appendix D Softkeys Return Return Setup Menu Option 13 Fixture Patch Attribute Patch AT Personality Fixture Start Channe
60. Dwell Out Enter 8 the new In time Press Enter Action Command line Selects the effect Effect 7 Effect 7 STEP 2 ELEMENTS Effect 7 STEP 2 IN TIME Effect 7 STEP 2 IN TIME 8 In time reset to eight seconds Effect 7 STEP 2 IN TIME Obsession Il User Manual 247 248 Add elements You may add a channel or group to a step Keystrokes 1 Select the step to modify using J and T or press Stepl 1 Enter 2 Press 4 3 Press 7 4 Press Enter Action Command line Effect 1 Step 4 Elements Effect 1 8 Step 4 Elements Specifies channel 7 to add Effect 1 Step 4 E Elements 7 Channel 7 is added to the element list Effect 1 8 Step 4 Elements a If you enter elements without using the channels or groups replace the current element list Delete elements You may remove a channel or group from a step Keystrokes 1 Select the step to modify using J and T or press Stepl 1 Enter 2 Press 3 Press 2 4 Press Enter Action Command line Effect 1 8 Step 4 Y Elements Effect 1 Step 4 Elements Specifies channel 2 to delete Effect 1 Step 4 Elements 2 Channel 2 is deleted from the element list Effect 1 8 Step 4 Elements a If you enter elements without using the channels or groups replace the current element list Chapter 16 Effects Test effects and steps Once you create an effect you
61. Group List GROUP 1 5 alphanumeric keyboard to LABEL Act One enter Act One 4 Press Enter Sets label for groups 1 through 5 to Act One Group List GROUP 1 5 LABEL Act One 8 Obsession Il User Manual 211 212 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Chapter 15 Submasters Each submaster consists of a slider a bump button and an LED The slider lets you bring the submaster look up manually The bump button lets you flash the submaster to its full recorded level or begin its programmed fade if it has one The LEDs show you which submasters are recorded and whether they are additive or inhibitive This chapter includes the following sections e Submaster types e Submaster pages e Submaster LEDs e Submaster bump buttons e Record a submaster e Control submaster fades manually e Modify submasters in Sub display e Modify submasters in Live display e Use Update to modify submasters e Use Update to add selected channels e Create inhibitive submasters e Load cues groups or effects into submasters e Copy submasters e Clear submasters e Submaster Spreadsheet e Submaster List Obsession Il User Manual 213 Submaster types Submasters can be additive or inhibitive A green submaster bump button LED indicates an additive submaster red indicates an inhibitive submaster Additive submasters An additive submaster contains a set of channels recorded at proportional levels Additive submasters interact with establis
62. Live LOAD CUE2 When you press Go a physical fader begins the fade of the pending cue or resumes the pending cue s fade if it had been previously halted by Stop Back Stop Back If a cue is running Stop Back halts the cue s fade Resume the fade by pressing Go If a cue is not running Stop Back plays the cue on the cue list prior to the one most recently played If you press Stop Back again with no cue running it plays the cue on the cue list prior to the cue previously played by Stop Back and so on Cues play back using the default Back time If an effect was loaded into the previous cue pressing Stop Back won t run the effect Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Load Cuel 2 Selected cue is loaded and Enter pending Live LOAD CUE 2 Press Go Selected cue runs 3 While cue is running press Running cue pauses Stop Back 4 Press Go Cue resumes Once cue finishes press Previous cue fades up on stage Stop Back in default Back time Obsession Il User Manual 189 Go to cue Go To Cue lets you jump quickly to a cue out of sequence and bring it up on stage If you do not specify a time the fade uses the System Settings menu default Back Go To Cue time Go To Cue runs the cue using the first available fader You can take manual control of the fade just as you do with cues run with the Go button Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Go To Cue Live GO
63. MACRO 1 3 Press S5 Sub Bump On Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 4 Press Bump 3 Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 3 b Press S7 Macro Wait Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 3 MACRO WAIT 6 Enter 5 and press Enter Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 3 MACRO WAIT 5 E 7 Press S6 Sub Bump Off Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 3 MACRO WAIT 5 E SUB BUMP OFF 8 Press Bump 3 Macro line reads SUB BUMP ON 3 MACRO WAIT 5 E SUB BUMP OFF 3 9 Press Store Macro Records macro 1 leaves editing mode 10 Press Live M1 Macro runs Note Be certain to press the actual sub bump button after S3 Sub Bump On and S4 Sub Bump Off rather than using the keypad Chapter 17 Macros Play macros To run macros 1 through 7 press the appropriate macro key To run any other macro press M the macro number and Enter For example to run macro 10 press M 1 0 Enter A message above the command line indicates what macro is running e g Executing Macro 7 Only one macro may run at a time When macro wait is in effect the message Holding For Macro Wait appears above the command line The message disappears when macro wait ends Cancel a macro To cancel a running macro press any key unless you are at a Hold for input point At a Hold for Input press the macro key of the running macro or press M to cancel the macro Modify macros Edit mode In the Macro display you can edit macros in Insert or Repl
64. ML Llve Blind or ML Blind displays 6 An example for Live follows Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Group Tells the Obsession system to treat the next entry as a group Live GROUP 3 Press Cue and enter the Live GROUP CUE 1 number of the cue to bring up 4 Press At and enter the Live GROUP CUE 1 50 level at which to bring the cue up Or press Full 5 Press Enter The cue s channels are brought up on stage at the specified level Live GROUP CUE 1 508 a Substitute Sub in this step to group from a submaster 36 Only selects channels with non zero levels Obsession Il User Manual 207 Using Groups to modify cues groups or submasters You can use groups or focus groups to modify cues submasters or other groups The example below shows the addition of a group to a submaster Use an analogous procedure to modify cues or groups Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub and enter the Sub SUB 2 submaster Press Enter Sub SUB 2 m 4 Press Group to indicate Sub SUB 2 GROUP that the next number entered will be a group Enter the group Sub SUB 2 E GROUP 1 6 Press Full to set group Sub SUB 2 E GROUP 1 FULL channels to full recorded levels Or press At and use the keypad to set lev els at a percentage of the group s levels 7 Press Enter to re record Sub the modified submaster SUB 2 m GROUP 1 FULL m
65. Obsession Il User Manual 341 342 Pause mode If the SMPTE clock is running press More Softkeys S4 Pause to interrupt the SMPTE clock when you are programming the console While in Pause mode the Step softkey lets you manually control playback of SMPTE events Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Selects SMPTE Events display Enter 3 Press More Softkeys 4 Press S5 Step Step Advances to the next recorded only appears on the soft SMPTE event key in Pause Mode 5 Repeat step 4 to advance through SMPTE events 6 Use Set Time to change Causes the next event after the the current time then new current time to execute press S5 Step See for instructions on setting the time External SMPTE source Once you record a series of events in a SMPTE program the console automatically runs the program in response to SMPTE time code To run the SMPTE program enter Run Mode and start the flow of external SMPTE data Make sure External SMPTE Input is enabled Note In redundant tracking systems the SMPTE signal must be sent to both the Master and the Backup systems to provide redundancy Since SMPTE cannot be Y ed and your output device has only one port you must use a SMPTE splitter Chapter 27 SMPTE Internal SMPTE clock You can use the Internal SMPTE clock to run the SMPTE program or as a backup to the external source You may set a particular time for t
66. Patch DIMMER 5 gt 9 DIMMER DOUBLE Please confirm 66 amp Dimmer Doubling is available only for ETC dimming systems operating at 115 volts 60 Hz It is not available for systems operating at other voltages or frequencies 7 The Source Four lights should be running 77V HPL lamps when operated by a doubled dimmer Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Independent channels An independent channel is not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Rem Dim Flash Channel Check or solo submaster bump buttons Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 If patch is in By Dimmer or By Label mode press S2 By Channel 3 Use keypad to enter the number s of the channel s to make independent 4 Press S8 Independent 5 Press Enter Action Command line Selects By Channel mode Patch CHAN 18 Patch CHAN 18 INDEPENDENT Patch CHAN 18 INDEPENDENT Note Press Go To Cue 0 Enter to take all channels other than independent channels to zero Press Go To Cue Out Enter to take all channels including independent channels to zero Setting Live channel levels in Patch In Patch by Channel mode you may set channels to levels on stage Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 If patch is in By Dimmer or By Label mode press S2 By Channel 3 Use keypad to enter the number s of the channel s that you want to set to a level 4 Press At Enter the desired level 6 Press
67. Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 1 Personality Setup Enter 3 Press S1 Hard Drive Econ Press S2 Diskette OF Press S3 Show 4 Press Enter 5 Press S6 Delete Person ality 4 6 Press Enter Chapter 8 ML setup Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies the location of the personality If the personality is on the hard drive the Command Line reads Personality Setup HARD DRIVE E Specifies personality 4 is to be deleted from the specified location Deletes the personality Personality Setup DELETE PERSONALITY 4 Re naming a personality You may re name a personality which is done by changing a personality s label Follow the procedure below Keystrokes IP 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 1 Personality Setup Enter Press S1 Hard Drive Or Press S2 Diskette Or Press S3 Show Press Enter Type Press Label and type your label on the alphanumeric keyboard Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies the location of the personality If looking on the hard drive the Command Line reads Personality Setup HARD DRIVE E Specifies personality 4 for editing Specifies a label for the personality Assigns the label to the personality Persona
68. a single cue before attempting this action Invalid channel number Channel number entered must be between one and the number of channels designated in the system settings Invalid date Date must be in format MM DD YY Month must be between 1 and 12 day must be between one and the number of days in that month and year 1992 2091 must be between 00 and 99 The date is separated by dashes Invalid dimmer number Dimmer number entered must be between one and the number of dimmers designated in the system settings Invalid page number Page number must be between zero and 15 Invalid selection Selection number must be one of those offered on the menu Invalid time Enter time in format with the first two numbers being minutes up to 99 and the second two numbers being seconds up to 59 Times may also be entered in format with the numbers before the decimal being seconds and the number after the decimal being tenths of seconds Label is too long Label lengths vary depending on what you are labeling The following list shows the character limit for each label type Patch labels 5 characters Cue labels 15 characters Effect labels 20 characters Group labels 20 characters Submaster labels 25 characters Profile labels 25 characters List sizes unequal If you are copying lists of items to a new location both lis
69. alphanumeric keyboard to type the desired label 5 Press Enter on the key pad Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Action Command line Selects By Dimmer mode Patch DIMMER 5 Patch DIMMER 5 LABEL Stage Patch DIMMER 5 LABEL Stage B Assigning a profile to a dimmer You may select one of 32 output curves profiles and assign it to a dimmer instead of a proportional patch level These profiles allow you to compensate for non linear light outputs from certain types of fixtures or incorporate a preferred response in a fade If you do not select a profile all dimmers use profile zero a linear fade By Dimmer mode is used in the following example Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Patch 2 fnecessary press S1 By Selects By Dimmer mode Dimmer 3 Enter the dimmer s to Patch DIMMER 5 7 which you want to assign a profile 4 Press Profile then enter Patch DIMMER 5 7 PROFILE 2 the number of the desired profile 5 Press Enter Patch DIMMER 5 7 PROFILE 2 7 Note You may set an output profile for all dimmers patched to a channel or a list of channels For example to set all dimmers patched to channels 1 through 5 to profile 2 enter 1 Thru 5 Profile 2 Enter To reset profile to a linear fade assign the dimmer a proportional level of Full or press Dim 5 Profile Enter Obsession Il User Manual 61 62 Dimmer check You may check dimmers by
70. and whether the secondary processor is capable of providing DMX512 output concurrently with the main processor All of these conditions are factory preset for the system that ETC shipped but you may need to change them if your system changes Go to the hardware setup menu Each hardware setup option below is available after first selecting Hardware Setup from the console setup menu Press Setup 1114 Enter to go to the hardware setup menu ETCNet ETCNet must be enabled in Obsession II for it to operate properly If not set enabled proceed as follows 1 Press 1 Enter to select ETCNet 2 Press Enter Enter Enter to change the status 3 The change takes place the next time the system is rebooted Redundant tracking Examine whether redundant tracking is enabled or disabled for your system If incorrect proceed as follows 1 Press 2 Enter to choose the Redundant Tracking option 2 Press Enter Enter to change the status The change takes place the next time the system is rebooted Obsession ll User Manual 365 366 Tracking Unit If redundant tracking is enabled see Redundant Tracking above follow the procedure below to set one processor as primary the other as secondary backup 1 Switch one of the processors ON and the other processor OFF Press 3 Enter to choose the Tracking Unit option If you want to change that status of the processor that is on Press Enter Enter 4 Repea
71. button to make your selection See Touchscreen page 99 Obsession Il User Manual 139 140 Updating a library You can update a library with the keypad This will not add new attributes to the library only update levels for those attributes already in the library When multiple fixtures are selected the update occurs for each personality in the selected fixtures To update a library with the keypad follow this procedure Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 4 Press S4 Update S2 Library 2 5 Press Enter Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Action Command Line Selects a fixture ML Live FIXTURE 1 Selects an attribute ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 Specifies the library to update ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 UPDATE LIBRARY 2 Sets the selected attributes to the library levels ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 UPDATE LIBRARY 2 E Using a library If a level for an attribute is recorded in a library you can use the library to set the attribute s level If you attempt to assign an attribute a level in a library and the attribute is not recorded in the library the attribute s level is unaffected To set an attribute s level to a library level follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 Press S2 Library 2 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects a fixture ML Live FIXTURE1 S
72. can make an attribute dependent or independent in Fixture Patch The same softkey toggles between the two conditions Make an attribute independent below assuming it was dependent before executing this procedure Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 2 Fixture Patch Enter 3 Press 1 S7 Attribute Patch Enter 6 Press 4 Independent Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Fixture Patch display Fixture Patch Specifies fixture 1 in the Attribute Patch display Attribute Patch Specifies attribute 6 to edit Reverses the status of attribute Attribute Patch ATTRIBUTE 6 INDEPENDENT Obsession Il User Manual 95 96 Chapter 7 Patching moving lights Chapter 8 ML setup This chapter explains how to customize some of Obsession Il s moving light features and includes the following sections The following items are covered e Setting up encoders and the trackpad e Setting up the touchscreen e Attribute Display setup e Setting up frame tables e Create and edit personalities Obsession Il User Manual 97 98 Moving lights controls In Obsession Il you have direct fingertip control of moving lights with the ML controls These controls consist of dial encoders E Page keys P a touchscreen S and a dual axis trackpad T Encoders Six encoder dials on an Obsession system enable you to directly and quickly control attribute
73. defaults to the previous step s attributes You may then edit the step settings To edit a step use the arrow keys to select an attribute field and enter the new setting Press Enter or any arrow key to make the change You can also use softkeys to move from field to field Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Effect Last modified effect is displayed 2 Press Effect enter the Selects a new effect empty step effect to create 1 999 1 is automatically created with and press Enter the elements field highlighted Effect 1 3 Press 1 Enter Effect 1 STEP 1 ELEMENTS 4 Enterthechannels groups Effect 1 STEP 1 and submasters you want ELEMENTS E 5 gt 10 17 in the step Submasters must be from the first sub master page 5 Press gt Enter step time Effect 18 STEP 1 0 to 99 9 seconds STEP TIME 5 6 Press gt Enter the In Effect 1 STEP 1 IN TIME 2 time 7 Press 5 Enter Dwell Effect 1 STEP 1 DWELL time TIME 3 8 Press gt Enter Out time Effect 1 STEP 1 OUT TIME 2 9 Press gt Enter the low Effect 1 STEP 1 LOW LEVEL level 20 10 Press gt Enter high level Effect 1 STEP 1 HIGH LEVEL 80 11 Press gt Effect 1 STEP 1 ELEMENTS 12 Press 1 Moves to the next step Effect 1 STEP 2 Y ELEMENTS Repeat steps 4 through 12 until you have entered as many steps as desired Obsession Il User Manual 239 240 One to one channel assignment To spread channels evenl
74. displays the temperature of the air drawn into the rack by the rack s fan Ambient temperature is not displayed unless the fan is running Rack error messages appear beneath the ambient temperature Obsession Il User Manual 323 System Status The System Status display provides information about your Sensor dimming system Press Setup 1 1 Enter 1 Enter to access the System Status display Disabled Inactive No errors System Status e Dimmer Double Firing Mode shows whether Dimmer Double mode is enabled or disabled You may switch settings by pressing S1 Dim Dbl Mode Enter If Dimmer Double is disabled dimmers set to Dimmer Double function as normal dimmers e Backup looks indicates which backup look is active if any e ETCLink displays any ETCLink errors e System Wide Panic displays status of system wide panic e Error on Rack displays the number of the rack with an ETCLink error If errors exist on multiple racks the first rack with an error is displayed e Racks On Line displays the number of racks presently online throughout the ETCLink network e Racks in Configuration displays the total number of racks in the system l See Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling page 66 for information about setting dimmers to Dimmer Double 324 Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Working with backup looks A backup look is a recording of a selected look on stage stored in the Sensor CEM You may save and use
75. is divided into three sections e Channels and attributes in cues e Recording in Live e Modifying cues in Live e Working with cues in Blind mode e Labelling cues e About cue Obsession Il User Manual 145 146 Channels and attributes in cues Cues may be created or modified by specifying either channels fixture attributes or groups but these may not be specified in the same command For instance if you want to add channel 1 and fixture 5 to a cue you need to make these modifications separately Any unaffected channel or attribute is allowed to track in at the levels in the previous cue unless the Clear Channels in Cue Only option is on and you are recording a new cue Working with cues in Live mode You can record cues from a look on stage either in Live mode or in ML Live mode If the look on stage is due all or in part to a focus group a reference to the focus group is placed in a recorded cue rather than the actual channel or fixture attribute levels The following examples illustrate operations on cues in Live mode but in each case analogous operations are available in ML Live The difference is that Live mode has conveniences for recording channels and ML Live has conveniences for recording fixture attributes Chapter 10 Cues Recording cues Recording with default fade times In cue 1 you only set channel levels Default settings from the System Settings menu determine all other attributes of the cue Keystrok
76. it has no effect If it s enabled pressing it brings the submaster s channels up on stage or starts its upfade or downfade In solo mode pressing it brings the submaster s channels up on stage or starts its upfade or downfade and all channel outputs not included in the submaster are reduced to zero until you release the button or the downfade finishes Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub and enter the Selects the submaster submaster you wish to Sub SUB2 change Press Enter 3 Press S2 Bump Status Toggles through modes until the mode you desire Sub SUB 2 E BUMP appears DISABLED 4 Press Enter Selects mode If submaster bump button is disabled a D appears in front of its number on the Sub List display If in solo an S appears Sub SUB 2 E BUMP DISABLED E Note Bump status can be changed for a range of or all submasters in the Sub List display Chapter 15 Submasters Channels and attributes in submasters Submasters may be created or modified by specifying either channels or fixture attributes but both may not be specified in the same command For instance if you want to add channel 1 and fixture 5 to a submaster make these modifications separately Recording submasters You may record a submaster in Submaster Live or ML Live modes In all references below Live mode means your choice of Live or ML Live Selection defaults usually make it easiest to record channels to subm
77. learn how to perform preliminary setup procedures and where to go for help if you have problems For information about installing Obsession ll hardware see Appendix A Chapter one explains the following Using the command line Output level conventions Using this manual Starting a DPS in redundant tracking System Shutdown Electronic backup maintenance Customer service Obsession ll User Manual 2 New Features The Setup menu s New Features option provides information about newly added features and options Press Setup 1 5 Enter to display New Features Use the Level wheel or T and 4 to scroll through the text Help Help screens are available for all Obsession II keys including softkeys To display help press Help then press any console key Using this manual Following are some conventions used in this manual Manual symbol Enter Please confirm Group Sub Effect Park Chapter 1 Getting started Meaning Console key labeled Enter Text that appears on screen usu ally on the command line Group Sub Effect and Park keys are found twice on the console once in the top row of keys where they serve as display keys and again in a lower group ing of keys where they serve as command keys In this manual these four duplicated keys are shown with an asterisk as part of the name when the reference is to the display keys and without the asterisk when the reference is
78. levels from any Patch display Dimmers output at 100 percent unless you patch them at a lower level The following example uses By Dimmer mode Keystrokes 1 2 Note You may assign a patch level and a channel assignment at the same time For example Dim 2 At 4 At 5b IO Enter patches Dimmer 2 to Channel 4 and assigns it a proportional level Press Patch If patch is displayed in By Channel or By Label mode press S1 By Dimmer Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer Press At At Use the keypad to enter the desired maximum out put level for the dimmer s Press Enter of 50 percent Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Action Command line Selects By Dimmer patch display Patch DIMMER 5 8 Patch DIMMER 5 8 CHAN Patch DIMMER 5 8 CHAN 80 Patch DIMMER 5 8 CHAN 80 Unpatching individual dimmers Unpatch dimmers by assigning them to channel zero You may assign individual dimmers to channel zero or assign all shared dimmers to channel zero at once Channel zero is not an actual control channel It functions as a holding area for storing dimmers not included in your patch Hint Before you begin creating a patch assign all dimmers to channel zero Then as you patch select dimmers from channel zero and patch them to channels If you select default one to one p
79. macro 3 from the last example Enter this keystroke sequence Macro 4 Enter Dim 1 At Full Enter S7 2 Enter M3 Macro line reads DIMMER 1 FULL E MACRO WAIT 2 E M3 Clear faders and turn work lights on This macro clears all channels from faders and turns on selected work lights Enter this keystroke sequence Macro 5 Enter Go To Cue 0 Enter Thru Full Enter work lights channels Store Macro Macro line reads GO TO CUE 0 B lt FULL 8 Obsession Il User Manual 263 264 Record show on disk This macro takes the show you are currently working on and saves it to a diskette Be certain the diskette is in the diskette drive before running the macro Enter this keystroke sequence Macro 6 Enter Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter Enter Store Macro Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 3 1 m m m Cue check This macro uses Go To Cue to check your cues Each cue s levels come up on stage in the default Go To Cue time rather than fading up normally as they would if you pressed Go Enter this keystroke sequence Go To Cue Next Enter Macro line reads GO TO CUE NEXT Then go to cue 0 and run the macro repeatedly to check your cues Chapter 17 Macros Chapter 18 Profiles A profile is a relationship between the time during a fade and the output level of a cue or dimmer at each point of time during the fade By adjusting the profile you can c
80. menu 2 Select 3 Attribute Dis Selects the Attribute Display play Setup Enter Setup display Attribute Display Setup 3 Select 5 Move Specifies attribute 9 to move Attribute 9 Press At 11 01 Specify move to attribute 10 Press Enter Attribute moves from 9 to 10 Attribute Display Setup MOVE ATTRIBUTE 9 10 m Obsession Il User Manual 109 Lists You can list all libraries fixture attributes or fixtures recorded in your show with the following procedure The lists appear on the Playback display Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press ML Live 2 Press More Softkeys More Softkeys 3 Press S1 Library List Select the list to display The list OF appears on the Playback display Press S2 Attribute List OF Press S1 Fixture List Library List The library list displays the number and label if any of each library in your show 110 Chapter 8 ML setup Attribute List The attribute list displays all 64 attributes by name and number Fixture List The fixture list displays all fixtures patched in the show by fixture number label personality starting channel starting DMX512 address remote dimmer number swap focus status scroller intensity channel and the frame table it uses Obsession Il User Manual 111 Frame Tables Frame tables are collections of labels that are used by discrete moving light attributes Each personality has up to four Frame Table
81. menu 2 Select 5 Touchscreen Selects the Touchscreen Setup Setup Enter display Touchscreen Setup Press S6 Auto Setup Press Enter Enter Performs an Auto Setup Encoder Setup AUTO SETUP E Please Confirm 8 Chapter 8 ML setup Changing a hutton s attribute You may assign any attribute to any button appearing in the Attribute Button display except the Next button The same attribute may appear on all three pages or even twice on the same page If an Attribute is not used in the show but it is placed in a button then it will be grayed out as will any Attribute that is not used in the currently selected Fixture Assign an attribute to a button as follows Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select b Touchscreen Setup Enter Press S1 Page 1 Enter Use the arrow keys to select the button to edit Press S7 Attribute List Press S4 Attribute 2 0 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Touchscreen Setup display Touchscreen Setup Selects page 1 Touchscreen Setup PAGE 1 E Touchscreen Setup PAGE 1 ROW 2 COLUMN 3 1 Shows the Attribute List on the Playback display Selects attribute 20 Assigns attribute 20 to the selected button Touchscreen Setup PAGE 1 ROW 2 COLUMN 3 ATTRIBUTE 20 Obsession Il User Manual 105 106 Attribute Display Setup Attribute Display Setup display lets you revise the Attribute
82. missing messages Critical messages are posted even when ETCLink advisory messages have been disabled Secondary messages may be disabled All dimmer error messages appear in yellow on the Dimmer Status and About Dimmer screens See Appendix C Error messages page 393 Disabling or enabling secondary messages You may prevent secondary ETCLink advisory messages from being displayed while you operate the console or enable them if currently disabled Note See Secondary Errors page 396 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 1 Dimmer Selects Dimmer Monitoring Monitoring Enter menu 3 Press 7 Display Dimmer Monitoring Advisories Enter DISABLE DISPLAY OF ETCLINK ADVISORIES 4 Press Enter Dimmer Monitoring DISABLE DISPLAY OF ETCLINK ADVISORIES 326 Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Chapter 26 MIDI Show Control Consoles in the Obsession II line implement a subset of the MIDI Show Control MSC 1 0 standard Obsession ll recognizes the following MSC commands e Go e Stop e Resume e Load e Fire Obsession II User Manual 327 Configuring MIDI Show Control MSC Each device receiving MIDI Show Control information must be assigned a device ID Obsession ll can receive MSC information transmit MSC information or both You may enable input and or output of MSC and assign MSC device IDs for incoming and outgoing data 1 Press Setup to go to the Setup Menu 2 Press 2
83. other orders will be billed at price at time of shipment Quotations for custom products are valid for thirty 30 days ETC shall not be liable for late delivery and or inability to perform due to unforeseen circumstances or conditions including our ability to obtain supplies and raw materials government regulations labor stoppages casualties fire and other causes beyond our control When such circumstances or conditions have been remedied ETC will make and Customer will accept delivery performance Equipment is shipped at the Customer s risk and our obligation to deliver equipment is discharged upon their delivery in good condition to the carrier Shipments are FOB ETC factory or warehouse ETC prepay and bill freight on UPS shipments Freight and air are sent collect unless specifically quoted otherwise Unless specifically prohibited partial shipments will be made Federal state and or local taxes duties and other charges are the responsibility of the purchaser If purchaser cancels any portion of a Purchase Order prior to shipment Purchaser shall be liable to ETC for a cancellation charge equal to ETC s actual costs incurred in connection with that portion of the Purchase Order that is cancelled including without limitation labor and materials Payment terms are net 30 days after date of invoice All payments are applied to the oldest outstanding invoice Accounts over thirty 30 days are subject to a 1 1
84. press S1 Insert Step Or Press 1 Insert Step and enter the number of the step 4 Press Enter 5 Press Enter Action Command line Effect 5 E Effect 5 INSERT STEP 5 Effect 5 INSERT STEP 5 Please confirm Effect 5 INSERT STEP 5 Please confirm Y The new step is inserted in place of the old one The old step 5 becomes step 6 step 6 becomes step 7 and so on The timing and level attributes from step 4 are set as initial defaults in step 5 Chapter 16 Effects Delete steps You may delete steps from an effect Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press Effect Press S7 Edit Features Use the T and 1 keys to highlight the step to delete and press S2 Delete Step or Press S2 Delete Step and enter the number of the step Press Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Action Command line Effect 6 9 Effect 6 DELETE STEP 5 Effect 6 DELETE STEP 5 Please confirm Effect 6 DELETE STEP 5 Please confirm Step 5 is deleted from its position Step 6 becomes step 5 step 7 becomes step 6 and so on Edit step characteristics You may edit step characteristics Keystrokes T 2 Press Effect Press Effect and enter the effect to edit Press Enter Use J to select the step to edit for example step 2 Or Press S1 Step 2 Enter Use gt to highlight the In time field in step 2 Or Press S3 In
85. recorded changes and updates Warning The show in the Primary processor always replaces the show in the Secondary processor when a redundant tracking system starts up If you work on a show using the Secondary processor following a system crash or while tracking was disabled any changes you made to the show in the Secondary processor are overwritten when you reactivate redundant tracking Processor features The two processors are identical Either can serve as the primary processor You define which is primary and which is secondary with a Hardware Setup procedure explained on page 365 The status of the system with respect to each processor is shown with five LEDs on the front of each processor The purpose of each is explained below Primary Light on means this processor is designated the primary processor in Hardware Setup Secondary Light on means this processor is designated the secondary processor in Hardware Setup 362 Only the remote console used with the original Obsession can be used with Obsession II not the full Obsession console See Installing an Obsession remote console page 386 Appendix A Installation and setup Tracking Light on means that redundant tracking is enabled in Hardware Setup and tracking is working If not enabled the LED will be off If enabled but not working the LED will blink Master Light on means that redundant tra
86. runs however under commands given from an alphanumeric keyboard attached to the primary Obsession ll processor Make sure the keyboard is connected and operating properly before beginning the following procedure 1 Start your Obsession ll system as usual 2 Press Right Shift Tab ESC to exit the Obsession II system software The DOS prompt CAETC gt will appear on the command monitor to confirm that you are in the DOS operating system 4 You can perform a bulk translation of all hard drive showfiles if you wish which is the same as done automatically when upgrading system software Choose option 5 on the Show Translator menu Obsession Il User Manual 353 3 Type OBSTRANS to start the Show Translator The main menu appears with the following choices 1 Store show as a 4 x show on diskette 2 Read directory on diskette 3 Read all on diskette 4 Format diskette 5 Convert shows on hard drive Formatting a diskette Show translation is a diskette to diskette procedure Therefore you must have a properly formatted diskette on which to store the translated show DO NOT USE THE SOURCE DISKETTE TO STORE THE TRANSLATED SHOW Obsession II programs allow only one show on a diskette so a save to diskette would overwrite any show already on the diskette Save your original show for backup purposes by writing to a fresh diskette Format a diskette from the Show Translator as follows 1 Place the diskette in the pri
87. selected channels to levels of group 4 Live CHAN 1 9 GROUP 4m a Youcan also select the group on the touchscreen See Touchscreen page 99 for more information Obsession Il User Manual 73 Setting levels with the Focus Group command Levels set with the Focus Group command rather than the Group command also causes links to the group to be established Any subsequent changes in the group are linked back to where the group was used in level setting Another difference is that setting levels with the Focus Group command ensures that you will record zeros everywhere except where non zero levels exist in the group See Determining what is recorded into a group page 196 for further information Use the Focus Group command to set channel levels as follows Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 GotoLive 2 Press 1 Thru 9 Selects channels 1 through 9 Live CHAN 1 9 3 Press At Focus Group Identifies group 3 to which 3 levels will be set Live CHAN 1 9 FOCUS GROUP 3 4 Press Enter Links channel levels to group 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 POSITION FOCUS GROUP 3 8 a You can also select the group on the touchscreen See Touchscreen page 99 for more information b If you press Next or Last after Enter the focus group operation just completed is cancelled and the next higher or lower focus group is used for the command 74 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Using grouped channels to set channel
88. selecting a single dimmer and setting it at a level Once you select a dimmer use the Next and Last keys to cycle the display through a sequential range of dimmers Dimmers that are not patched will be skipped when the Next and Last keys are used Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Dim then use the Live DIMMER 1 keypad to enter the num ber of the first dimmer Press At then use the key Live DIMMER 1 50 pad to enter an output level 1 99 percent or press Full Note You can also set the output level by pressing Level If you use Level you do not need to press Enter 4 Press Enter Live DIMMER 1 508 5 Press Next or Last to select the next or previous dimmer Press any other key to end dimmer check Note A sample macro to automate a dimmer check is on 263 Flash dimmer You may use the Flash softkey in Live to flash dimmers To flash dimmer 1 press More Softkeys S6 Flash Dim 1 Enter or Dim 1 More Softkeys S6 Flash Enter As long as the Flash Dimmer command is on the command line use Next and Last to step through the dimmers in sequence Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights About Dimmer The About Dimmer display tells you the status of dimmers one at a time You can use the Next and Last keys to cycle the display through a sequential range of dimmers Follow the procedure below to show the About Dimmer display If
89. sors oo Soden 195 211 Order Personality 118 Replace with 164 Selecting channels 70 Set level with Focus Group 74 Set level with group 73 Setting level in Patch 67 SMC akin O crit res debts 77 Obsession Il User Manual 407 System settingS 44 WO ray pete rhe acere Saat 78 Channel check 79 Channel Order Edits S eco etn as ee 124 Channel Usage Display ure Eius 81 Channel zero 59 Check loads esent 319 Circuit board Node Revision 0 391 Node Revision A 392 Circular reference 208 Clear Clear Loads 320 Clear to End 270 FUNCTIONS ad ewes n 301 GOPS 2 sei ae eee e rat 206 Reset profile 272 SubmastersS 231 Clear Channels Enable disable 51 Clear Channels in Cue Only 177 Clear patch bootup 8 Clear show bootup 8 Colors Channel vei 14 Que Stea eer ess 37 EffeCtu m let I Redes 23 LEDS roe E verae de E m 215 Park na T e e an 21 Pateh a5 due ra d ADS ERA 26 Submasters 39 234 Command line 12 13 Connectors DIAM rra RR EARS 368 Monitor 367 381 AO uu ome ee nS ear 372 Controlled by About Dimmer display 64 Dimmer Taken advisory 9 Copy CU cci 162 Cue Only Track 176 Cue Only Track key 176
90. submaster If you press Sneak Cue however the attributes sneak to the levels in the current cue c If you skip this step the sneak occurs in the default sneak time See Setting default Sneak time page 49 2 To sneak attributes see Sneak attributes page 135 Obsession Il User Manual 77 Undo Undo lets you switch from a selected channel s current level to its previous level and back You may continue to do so until you enter a new command Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press 1 Thru 9 Full Sets channels 1 through 9 at Full Enter Live CHAN 1 gt 9 FULL 3 Change levels of the same Sets specified channels at 5096 channel s For example Live CHAN 15 5 508 press 1 Thru 5 At 5 Enter 4 Press Undo Enter Sets channels 1 through 5 back to full Live UNDO 5 Press Undo Enter Sets channels1 through 5 back to 5096 Live UNDO 13 Undo also lets you clear other commands If you have not yet pressed Enter Undo clears the command line 78 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Channel check You may check channels by selecting a single channel and setting it at a level Once you select it you can advance sequentially through the channels Note Independent channels are ignored during a channel check Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press 1 3 Press At b Action Command line Specifies channel 1 to check Live CHAN 1 Live CHAN 1
91. teh Selects previous profile Seira ted Selects next fade point AA tti Selects previous fade point Level wheel Adjusts level of the fade point A Raises output level by one ts ie Lowers output level by one E10 needs Raises output level by ten 510 ic t s Lowers output level by ten Atlas Enter the level on the command line Chapter 18 Profiles Editing a profile Edit a profile by assigning levels to selected fade points in the profile All but profile O may be edited in this fashion The example below makes use of the keypad for entering levels but you may also use the level wheel or any of the keys identified under Profile edit controls above Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 7 Profiles Enter Press Profile enter the pro file and press Enter Use gt e to select the fade point Or Use the keypad to enter the fade point Use the fader wheel to select the level Press Enter or move to next fade point using gt or Repeat steps 4 through 6 until complete Creating a new profile A new profile is created using the same techniques for editing a profile see above You must define the level for each of the 21 fade points along the profile s curve gt or e and press Enter Action Command line Selects Profiles menu Profile 1 amp Selects profile Profile 4 8 Profile 8 4 O Or Profile 8 Graph adjusts
92. the ML Setup menu Select 1 Personality Selects the Personality Setup Setup Enter display Personality Setup Enter a personality number Selects the personality to edit and press Enter Press S5 Pers Editor Enters the Personality Editor Enter display Personality Editor Enter the channel order Specifies the attribute to edit number of a discrete attribute and press Enter Press S7 Frame Editor Enters the Frame Editor display a You must have the personality in your show before you can work with it See Copying personalities page 87 Chapter 8 ML setup Setting up a new frame table Frame table 1 is the default frame table for each discrete attribute Define your own frame table and revise frame table parameters with the procedure below Note however that the revised frame table parameters such as number of frames start value and offset apply equally to all frame tables for the attribute not just to the new table you create Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Gotothe Frame Editor see Frame editor page 113 2 Press S7 Frame Table Specifies frame table 3 3 Enter Frame Editor FRAME TABLE 3n 3 Press 1 Thru 1110 Specifies that there will be 10 frames for this discrete attribute Frame Editor FRAME NUMBER 1 gt 10 m 4 Press S2 Start Value 0 Specifies the first frame will 1 20 start at O and the offset between frames will be 20 5 Press S1 Frame Num
93. the network cable before changing the UTP cable setting as explained under Ethernet Setup page 359 356 Appendix A Installation and setup Dual processor system Shown in the diagram below are the connections for the network cables and locations of the keyboard connector KB and power switches SW for a dual processor Obsession ll system If you have any questions about setting up your system call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 MN E EOI la C ORZI mago Console rear panel Dual processor rear panel a I nO O 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000001 o iQ e om i gt 0000 e i 1 o I i 1 A T KB E li 000000000009 0000000000000 0000000000000 L Dual processor front panel Obsession Il User Manual 357 Remote console setup In most cases your Obsession ll will start and run immediately after it is properly installed But sometimes the factory settin
94. to create the event Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press S1 Select Event and the enter the number of the event to edit 4 Press Enter 5 Press the appropriate key for the field to change i e Macro Cue Label Time S7 Rate S3 Bump S4 Bump On S5 Bump Off or S6 Go 6 Enter the new information for the field 7 Press Enter Chapter 27 SMPTE Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display Selects an event to edit Selects the field to edit Updates the information in the edited field Playing back the SMPTE program The console lets you play recorded SMPTE events in several ways You may use any external source of SMPTE data to run the program you may run the program using the console s built in SMPTE clock or you may step through individual events The two playback modes are Pause and Run Run Mode If the console is in Run mode and the internal SMPTE clock is enabled it automatically runs the SMPTE program If the SMPTE status is in Pause mode enable Run mode to execute the program Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Selects SMPTE Events display Enter 3 Press More Softkeys S4 The status changes to Run Mode Run in the upper left corner You may toggle Run and Pause Modes in Live as well Press Live More Softkeys 54 SMPTE Run or SMPTE Pause Enter
95. to the cue Default time is one second for both Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 8 Default Back GoToCue Time and press Enter 4 Enter the value to assign 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Setting default Sneak time Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings ENTER DEFAULT BACK TIME System Settings ENTER DEFAULT BACK TIME 2 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT BACK TIME 2 Sneak allows you to fade or restore channel levels on stage in a specified time Default time is five seconds for a Sneak For more information see Sneak channels page 77 and Sneak attributes page 135 Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 9 Default Sneak Time and press Enter 4 Enter the time you wish to assign for Sneak 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings ENTER DEFAULT SNEAK TIME System Settings ENTER DEFAULT SNEAK TIME 4 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT SNEAK TIME 4 9 Obsession Il User Manual 49 Setting default cue profile A profile describes the relationship between the length of a fade and the level of a cue or dimmer at each point throughout that fade By adjusting the profile s shape you can create a variety of effects accommodate for variations an
96. up to 32 backup looks Recording a backup look Keystrokes 1 Use your console to create the desired look on stage Press Setupl Press 1 1 Dimmer Moni toring Enter Press S2 Record Backup Enter the backup look number 1 32 and press Enter Playing and clearing a backup look Playing a backup look from the console or from a CEM brings up the recorded look on stage Action Command line Creates look on stage Selects Dimmer Monitoring menu Dimmer Monitoring RECORD BACKUP Dimmer Monitoring RECORD BACKUP 5 8 Only one backup look may be on stage at a time If there is a backup look on stage when you bring up a new one the second look replaces the first Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setupl Press 1 1 Dimmer Moni toring Enter Press 1 Replay Backup Enter the backup look number 1 32 and press Enter Action Command line Selects Dimmer Monitoring menu Dimmer Monitoring REPLAY BACKUP Dimmer Monitoring REPLAY BACKUP 5 8 a Enter O rather than a look number here to clear a backup look from the Sensor CEM Obsession Il User Manual 325 Error messages ETCLink provides a wide variety of critical and secondary advisory messages including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads Critical messages include rack and dimmer overtemperature or shutdown messages rack not responding messages airflow messages and phase
97. used to join a pair of pins sticking out of a printed circuit board The jumper is installed when it covers both pins It is not installed when it covers one or none of the pins see illustration below Jumper Jumper not installed installed DIP switches Switches are either On Closed or Off Open Obsession Il devices use two varieties of DIP switch In one the switches extend above the surface of the unit Use your fingers to set these switches The other which currently appears only on the Revision D circuit board for original Obsession full console only contains switches that are recessed into the unit Use a pin or other fine pointed object to change the switch settings Some network devices such as the Remote Interface Unit and the Remote Video Interface check DIP switch settings when the system is turned on You must restart the console for new DIP switch settings to take effect 376 Appendix A Installation and setup Remote Interface Node Installation The Remote Interface lets you attach Obsession peripherals to your network in remote locations 1 Plug the network cable into the appropriate connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet The Remote Interface provides ports for two monitors an alphanumeric keyboard and an RFU and provides a serial port a parallel port and three DMX512 output ports The illustration below shows the Remote Interface s back panel and indicates the c
98. with higher numbers are renumbered 116 Chapter 8 ML setup Copying a tahle To copy a table follow these steps from the Frame Table display Keystrokes Al Go to the Frame Editor see Frame editor page 113 Press More Softkeys S7 Copy Table 1 Press At Press Enter Labeling a table To label a table follow these steps from the Frame Table display Keystrokes 1 Goto the Frame Editor see Frame editor page 113 Press S7 Frame Table 3 Press Label and enter your label for instance New Colors Press Enter Action Command Line Specifies table 1 to copy Target specified as table 3 Copies table 1 to table 3 Frame Table COPY TABLE 1 o3m Action Command Line Specifies table 3 to label Enters a label for table 3 Assigns the label to the table Frame Table FRAME TABLE 1 LABEL New Colors E Obsession Il User Manual 117 118 Personality Editor The Personality Editor display lets you create and edit personalities and personality attributes It allows you set attribute options for each personality You may assign up to 64 attributes to each personality Personality Editor Attribute options Channel Order Attribute Chapter 8 ML setup The Channel Order is an assignment you make to control the way channels in fixtures are displayed in Live and Blind You may for instance always want a fixture s intensity to appear first in the cha
99. you want by pressing S1 S2 S3 or S4 When you select Flexichannel in Live it applies also to Blind Group and Submaster When you select Flexichannel in Blind Group or Submaster the selection applies only to that display All Channels Turn off Flexichannel and return to a normal display mode by pressing S1 All Channels Enter All Channels displays all channels whether or not they are used in the show Selecting channels with Flexichannel active Working with Flexichannel active differs from working without Flexichannel in only one respect selecting channels with Thru With Flexichannel enabled the Thru key functions slightly differently e In All Channels mode pressing 1 Thru 5 Enter selects all channels from 1 to 5 e n Show Channels Current Channels or View Channels mode pressing 1 Thru b Enter selects all visible channels from 1 to 5 To select all channels from 1 to 5 visible or hidden press 1 Thru Thru 5 Enter If the first channel in the selected range is unused you do not need to use Thru Thru Obsession Il User Manual 31 Show Channels Press 2 Show Channels Enter Show Channels mode displays only the channels used in the cues effects and submasters in the show Note the grey lines that replace channels 97 through 124 and 126 through 499 These channels are not used in the show Tracking Page O Flexichannel Show Lie 3 75 75 75
100. 0 Live CHAN 11 gt 20 RECORD Live CHAN 11 gt 20 RECORD GROUP Live CHAN 11 gt 20 RECORD GROUP 1 Live CHAN 11 gt 20 RECORD GROUP 1 a You can make the same selection to include specific attributes from among those on stage If you want to leave out attributes however you must start with a selection before specifying the exclusion For example enter 1 Thru 9 S8 Color b You may press Next to select the next unrecorded group number in sequence Obsession Il User Manual 199 Creating a group without submasters You may record a group containing the current look on stage except for contributions by one or all submasters Keystrokes 1 Ze Go to Live mode Select channels or attributes Press 57 Rec Minus Sub Press 5 Press Group 3 Press Enter Action Command line Select a display Creates look Live RECORD SUB Instructs that levels raised by submaster 5 be ignored Live RECORD SUB 5 Selects group to be recorded Live RECORD SUB 5 GROUP 3 Records group 3 minus submaster 5 Live RECORD SUB 5 GROUP 3 a If you skip this step the group will exclude levels contributed by all submasters b You may press Next to select the next unrecorded group in sequence You may also select the group from the touchscreen Viewing a group on stage Follow these steps to view a group on stage Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press
101. 0 Copying submasters o 231 Clearing submasters o 231 Submaster Spreadsheet 00000000 232 Range editing in Submaster Spreadsheet 233 Copying TangeSs use ences o ada e a 233 SubmasterLiSt e aco ser et 234 Range editing in Submaster List 235 Chapter 16 A or dat cute dolre 237 SES c r ee et wr eRe a SS oi ite Pe ee et 237 Create effects and stepS llli iles 239 One to one channel assignMent 240 Assign effect characterlStiCS o o o oooo oooo 241 ATIFIDUTES nines a ona Sk ee are etd ea ed 241 Overall fade3mes2 4 ses oda ada als 243 Change upfade dwell and downfade 243 Change upfade only 000000000 243 Change downfade only anaa saaana eaaa 244 Change up and downfade to the same time 244 Obsession II User Manual xiii Change dwellonly x ree Res 244 Reset Hold dwelltiMe o o o o oooooo 244 Random Tate uus sera IN eoe pedem atr e pte s 245 Modifty e fe CES orat aa fe See iaa DORT OS 246 Insert Steps ee sx tA t a vA eene Y A ape ns 246 Delete steps nsi bee Ak ha bee LAS Leg 6 247 Edit step characteristics o o o o ooooooo 247 Test effects and SstepS 2 6 kee 249 Record an effect toacue sss ceritain 00 eee 250 Delete an effect from acue 0 0022 eee 251 Load an effect to asubmaster 20 252 l abel effecis cs suse ob aie tl he el ek oe ID UE aci 252 D let effects o h
102. 0111 Fader wheel Select the channels then use the wheel to set the desired output level For example enter 1 Thru 5 Enter then move the fader wheel to set levels You can also use the fader wheel to propor tionally adjust output levels for all active channels For example press Enter then move the fader wheel to set levels Full Sets the level at 100 percent For example press 1 Thru 5 Full Enter 10 or 10 Sets the level at 10 or 10 percent For example Press 1 Thru 5 10 to raise levels by 10 Press 1 Thru 5 10 10 to lower levels by 20 Out Sets the level at zero For example Press 1 Thru 5 Out to set selected channels to zero At Enter Press 1 Thru 5 At Enter in Live to set selected channels to zero Level Sets the level to the level assigned to a user defined level For example press 1 Thru 5 Level to set selected channels to the level assigned to the Level key The default value for Level is 100 percent 9 You do not need to press Enter to complete these operations 10 See Setting default Level page 47 Obsession Il User Manual 71 Rem Dim Grandmaster 72 11 Sets a specified level and simultaneously sets all unselected channels to zero Rem Dim does not affect submaster
103. 295 1 0 configuration 282 291 317 MEISS caracas bd 297 ODtIOnS zug dm eae e 294 Pause s uA e ats 294 Pinte c urn nue edu 372 Setup information 296 SNOW S ccc edt a op a 295 Profile Glear allzx ree 301 CleartoEnd 270 COPY tb rd s Bag ee os 272 Creating A 269 GUC iet sordes Tus ues 152 Default nananana aaan naaa 50 DIME sonic 85 bh a 61 Display o wines eu cA 267 EGdIb etr re een 269 Fill between 271 kabeli erren Gone vu 272 SAA AR IM 152 System Settings 50 Using profiles 269 Zero o ce Ad tS deri 61 Proportional patching 58 R Range edit Cue Spreadsheet 163 Effect steps crei eR 240 Groupi Stani smt axes 211 Group Spreadsheet 209 Replace with 164 Submaster List 235 Submaster Spreadsheet 233 Hate wes estate rhe 193 Allfaders 193 CUGr 16 t ream gs 192 193 ONVeITIde z ouis ees 192 Physical fader 192 Random rate 245 Submasters 220 221 Virtual fader 193 Wheels os ture eus 192 193 Read lt All serm ttes 288 Read show Diskette ux Sets 280 288 Rec Minus Sub 222 Recalling groups 200 RECORO iiss ra rote apt DRE 149 BIOCKGUCS ai ER 154 Cue in Blind 161 Cue minus sub 148 Cue Only Track key 175 Cue w default time 147 Cue w manual fade time
104. 4 CLEAR LIBRARY E Deleting a library A library is deleted from the library list when it no longer has levels for any attributes recorded in the library To delete a library that was recorded with two different types of fixtures clear the levels of all attributes in it by following this procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 5 Selects fixtures 1 and 5 ML Live FIXTURE 1 5 3 Press More Softkeys Specifies library 2 S4 Library 2 4 Press Enter Clears all attributes from library 2 and deletes it ML Live FIXTURE 1 5 ATTRIBUTE ALL LIBRARY 2 m 27 When a library is cleared fixtures that had levels set by the library keep those levels unless specifically changed Obsession Il User Manual 143 144 Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Chapter 10 Cues This chapter explains how to record modify and delete cues using conventional lights or moving light fixtures You may record up to 1 000 cues per show Cue numbers must be specified in the range 0 1 through 999 9 Each example in this chapter illustrates a different cue attribute However multiple cue attributes can be set in one command The examples in this chapter assume there are no cues stored in console memory and that the console is in tracking mode To erase all cues from memory press Setup 5 Enter 2 Enter Enter Warning Before you erase cues make sure the show is saved on disk This chapter
105. 7 SUD SE m sce oe ee exe cere Le 35 Sub Page teeh ihre 215 Submaster Adding channels 228 Additive 214 As groups 207 AttributeS 222 Bump buttons 218 Disabled 216 Enabled 216 Solo ened ose ees 216 416 Index Changing shows 215 Changing type 214 Clear eec een EVI 231 Glear all o2 uf ES 301 COD ect a s da 231 Copy ranges 210 233 Copy to other page 221 Display 4 tA 20 Dwell times Lun 218 Hold etre 219 Manual 219 Fade times 218 223 Highest level 3 Hold arate edet at darla te 219 Home position 214 215 ti macros via RA 260 InhibitiVe cs oen 214 229 Label S tira SIT 222 NA 214 215 229 RA OPE ee a he E 234 Vell ad an vs 224 Load CUES d aat tee sien 229 BEffectss sabes 230 252 Manual control 223 Manual tiMe 219 Modifying 223 224 Override fade time 223 PAYS occ 221 Park m tas LL inea 276 AIDE e te heces Dar aan cum 295 Range edit in Submaster List 235 RATES vc cerchi e fea 220 221 Recording 217 221 Sliders 223 230 252 Spreadsheet 232 233 Submaster display edit 223 Submaster List 38 234 TAMAS s ertet ae 218 221 Types tns erede eee 214 Update 226 228 Use to set levels
106. Dwell Time submaster holds at full O Down Time submaster takes to fade out Label Submaster s label 38 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Submaster list colors Submasters are displayed in the following colors Gray aaa Unrecorded submaster White Selected submaster Green Additive sub number brightens when selected Rede Inhibitive sub number brightens when selected Obsession Il User Manual 39 40 Group List The Group List displays the group number and label of all recorded groups Press Group List to page through the list if you have recorded more than 34 groups The selected group is displayed in yellow and its label is displayed in white other groups are displayed in gray 1 Morning O Grandmaster Blackout Current Grandmaster level indicates when Blackout is active O Show info and time Name and comments assigned to show current time and SMPTE time if enabled Submaster page Current submaster page Use Sub Page to switch pages Group Number of group O Label Group s label if any Chapter 3 Monitor displays SMPTE Event List The SMPTE Events List displays a list of recorded SMPTE events showing the event number time element rate and label for all recorded events Up to 20 events may be displayed at a time The running event is displayed in yellow and the selected event is displayed in white other events are displayed in gray
107. EUR AO 318 CHECKIGAAS rc icr tian ae E EE NE Re 319 Clear 680581 oscura nt tage 320 Printing load errors liliis 321 Dirnmierstatus c ise epic 322 Dimrrierrack Status iranerne es apa ada e 323 System STatUS ss accra tds rb as 324 Working with backup looks 2 020 325 Recording a backup look 325 Playing and clearing a backup look 325 Error messages css mde pst e LA 326 Disabling or enabling secondary messages 326 Chapter 26 MIDI Show Control 6 327 Configuring MIDI Show Control MSC 328 MSC commands received reed rer liliis sus 329 MSC commands transmitted liiis 329 xvi Table of contents Chapter 27 A Rind an x A 331 Enabling the external SMPTE clock 332 Enabling the internal SMPTE clock 332 Setting SMPTE frame rate o o ooooocooooo 333 Creating SMPTE programs 0 00000 oo 334 In the SMPTE Events display 335 IA keari mode sis eed eee ES 336 SMPTE LOOP MES asc vec se aca cd p nte 337 Editing SMPTE programs 0005 338 EqIitINGQvEVENTSS sane O 340 Playing back the SMPTE program 055 341 RUN MOOG c ees Mas cuia era 341 Pa s umode Chena daa Yee Sena TAPA 342 External SMPTE source 00 sels 342 Internal SMPTE clock 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 e eee ee 343 Chapter 28 Accessories sss 345 Alphanumeric keyboard
108. Enter Action Command line Selects By Channel mode Patch CHAN 8 Patch CHAN 8 Patch CHAN 8 40 Patch CHAN 8 40 m Obsession Il User Manual 67 68 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Chapter 6 setting channel levels This chapter explains how to set channel levels for conventional lights For information on setting attribute levels for moving light fixtures see Chapter 8 Setting ML attribute levels Setting channel levels is the first step in recording cues submasters and groups Setting channel levels in Live mode brings light levels up on stage Setting channel levels in other modes does not affect stage lights In most cases channel output changes do not take effect until you press Enter If you use the fader wheel or press 10 10 Out or Level channel levels are set immediately This chapter includes the following sections e Selecting channels e Setting channel levels e Channel check e About channel e Channel Usage display Obsession Il User Manual 69 Selecting channels Using the keypad to set channel levels involves two steps selecting the channels then entering output levels e To select a single channel enter the channel number press 1 e To select two channels enter the first channel then press and enter the second channel press 1 7 e Toselect a group of consecutively numbered channels enter the number of the first channel then press Thru
109. Enter Press Record then enter the the cue you want to record For example 1 2 Press Part then use the keypad to enter the num ber 1 8 of the part you want to record Enter cue attributes including Time Wait Pro file Park or Rate Follow Link and Label can only be assigned to the overall cue For example press Time 1 0 to enter a ten second fade When you have selected the desired attributes press Enter to record the part Repeat steps 2 through 6 adding channels for each part to include in the multi part cue Action Command line Live CHAN 1 gt 5 FULL E Indicates that you want to record a cue Live RECORD CUE 12 Enters the number of the first part of the cue Live RECORD CUE 12 PART 1 Assigns cue attributes to the part Live RECORD CUE 12 PART 1 TIME 10 Records the part Live RECORD CUE 12 PART 1 TIME 10 E Records subsequent parts Note You do not need to re enter the cue number for additional parts Set channel levels press Record Part enter the part number and press Enter Chapter 12 Multipart cues Convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in Live The following example divides a cue into four parts numbered 1 2 3 and 8 each containing five of the channels in the original cue Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press 1 Thru 2 0 Full Enter Record Cue 1 Enter Press 1 Thru 5 Record Part 1 Enter Pres
110. Enter This will keep modifications from tracking into subsequent cues If in Cue Only mode Cue Only Track will force changes to track For further information see Cue Only Track key page 175 Caution If you need to use Cue Only Track in your command do not use Out Level 10 or 10 to modify channel levels These keys automatically enter the command when you press them without waiting for you to press Enter 30 f you create a new cue any channels set to a level in the previous cue track into the new cue Their levels appear in magenta If you create a new cue and Clear Channels in Cue Only is enabled any channels set to a level in the previous cue are set to zero in the new cue See Enabling disabling Clear Channels in Cue Only page 51 Obsession II User Manual 161 162 Copying cues You may copy a look from one cue and use itas the foundation for a new cue If a cue is copied to another number and a cue is already recorded at that position the copy operation replaces it You must be in Blind or ML Blind to copy a cue Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Blind 2 Press S7 Copy Cue Blind COPY CUE 3 Enter the number of the Blind COPY CUE 1 cue to copy 4 Press At Blind COPY CUE 1 9 Enter the number of the Blind COPY CUE 1 5 new cue 6 Press Enter Cue copy is Blind COPY CUE 1 5 complete You can now modify the new cue a The Copy Cue softkey saves block and move inst
111. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES ON OUR PART THE OWNER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NO OTHER REPRESENTATIONS WERE MADE TO HIM OR RELIED UPON HIM WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY AND FUNCTION OF THE GOODS SOLD This written warranty is intended as a complete and exclusive statement of the terms thereof Prior dealings or trade usage shall not be relevant to modify explain or vary this warranty Acceptance of or acquiescing in a course of performance under this warranty shall not modify the meaning of this agreement even though either party has knowledge of the performance and a chance to object Terms and Conditions The following terms and conditions and those on the face hereof shall control as to any order accepted by Electronic Theatre Controls Inc ETC notwithstanding any terms and conditions that may be contained in any purchase order or other document of Customer and ETC s acceptance of any order is expressly made conditional on Customer s assent to such terms and conditions Such terms and conditions will constitute the entire agreement between the parties as to any order and will supersede any prior understandings agreements representations or warranties Such terms and conditions will not be modified added to superseded or otherwise altered except by written document signed by an authorized representative of ETC notwithstanding any terms and conditions contained in the pur
112. Formatting does not affect shows in the Obsession ll system but when you format disks fades in progress stop Standard blank IBM compatible diskettes should work well without further formatting If not format a diskette on the console or on a standard PC compatible personal computer To format a diskette on Obsession Il follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 3 Diskette Selects Diskette Functions Functions Enter menu 3 Insert standard 3 5 inch high density diskette in the disk drive 4 Press 7 Format Dis Diskette Functions FORMAT kette Enter DISKETTE Please confirm 5 Press Enter to format the Message appears on screen diskette or press Clear to Operation in progress Please cancel the format com stand by Message remains mand until disk is formatted Diskette Functions FORMAT DISKETTE Complete Y Chapter 19 Diskette functions Storing a show and system settings on diskette When you store a show to diskette all system settings patch settings cues groups submasters effects and any other information in the Obsession II system at the time you record the show are saved Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Insert a formatted diskette in disk drive Press Setupl 3 Press 3 Diskette Selects Diskette Functions functions Enter menu 4 Press 1 Store show Diskette Functions STORE Enter Enter SHOW E Please confirm 5 Press Enter
113. Ft al s as reete 187 Finding unused channels 80 Finding unused dimmers 64 Fixtures Delete csse 93 Citra inet us ta Eie red hts 93 Introd etion ses 84 MAA ee 111 EES ea 5 ue Bec ooh ep 111 PATCH AS vara an eri 91 93 PRIA Eck Rer tutte dero 297 Selection defaults 196 Set level with Focus Group 133 Set levels with Groups 132 Setting levels 75 131 134 SOU o a 91 95 Track ia ici oo PA 174 Use to set levels 138 Flash Cia ni rTe seit cae ade 76 Dimmer 00 62 76 Flexichannel o o o o 31 All Channels 31 Current Channels 33 Selecting channels 31 70 Show Channels 32 View Channels 34 A wurst ete ae 94 Focus Group Set channel levels 74 Set fixture levels 133 Focus group Circular reference 208 ModifyiNQ 201 204 Remove from cue 158 205 225 Remove references 157 202 224 Fl Wer ae tn i 150 Frame editor 113 117 Frame rate SMPTE 333 Frame table Explained 112 Label soie hea oe 117 Long label 113 Full Tracking Backup DIP switch settings 387 Full tracking backup See Redundant tracking Function keys 12 G GOs ty Gee MGR nod e ltda ta hohe Book 189 Go TO CUS curva Ee 190 264 Default tiMe 49 Grandmaster Enable disable
114. Group or the Focus Group command With the Group command e f no channels fixtures or attributes are selected only levels set above zero are recorded into a group e fany channels fixtures or attributes are selected all selections are recorded into the group either at zero or at levels you set above zero With the Focus Group command e fnochannels fixtures or attributes are selected all channels in the console are recorded into the group at zero or at levels you set above zero e fany channels fixtures or attributes are selected all selections are recorded into the group at zero or at levels you set above zero Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Understanding the focus group link The procedure below on your console describes how a cue linked to a group changes in response to changes in the group and what happens when that link is broken 1 10 11 12 13 Record group 1 with the position attributes of fixture 1 through 10 set at full Create a look on stage which includes fixture 1 set at group 1 using the Focus Group command See Setting levels with the Focus Group command page 133 for this procedure Record the look as cue 1 Look at the Live display You should see levels below the channel numbers where fixture 1 is patched and an orange 1 below each level signifying that the level is taken from focus group 1 Note which channels are in the fixture for the steps below Clear the stage by pr
115. Il User Manual 381 RVI Board The RVI processor board is the lower circuit board in the Remote Video Interface This board contains one 8 unit DIP switch device but no jumpers The RVI checks switch settings when it is turned on You must restart the RVI for new settings to take effect RVI video board Cea On Ow Son mco Do On Do Main DIP switches 096 93ul RVI processor board These switches are set by the factory as follows Switch Normal State Function 1 On Closed Normal operation 2 through 5 Off Open Unused 6 and 7 On Closed Normal operation 8 Off Open Unused 382 Appendix A Installation and setup Installing MIDI To use MIDI equipment with Obsession ll the Optional I O Card must have been installed at the factory Connect your Obsession Il console to MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable There are three round 5 pin DIN type connectors labeled MIDI In Out and Thru on the back of the console 1 Turn console power off 2 Connect MIDI cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic in strument or sequencer to the MIDI In on the console 3 If you are sending MIDI commands from the console connect another MIDI cable from the MIDI In on the instrument or se quencer to MIDI Out on the console MIDI console connectors DIN 5 pin female MIDI pinout 1 notconnected Ground not connected MIDI 4 MIDI Installing SMPTE After
116. LE DISABLE 12 The Mirror function is not available from the system s main console or backup console if you are using Full Tracking Backup 314 Chapter 24 Multiuser Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Connect Obsession ll systems to ETC Sensor dimming systems via the ETCLink communication network In this configuration Obsession II provides you with a wide range of system status information Access ETCLink functions through the Dimmer Monitoring menu This display is only available when ETCLink and the optional I O board are installed in a system To reach the Dimmer Monitoring menu press Setup 1 1 Enter Dimmer Monitoring Menu ETCLink Status fictive Dimmer Monitoring Note Any time you select a multiplex dimmer if you do not specify A or B the A channel is selected This chapter includes the following sections Configuring ETCLink Enabling dimmer monitoring Storing ETCLink configuration Working with dimmer loads Dimmer status Dimmer rack status System Status Working with backup looks Error Messages Obsession Il User Manual 315 Configuring ETCLink You must configure the console for ETCLink dimmer monitoring Use the following procedure Keystrokes T 2 Press Setupl Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter Press 1 O Options Enter Press 1 ETCLink Address Enter Press 1 1 Enter Action Command line Selects I O Configuration menu Se
117. Live CUE 9 cue from which to remove the effect Press Effect Live CUE 9 EFFECT 4 Press Enter Live CUE 9 EFFECT Obsession Il User Manual 251 252 Load an effect to a submaster An effect played back from within a submaster interacts with cues and other submasters on a highest level basis Channel levels are not affected by an effect until a step runs that specifically addresses the channel An effect loaded to a submaster fades proportionally between zero and the effect s high level The slider acts as a master If the effect s low level is normally 10 percent moving the slider to 50 percent will reduce the effect s low level to 5 percent Note If you load an effect to a submaster and then modify it the modified effect is automatically loaded to the submaster when you leave effect mode or select a different effect to edit These steps load effect 1 to submaster 2 Keystrokes Action Command line Create an effect 2 Press Live 3 Press Load Sub 2 Live LOAD SUB 2 4 Press Effect 1 Live LOAD SUB 2 EFFECT 1 5 Press Enter Live LOAD SUB 2 EFFECT 1 E Note Due to limited memory you may not be able to load all your effects to submasters Label effects Use the alphanumeric keyboard to label effects up to 20 characters When you load an effect to a cue or a submaster the effect s label is assigned to that cue or submaster These steps add the label Disco Scene to an effect Keystrokes A
118. Mode Enter 5 If you are going to use the internal clock press S2 Clock Enable to start it 6 If you are going to use external SMPTE start SMPTE data flow now Enable the SMPTE port before you do this See for details Press Live At the exact moment in the program that each cue submaster or macro should begin press Go press the submaster s bump but ton or start the macro 9 Press Setup 9 Enter More Softkeys S7 Learn Mode Enter 10 Edit the events as neces sary Chapter 27 SMPTE Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display SMPTE Learn Mode flashes in red under the command line SMPTE TOGGLE LEARN MODE The SMPTE internal clock upper left corner starts to run Enters cue 1 into the event SMPTE EVENT 1 E CUE 1 E Each button press is recorded as an event in your SMPTE show Returns to SMPTE Events display and deactivates Learn mode SMPTE Loop times The SMPTE program executes events from the First event time to the Last event time then resets the time and executes them again The First and Last times appear in the upper right corner and may be set by the user Note A SMPTE loop can last from five seconds up to 24 hours If you set the loop to less than five seconds the internal clock resets it to five seconds from the loop s starting time Keystrokes Action Command line 1 2 Press Setupl Press 9 SMPTE Events Selects SMPTE Events disp
119. N IA Range editing in the Group LiSt Xii Table of contents Chapter 15 Submasters osse 213 S brmiaster typDes ves ec RUE eer 214 Additive submasters llle 214 Inhibitive submasters 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 214 Change pesare bac Pe een ae ae S 214 S bmaster pages tac eee Saar etree NL LS Be 215 submaster EDS ss ie eeu austen oad manne tia seh 215 Submaster bump buttons 0 0000 216 Channels and attributes in submasters 217 Recording submasters 0 0000 eee eee eee 217 Adding fade and dwell times to a submaster 218 Adding a rate toa Submaster 05 220 Live control of a submaster s rate 221 Recording submaster to the other page 221 Recording a submaster minus a submaster 222 Labeling submasters 2 0 0 0 0c eee 222 Controlling submaster fades manually 223 Modifying submasters in Sub display 223 Modifying submasters in LiVe o o o o 224 Removing all focus group linkS 224 Removing selective focus group links 225 Using Update to modify submasterS 226 Update the same channels o o o o 227 Using Update to add channels 228 Creating inhibitive submasters 200 229 Loading cues into submasters 000 229 Loading groups or effects into submasters 23
120. O S SESSION iil Lighting control system User Manual Version 4 1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Electronic Theatre Controls Europe Limited Unit 5 Victoria Industrial Estate London W3 6UU United Kingdom declare under sole responsibility that the product Product name Obsession 2 Lighting Console system Product type model Obsession 2 console Obsession 2 SPS rack Obsession 2 DPS tack Lot n a Batch Serial number n a Ttem numbers n a to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards EN60950 Safety of information Technology Equipment following the provisions of EU LV Directive s 73 23 EEC EN55022 Emissions Standard for IT equipment Class B environment EN50082 1 Generic Immunity Standard following the provisions of EU EMC Directive s 89 336 EEC and 92 31 EEC London United Kingdom Mr Adam Bennette Place of issue Name of authorised person ud ades 2 as e MY Date of Issue signature of authorised person Obsession ll User Manual iii Limited Warranty Electronic Theatre Controls Inc ETC warrants to the original owner or retail customer that for a period of two years from date of delivery of a portable system or energization of a permanently installed system its products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident negligence alteration ab
121. O Profile Cue s assigned profile Rate Cue s assigned rate O Block Cue s block status if fully blocked if partially blocked Park Fader to which cue is parked Label Cue s label O Fader Status display Current state of all pending and fading cues Cue List colors Cue numbers appear in these colors Gray iii Cue not selected or running White Cue selected for editing in Live or Blind or the cue affected by a Sneak Cue command gt appears by cue Red Cue running on physical fader faders 1 8 Yellow Cue finished running on stage If appears by cue cue is selected for editing in Live or Blind Magenta Cue running on virtual fader faders 9 126 To learn more about a cue on a virtual fader press About Cue enter the cue number then press Enter Obsession Il User Manual 37 Submaster List Submaster List displays information about the submasters in the active submaster page Submaster List shows the current setting of each submaster slider as well as submasters labels and fade and dwell times Press Sub List to switch to Submaster List display mode Submaster List displays submasters 1 through 24 Press Sub List again to display submasters 25 through 48 0 Submaster page Current submaster page Use Sub Pagel to switch pages e Sub Submaster e Overall level of submaster Up Time it takes to rise to full O
122. OUT 8 Concludes macro recording Macro 7 runs Channels 1 through 5 rise to 50 percent After five seconds channels 1 through 10 rise to Full After five seconds levels drop to zero Use Macro display mode Macro display mode allows you to create or edit macros blind You can enter any keystroke sequence of into a macro Store Macro gt IT and Y may not be entered in a macro in Macro display mode Hint Plan your macro by determining exactly what keystrokes you want to include You might want to do this by running through the task and writing down each keystroke These steps create a macro to record a show to diskette Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 10 Macro Editing Selects Macro display screen and press Enter 3 Press Macro 8 Enter Blank macro created Macros MACRO 8 m 4 Press Setup 3 Enter Enters setup display Macro contents line reads SETUP DISPLAY 3 E 5 Press 1 Enter Selects Store Show Macro contents line reads SETUP DISPLAY 3219 6 Press Enter Enter Confirms selection Macro contents line reads SETUP DISPLAY 381888 7 Press Store Macro Stores macro Next macro When you press Store Macro the command line selects the next macro Press Enter to begin recording the next macro Macro wait To add a pause in the macro press S7 Macro wait at the point in the macro where you want the pause to occur Enter the time
123. Obsession II 750 2 1 024 Obsession II 1500 3 1 536 Obsession II 3000 6 3 072 Requires an ETCNet Remote Interface for ports 4 6 1 Verify that your DMX512 connector pinout matches the pi nout listed below DMX512 Connector XLR 5 pin female DMX512 Pinout 1 Common 2 Data 3 Data 4 ne 5 nc Caution Your DMX512 control common must be compatible with console control common they must either be the same level or the dimmer control common must float Verify com patibility with your dealer if you are not sure 2 Connect DMX512 cables to DMX512 output connectors on back panel of the console 3 If you are using an Obsession II 3000 and wish to provide more than 1 536 DMX512 outputs install the Remote Inter face Unit RI that came with your system See page Remote Interface Node page 377 for information about this installa tion and configuration process 368 Appendix A Installation and setup Setting DMX512 configuration Once your console is installed you may need to set some hardware configuration settings The DMX Ports display allows you to set your ports DMX512 starting numbers set your ports to Dimmer Double and adjust the DMX512 signal speed if your dimming system requires a slower signal DMX512 starting numbers Console defaults set the starting dimmer number for DMX512 port 1 to 1 DMX512 port 2 to 513 and DMX512 port 3 to 1 025 Obsession Il 3000 sets port 4 to 1 537 port 5 to 2 049 a
124. Obsession Il functions in Tracking or Cue Only operating mode It defaults to Tracking mode when reset In Tracking mode if a cue sets a channel at a level the channel remains at that level until it receives a specific instruction to change levels The channel s level tracks through subsequent cues In Cue Only mode if a cue sets a channel at a level the channel remains at that level only until the next cue starts then fades out See Chapter 7 on 173 for information about recording channels as tracking or cue only Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 3 Track Mode System Settings CUE ONLY and press Enter Or System Settings TRACKING 4 Press Enter to confirmthe System Settings CUE ONLY change of modes orpress or Clear to leave as currently System Settings TRACKING set Obsession Il User Manual 45 46 Selecting screen format The Command display operates in one of two display screen formats four lines of 25 channels or five lines of 20 channels Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 4 Screen Format and press Enter 4 Press Enter to confirm the change of formats or press Clear to leave as currently set Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings 25 x 4 FORMAT or System Setti
125. Order relabel attributes and place attributes in specific categories The attributes in the current show are displayed in green Press Page and Page to view all attributes Attribute Display Setup Category Chapter 8 ML setup The attribute number sets the order in which the ML Live and ML Blind displays list the attributes All 64 attributes are defined and listed but any attribute not used in the currently patched fixtures doesn t appear in the ML screens This release of ML software does not support the Lock function The attribute label is editable and appears on the ML screens It may be up to ten charac ters long The attribute name is defined and maintained by ETC and is not editable The named attributes also allows us to find certain attributes for a special behavior For example the intensity attribute is the default Attribute used when a level is set on a fixture without specifying an attribute e g Fixture 1 At 5 Enter would set the intensity of fixture 1 to 50 All attributes are assigned to one of the following categories Position Beam Image Color or None Attribute Auto Setup After you patch or repatch fixtures in the show you may have the Obsession ll system create a default attribute setup You can use this setup as is or use it as a starting point for your own setup The Auto Setup looks at the personalities of patched fixtures and orders the Attributes ap
126. Phantom 3 Phantom RFUs only provide access to a limited set of operations Keystrokes entered on a User 1 device appear on the command line of all User 1 devices but not on the command line for User 2 devices Both User 1 and User 2 devices have most of the capabilities of a standalone network device but are restricted from using the same channel at the same time Obsession Il User Manual 303 304 The following table describes how the two Users interact If there is a conflict the message Channel s on other user s wheel appears Display mode Channel conflicts Channels selected by User 1 cannot be selected by User 2 Channels selected by User 2 cannot be selected by User 1 Both Users may access the same channel as long as they are working in different cues Both Users may access the same channel as long as they are working in different groups Both Users may access the same channel as long as they are working in different submasters Multiuser display notes When you use Multiuser the upper left corner of the Live Blind Sub Group and Effect screens displays User 1 or User 2 to indicate the User to which the device is assigned Each User may consist of any number of devices Channels selected on one User s devices appear against a blue background on the other User s device displays Chapter 24 Multiuser Enabling Multiuser Before you can assign devices to User 1 User 2 or Phantom you must
127. Profile 4H OH Adjusts graph levels highlights next fade point Profile B O Note To clear the level from a single fade point select the point using In order to be applied to a cue a profile must start at zero and end at full You may assign a profile that doesn t but when the cue is executed it defaults to a linear profile Obsession Il User Manual 269 Clear to End The Clear to End softkey allows you to remove the level from each fade point starting with the selected one through the last one at100 Obsession Il marks points on the intensity line that don t have set levels with For example consider the following profile with fade point 60 selected Complete 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Intensity 01020 30 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 70 80 90 FL RA 80 60 Intensity 7 Al 20 Adi 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 100 Fade Completion If you press S2 Clear To End Enter the profile display looks like this Complete 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Intensity 0 1020 30 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Ger 4 4 ex FL 80 60 Intensity 7 20 ef OONO NI 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Fade Completion
128. Record eve ALLIES ERE MEER Reti imcErd et x ea R REM DIM Eat re Reece dene a weed Acad Oe ane et H AE IX Ctrl F1 F8 Setup Displays s eeann Petes Oo EY RE MR EFE EO F9 SICK ae ved eir e nA a eee E rs ua A X Stop Ba36k s s ique Rn A hence CREE wee OA XP ER F3 Store Macro citado erro etos senten eh taa tut arn sido Alt 9 NER MEE S Sub DISplay av tee Mok gus a epe s c o eee Es F7 Sub List Command ooooooomoooo F7 Ctrl F3 Ctrl F3 Subalist Playback inca e tee uut ales avare chews Depas dn SUBS PAGS CET RUE J Sub She8t ssi EIL e RERGUOE AUREAM F7 Ctrl F3 Swap Command Playback o ooooooooommomomo Shift F2 Swap Command Diagnostic Display Left Shift Tab UMEN ucc T Tie sire EEG RE A A REG ER Rh l Utridozi c eue AA E A Rec A U A Enn nthe E ere at kaka EEE EE duit W PO wtb eee mule Rn Rm Rho mm a Ctrl PgUp xb UT Ctrl PgDn Obsession Il User Manual 349 350 Remote display mode Use your alphanumeric keyboard in Remote Display Mode Scroll Lock ON Num Lock ON to control monitor displays attached to an ETCNet Remote Interface or Remote Video Interface Connect the keyboard cable to the connector labeled Keyboard on the Interface unit s back panel Other than the function keys F1 through F10 use only the keys on the numeric keypad Pla Live li Blind po EET E Group Entente iioii Sub gc Tt Effect E Sei Park FA sete aee ec vice kei Patch FB aene Memo Oise canada Cue List A cee Sub L
129. SON a teh Co Ir A AO ees 322 Set Channel levels 69 71 Channel levels in Patch 67 Dimmer levelS 62 System date 52 System time 52 Setup mMenu 27 81 Show Clear nost 301 Show Channels 32 Show Translator program 353 Slider Allocation screen 311 SMPTE CIS AT alll easels eem 301 COPY ake DR a seu e ecd 339 Edited A vs ur yu d acc 338 340 Enable internal clock 332 Obsession Il User Manual 415 Enable port ms ue tes 332 Events display 334 Frame fate 333 AA eee Ls 338 Internal clock 332 LM PE 336 Eaa A A A 337 Movera s oth as tra ea a i 339 RauUSO pudo ads 341 342 Play back 341 Redundant tracking 342 RUN va se La a 4 341 SMPTE Event List 41 lA A e Lar 339 Sneak Attributes 135 Channel oen to hes 77 CUCM EE 77 135 DefaulttiMe 49 DSOTKEYS eA iit ec te Sese 12 Copy Cue icd TEE UIS 162 Flash Rx 62 76 Move Cue 166 Rec Minus Sub 222 Software version 27 360 Sort Hard drive 286 SMP TE n La ols sr 339 Split Profiles 0 Dre ERIS 152 Spreadsheet Cue s cond hae Rs 163 167 Groupa B26 ae rh Bee 209 210 Submaster 232 233 Stop Back o o o o o o 189 Store Configuration 282 291 317 SHOW ne hes vor Soi ede ad 28
130. Setup 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 1 Blackout System Settings ENABLE Grandmaster and press BLACKOUT BUTTON Enter Or System Settings DISABLE BLACKOUT BUTTON 4 Press Enter to disable System Settings ENABLE these features if enabled or BLACKOUT BUTTON to enable them if disabled or or press Clear to cancel System Settings DISABLE the operation BLACKOUT BUTTON Enabling disabling Clear Channels in Cue Only By default when you create a new cue in Blind any channels set to a level in the previous cue track into the new cue Their levels appear in magenta When Clear Channels in Cue Only is enabled and you create a new cue in Cue Only mode any channels set to a level in the previous cue are set to zero in the new cue Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 2 Clear Chan System Settings Toggle Clear nels in Cue Only and Channel Levels in Cue Only press Enter Mode 4 Press Enter to disable System Settings Toggle Clear these features if enabledor Channel Levels in Cue Only to enable them if disabled Mode or press Clear to cancel the operation Obsession Il User Manual 51 52 Setting the date Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press S2 Set Date 3 Enter the current date in MM DD YY format i e
131. TE 4 60 PARK Unparking attributes An attribute is unparked when a level is not assigned to the attribute in the parking procedure above 9 Unpark an attribute with the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects a fixture ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 Selects an attribute ML Live FIXTURE1 ATTRIBUTE 4 4 Press Park Enter Park attributes as specified ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 PARK E 26 To unpark all attributes and channels press Park Enter without specifying any fixtures or channels Obsession Il User Manual 137 Copying between fixtures Copy Fixture lets you set the attribute levels of a fixture by copying them from another fixture provided that both fixtures are the same type and use the same personality To copy a fixture s attributes to another fixture follow this procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press S3 Copy Fixture Specifies fixture to copy from 1 ML Live COPY FIXTURE 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 2 Selects attributes 2 and 3 to be 3 copied ML Live COPY FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 2 3 4 Press At 2 Specifies a second fixture to which the attributes will be copied 5 Press Enter Copies attributes as specified ML Live COPY FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE2 43029 a Can be a range of fixtures 138 Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Working with libraries Library Selection disp
132. TO CUE 3 Enter the number of the Selects cue cue to bring up onstage Live GO TO CUE 2 For example press 2 4 Tofadethecueupinatime Enters manual fade time other than the default Live GO TO CUE 2 TIME 4 press Time and enter the time 5 Press Enter Cue comes up on stage Live GO TO CUE 2 TIME 4 Note Press Go To Cue 0 Enter or Go To Cue Enter to take all channels other than independent channels to zero Note Press Go To Cue Out Enter to take all channels including independent channels to zero Cue check Press Go To Cue Next Enter to bring up the next cue The cue s levels come up on stage in the default Go To Cue time rather than fading up normally as they would if you pressed Go 33 You cannot use Go To Cue to play back an effect cue 190 Chapter 13 Playing back cues Controlling fades manually There are two ways to override automatic cue playback manual override and rate override Manual override When you take manual control the fader slider controls the fade Once the fade starts press the fader key over the cue s fader to transfer control of the fade to the slider The slider controls the fade from the point at which you press the fader key until the fade completes Once the fade is complete the cue is cleared from the fader To clear the cue from the fader immediately press the fader key again This releases the channel levels at their current levels You m
133. TURE 3 48 Selects personality 5 Fixture Patch FIXTURE 3 4 PERSONALITY 5 Selects start channel 50 Fixture Patch FIXTURE 3 4 START CHANNEL 50 8 Specifies DMX512 port 1 Specifies DMX512 address 50 to start Selects DMX512 port and address Fixture Patch FIXTURE 3 4 START DMX512 1 50 E If you enter a range of fixtures the first fixture s starting channel and DMX512 address are as entered and each successive fixture is automatically offset by the size of the fixture before it You can manually set the offset for the starting channel by entering the start channel in step 5 pressing and entering the desired offset For example entering 1 1110 assigns start channel 1 to fixture 1 11 to fixture 2 21 to fixture 3 and so on Obsession Il User Manual 91 Additional fixture configuration Use the following procedure to label a fixture specify its remote dimmer perform a swap focus and change the Frame Table Keystroke 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 2 Fixture Patch Enter Press 6 Enter Press Label and enter your label for example Show 1 on the alphanu meric keyboard Press Enter Press S4 Remote Dim mer 1 0 0 Enter Press More Softkeys S4 Swap Focus Enter PRESS S6 Frame Table 1 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Fixture Patch display Fixture Patch Selects Fixture 6
134. The command line runs above the softkeys in all Command display modes The command line prefix tells you which display you are in followed by the keystrokes you enter and messages from Obsession Il 12 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Using the command line The command line runs above the softkeys at the bottom of the Command display As you enter commands they appear on the command line For example in Live enter 9 Full Enter to set channel 9 to full intensity The command line reads Live CHAN 9 FULL Tips e The command line prefix indicates your current console display mode e The command line reads lt lt lt Invalid Input if you type an illegal entry Press Clear to continue e Press Enter to conclude an entry Out and Level also conclude the entry The symbol 8 on the command line indicates a concluded entry e You may enter multiple instructions in one command For example Live CUE 6 WAIT 5 TIME 3 LABEL Joe enters e Toenter a split attribute separate the parts on the command line with the key For example a cue with split fade times TIME 4 6 A four second upfade and six second downfade e Toassign a default setting to an attribute select the attribute then press Enter e Use the and gt keys to edit the command line For example in Live press 1 Thru 5 Full Press c Full is highlighted in red Continue to press lt until 1 is highlighted Press Clear
135. Thin Net install jumpers 9 through 14 Be certain jumpers 3 through 8 are not installed 3 If the cable is plugged into the RJ45 connector Twisted Pair or the flat DB15 connector ThickNet install only jumpers 3 through 8 Be certain jumpers 9 through 14 are not installed 4 Jumper 1 must always be installed Jumper 2 must always be off Obsession ll User Manual 391 Node Board Revision A The Revision A Node Board appears in newer Remote Interfaces original Obsession remote consoles and Designer s Remote Consoles It contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit and a set of 14 jumpers Main Processor VS IHL NI OVA ou 9 19 661 1ubuAdoa V A38 v LOVEZSOb 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Net ETCNet card jumpers Main DIP O Video card Video card Switches 1 2 3 5 5 1 a E __ T7 a 1 15678 00000 Open To enable the device for use on the ETCNet network adjust the settings of a number of jumpers on the circuit board 1 Locate Net jumpers 1 through 14 See illustration 2 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC connector Thin Net install jumpers 1 through 6 Be certain jumpers 7 through 12 are not installed 3 If your network cable is plugged into the RJ45 connector Twisted Pair or the DB15 connector ThickNet install only jumpers 7 through 12 Be certain jumpers 1
136. This multiple connection known as multidrop is available for all RFUs running version 1 1 software You cannot use multidrop with a processor Each RFU connected to your system must be configured before use In this configuration procedure given below you assign an identification number and specify whether the RFU will be used in multidrop or not Up to 16 unique identification numbers are allowed If you have more than 16 RFUs in your system some must share identification numbers Cabling for multidrop must be installed by a trained electrical technician For information about cabling requirements or upgrading an RFU please call ETC s Technical Services department at 800 775 4382 The illustration below shows a possible five RFU configuration All RFUs are plugged into connector plates wired in a daisy chain from either a Remote Interface or a Remote Video Interface YA Z obsession A Fedt Z Reinot video console interface interface I I XX Sl E Remote O O LEO focus units SSS Remote SS 9 focus units 5 f you have an older RFU you may need a minor hardware upgrade Call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 if unsure Obsession Il User Manual 373 374 Installing t 1 2 he RFU Switch the RFU power Off Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back
137. UE 4 TIME 9 Wait time is the time between when you press Go and when the actual fade begins You may program separate wait times for cue upfade and downfade of up to 99 59 minutes Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels Press Record 5 Press Wait 3 Press Enter Action Command line Selects cue 5 Live RECORD CUE 5 Enters a downfade wait of three seconds Live RECORD CUE 5 WAIT 3 Records cue 5 with an upfade wait of zero seconds and downfade wait of three seconds Live RECORD CUE 5 WAIT 3 E Obsession Il User Manual 149 150 Recording with Link and Follow A cue automatically appears on the Playback Cue List when you record it Normally cues are played back one at a time and in numerical order You can change the order with Link and make playback automatic with Follow Link Link allows you to change the normal playback sequence for a specific cue Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 6 Selects cue 6 Live RECORD CUE 6 4 Press Link 2 Enter Records cue 6 linked to cue 2 After you play back cue 6 press Go to play back cue 2 Live RECORD CUE 6 LINK 2 9 Note If an effect is running and a link takes you from one cue to another the effect continues to run Of the channels addressed by the effect only the channels used in the second cue change
138. a Substitute Focus Group here if you want to insert references to the group rather than actual levels 208 37 When adding a focus group to a focus group it is possible to create a circular reference which the software will not record When faced with a circular reference you must specify that one of the focus groups making up the circular reference is an ordinary group which puts levels in the channels rather than references to the other group Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Group Spreadsheet The Group Spreadsheet available from the Group or ML Group display lists all groups and displays their channel levels Use Page Page Next Last and the arrow keys to move around the display As you scroll through the groups the currently selected group is highlighted in white Group Sheet GROUP 1 s Range editing in the Group Spreadsheet Keystrokes Actions Command line 1 Press Group S3 Spreadsheet 2 Press Group 1 Thru 5 Group Sheet GROUP 1 gt 5 3 Press Enter Selects groups 1 through 5 Group Sheet GROUP 1 5 8 4 Press 1 Thru 5 Group Sheet GROUP 1 5 8 CHAN 1 gt 5 5 Press Full Group Sheet GROUP 1 5 8 CHAN 1 5 FULL 6 Press Enter Sets channels 1 through 5 to full in groups 1 through 5 Group Sheet GROUP 1 5 8 CHAN 1 gt 5 FULL 8 Obsession Il User Manual 209 210 Copy ranges When you copy a range of groups the spacing between items in the ne
139. a 368 PROTIGs ttt ex Oris yan cre n 61 Remote needed 90 System settingS 44 Unpatching 59 Dimmer Monitoring 326 Dimmer monitoring Dimmer statuS 322 enable od ss cet s 316 E 25525 ALLE 317 321 Rack Status see menei os 323 System status 324 DIP switches 376 In general 376 Remote Video Interface 382 Disable ETCLink messages 326 Disable level wheel 46 Diskette DIRECTORY ta ees 279 Erase diskette 278 A oti ob eke 278 Management 278 Read all cure esee 280 Read patch 281 Read show 280 288 Read system settings 280 Record ShoW 279 Display See also ML Displays Channel Usage 81 Cue List 344 bet ap gies 36 168 Fader sStatuS 188 GOUD c c uite pertes 17 Group List 40 EU cS 15 WACO oues ctus ve cate eros s 257 Paternina ci dd 24 25 By Channel 25 A AA net 35 Proteo rasa 267 SMPTE Event List 41 SMPTE Events 334 Obsession Il User Manual 409 Submaster List 38 Display modes 12 Screen format 46 DMXCQUE eee Ae ke fat 366 DMX Switcher 363 DMX512 Connecting devices 368 Order Personality 119 Set port to Dimmer Double 370 Speed setting
140. a eter DE QU PE 24 Setup MEN A ED 27 DIAQGNOStICS LL ree Al e 27 New Features 2 0 2 20000 ess 27 Meno ses oem rasis ur uua e ede eso eed 28 Obsession ll User Manual vii Viii PREVIOW ein mottos hie me e e PART A rers eA 30 Flexiehiantiel ss a aca meten rotae GEA Gta fete ns 31 Using flexichannel llle sees 31 All CHARGES iin aset sete ee ne eod ere a 31 Selecting channels with Flexichannel active 31 Show Channels usse net Medea ela Ru 32 CurrentChanrels nc I Deren t epe 33 View Channels llle 34 Playback display oem tee RR ES 35 Expandi PETERET 35 Gue EISE sm noter Or hec token ck Dee LCS I eas BE 36 Submaster List Lasse inh oo eb ke AID OE SE 38 GrOUp WISE es odo ote Nol eed SB ata eat 40 SMPTE Event EISt T sha ga netos Se nn tee Ru 41 Chapter 4 System settings oaia ks 43 Setting the number of dimmers 00 44 Setting the number of channels 44 Selecting Cue Only or Tracking mode 45 Selecting screen format 0 0 llle 46 Enabling disabling Level Wheel 46 Setting default Level ni anea etnie da A 000000 eee 47 Setting default fade tiMeS ooo oo oo ooooo 48 Setting default Back and Go To Cue times 49 Setting default Sneak time o oo o o oo ooooo 49 Setting default cue profile oo o o oooo oo 50 Enabling disabling Blackout and Grandmaster 51 Enabling d
141. ace modes In Insert mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another keystroke Obsession ll inserts the new keystroke before the highlighted one In Replace mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another keystroke Obsession ll replaces the highlighted keystroke with the new one To switch from Insert mode to Replace mode press S1 Replace Mode To switch from Replace mode to Insert mode press S1 Insert Mode Macro edit keys and gt move the highlight left or right S2 Delete entry deletes highlighted keystroke T and WN move up or down through existing macro list If you are editing a macro they move the highlight left or right Last and Next move up or down through potential macro list allowing you to select macros that haven t been recorded yet Obsession Il User Manual 261 262 Clear macros You must be in Macro display mode to clear individual macros Clear all macros from the Clear Functions menu Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 10 Macro Editing Press Enter Press S3 Clear Macro 4 Enter macro or range of macros to clear 5 Press Enter 6 Press Enter to clear the macro or Clear to cancel Copy macros Action Command line Selects Macro display mode Macros CLEAR MACRO Macros CLEAR MACRO 12 Macros CLEAR MACRO 12 8 Please confirm Macros CLEAR MACRO 12 m Please confirm 8 You may copy a macro or use macros as building blocks for n
142. al dimming rack To make or modify a dimmer assignment use the procedure below Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 1 Personality Setup Enter 3 Type 9 and press Enter 4 Press S5 Pers Editor 5 Press More Softkeys S2 Remote Dimmer 6 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies personality 9 for editing Personality Setup PERSONALITY 9 8 Enters the Personality Editor display Specifies that a remote dimmer is needed Modifies the personality to require a remote dimmer Personality Editor REMOTE DIMMER E Obsession Il User Manual 123 Inserting or deleting channels You may insert new channels into the personality to which attributes may be assigned using the procedure given under Creating a personality page 120 You may also delete a channel from the channel order which deletes the attribute from the personality Insert or delete channels with the following procedure 24 Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 1 Personality Selects the Personality Setup Setup Enter display Personality Setup 3 Type 9 and press Enter Specifies personality 9 for editing Personality Setup PERSONALITY 9 8 4 Press S5 Pers Editor Enters the Personality Editor display 5 Press More Softkeys Specifies a
143. annels selects only channels that are already visible in the current Flexichannel mode The spreadsheet below displays all channels 1 through 5 and 21 through 25 The View Channels option allows you to compare two sets of channels side by side that might normally not appear on the same screen Note that a grey Bl appears between the two sets of channels This indicates channels that have levels but aren t being shown 75 75 75 85 85 85 EN E O 90 90 90 90 90 Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef Ef 0 0 0 90 90 uiua o 0 78 78 78 78 65 65 65 75 0 Spreadsheet VIEW CHANNELS 1 gt 5 21 gt 25 u Note View Channels may also be used when Flexichannel is off All Channels selected Note As well as entering ranges of channels to view such as View Channels 1 Thru b O Enter you may enter commands like View channels Group 1 Enter to view only the channels in group 1 or View Channels Group Cue 6 to view the chan nels in cue 6 34 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Playback display Playback is the display on which you run and monitor your show Press the Sub List Cue List Group List keys in the row marked Displays to choose a Playback display mode Press Live More Softkeys S3 SMPTE List to choose the SMPTE Events List mode The gray and blue boxes labeled F1 through F8 correspond with the eight faders The information displayed in these boxes indicates current activity on each fader If a box
144. arnel ise stn ile ois eret 76 Sneak charnrielS us close oe Ak eee Bie ed 77 Doce ete e Rd eating ERRARE 78 Channeslichieek a qi it betes ia teta BIS 79 About chanrelz 45 esce ALLEE RA dui 79 Finding unused channels 2 2055 80 Channel Usage display o o oooooooooo o o 81 Channel Usage SoftkeyS oo o o oooo o o 82 Chapter 7 Patching moving lights 3 0 83 MESAS 2 ete ana a AA 84 Getting started with personalitieS 86 Personality Setup display o o oo o o o 86 Copying personalities o o oooooo o o 87 Deleting a personality from your show 88 Patching ML fixtures 0 0 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 89 Setting up a new fixture rely nenies eniinn ra ai 91 Additional fixture configuration 0 92 Editing in Fixture Patch 2 0 005 93 Editing fixture attributes o o o oo oo oooo 94 Chapter 8 MES con ccohe canoas neuter osama ts 97 Moving lights controls 0 auauua naaa 98 ENCORE Sii oom de pe bed ree ER ns Rs ate 98 Les e Her o ENTER TEE 98 Touchscreen ze di 99 Encoders and trackpad setup 20 100 Attribute assignments a rels roeiriemen nun ae 100 AGcelerations eme rE on 102 AO SEUD e cioe hide IRA DP RM a aes 103 Touchscreen SETUP ooo 104 Attribute Display Setup llli 106 Obsession ll User Manual ix Attribute Auto Setup eee Changing an attribute s Category
145. ase confirm 4 Press Enter System shuts down Electronic backup maintenance Caution An Obsession ll processor contains an electronic backup system to preserve memory in the event that power fails The processor must be on for at least seven hours every 28 days to maintain the necessary charge both processors if you have a dual processing system If a processor is off for longer than 28 days show information stored in memory may be lost Always back up your show to a diskette or to the hard drive Obsession ll User Manual 5 Customer service If you have problems with your system please follow these steps 1 Refer to the manual or the console s Help function 2 f you do not find the answer in the manual call your local dealer or ETC Technical Services Please have the following information available before you call e System model and serial number located on console s back panel e Software version displayed on Setup menu e Options installed e Dimmer installation type e Dimmer manufacturer To reach Electronic Theatre Controls US technical services department call Monday through Friday from 8 00 AM to 6 00 PM Central Standard Time If calling from anywhere in the United States place your call to 800 775 4382 From outside the United States call the number listed below under North America Address all correspondence about Obsession to North America Electronic Theatre Controls Inc Customer Servic
146. asters in either Live or Submaster modes and attributes to submasters in ML Live Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Go to Live mode Select a display 2 Select channels and set Creates look channel levels Oh select fixtures fixture attributes and their levels Press Record Live RECORD 4 Press Sub Enter The current stage look is Or recorded into submaster Press Sub Bump Live RECORD SUB 3 8 a Press Record Sub Next Enter to record to the next submaster number in sequence Obsession Il User Manual 217 218 Adding fade and dwell times to a submaster Upfade time is how long it takes a submaster s channels to fade to their recorded levels when you press the submaster bump button Dwell time is how long the submaster s look holds before the downfade starts The Dwell time may also be Hold See page 219 Downfade time is how long it takes a submaster s channels to fade from their recorded levels When you record fade times for a submaster you can play the recorded fade with the bump button or control it manually with the slider Note You can use the slider to manually override the fade Adding fade times You can add fade times to a submaster from Live or Submaster Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub Live SUB 2 Enter submaster to which Live SUB 4 to add fade times Press Time Live SUB 4 TIME Enter upfade time and Live SUB 4 TIME 6 press 5 Enterdwe
147. at least six inches behind console for ventilation and cable clearance Caution Do not leave the console in a road case tray or on a soft surface This inhibits proper ventilation 2 Insert the key into the power switch and turn it to the Off po sition 3 Insert the female end of the power cord in the console con nector labeled Power in 4 Insert the male end of the console power cord in a grounded 120 VAC outlet For 220 VAC operation consult ETC 5 Insert the ETCNet cable connector into the appropriate con nector on the back panel Once connected the console com municates directly with the Obsession ll processor s For more information about wiring see the ETCNet Planning and Installation Guide 6 Setthe DIP switches as explained on the next page Connect jumpers as explained under Node board configuration page 391 386 Appendix B References Main DIP switch settings Node Board A set of DIP switches in the original Obsession s Remote Console are located inside the console at the back left corner near a row of LEDs of the circuit board to the left of the fans To change the DIP switch settings raise the top panel and lock it into upright position Find the switches and adjust the settings as shown on the list below Switches are either On Closed or Off Open The Remote Console does not use DIP switches 7 or 8 DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the Remote Console will not start Switc
148. atch and you have more dimmers than channels Obsession ll automatically assigns excess dimmers to channel zero Follow these steps to assign dimmers to channel zero in By Dimmer mode Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Patch 2 If patch is displayed in By Selects By Dimmer patch Channel or By Label mode display press S1 By Dimmer 3 Press S3 Unpatch Patch UNPATCH Use the keypad to enter Patch UNPATCH DIMMER the dimmer s you want to 12 10 patch to channel zero Use and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer 5 Press Enter Patch UNPATCH DIMMER 1 gt 108 When a dimmer is unpatched its proportion and profile automatically return to their default state See Chapter 23 Clear functions page 299 for information about clearing the entire patch at once Obsession Il User Manual 59 60 Labeling dimmers You may assign alphanumeric labels to your dimmers Dimmer labels may be up to five characters long Obsession II assigns the dimmer number as a default label to each dimmer For example dimmer 237 is assigned the label number 0237 Dimmers may be labeled in all three modes The following instructions do it in By Dimmer mode Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 f patch is displayed in By Channel or By Label mode press S1 By Dimmer 3 Use the keypad to enter the number of the dimmer to which you want to assign a label 4 Press Labell then use the
149. ber is red Sub SUB 9 INHIBITIVE E 5 Move slider to zero LED Additive levels are unloaded flashes red 6 Move slider to 10 Inhibitive control is loaded Follow the same procedure to convert back to additive Loading cues into submasters Submasters may contain channels or may be loaded with groups cues or effects or some combination of the four Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Load Sub Live LOAD SUB 2 Enter submaster number Live LOAD SUB 10 3 Press Cue Live LOAD SUB 10 CUE 4 Enter the cue to load Live LOAD SUB 10 CUE 1 5 Press Enter Live LOAD SUB 10 CUE 18 Hint To save time enter a range of cues into a matching range of submasters Use the and Thru keys to enter ranges This also works for groups and effects Obsession Il User Manual 229 230 Loading groups or effects into submasters Submasters may contain channels or may be loaded with groups cues or effects or some combination of the four If you load a group into a submaster as described below the Obsession ll system links the group and the submaster While they are linked changes to the group s levels automatically appear in the submaster Also the group number is displayed in the submaster s label field The link is maintained as long as the submaster levels are not otherwise changed If an effect plays back from a submaster it interacts with other cues and submasters on a highest level basis When an eff
150. can have up to 2 000 frames in all loaded personalities combined As each frame is created it decrements the Frames Remaining counter displayed at the upper right of the screen Chapter 8 ML setup Frame editor You can revise existing frame tables and create new ones in the frame table editor This editor is operated from the display shown below with its columns defined beneath Frame Editor Frm Num A discrete attribute can have up to 256 frames numbered consecutively from 1 up to 256 There are no gaps in frame numbering Start Value Start Value determines the output range within which a label is used The first frame starts at zero The last frame ends at 255 A frame s Start Value must fall between the previous and following frames Start Values to be used properly A frame s label displays when the attribute s level is equal to or greater than the frame s Start Value but less than the next frame s Start Value Snap Type This release of ML software does not support the snap type function Long Label A frame s long label appears on ML displays It contains up to ten characters ij E The short label is not used because this release of ML software does not use scrol lers Obsession Il User Manual 113 114 Enter the frame table editor display using the following procedure d 2 Keystrokes Action Command Line Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects
151. can test it before you add it to a cue or submaster During the test the effect plays back on stage and you can modify it in the effect display Keystrokes Action Command line 1 From the Effect display Selects Edit mode press S7 Edit Features 2 Press S7 Test Effect Display switches to Live mode and press Enter Currently selected effect fades in on fader 8 3 To change effect rate Rate changes press Rate F8 and adjust the rate wheel 4 Press F8 Test fades out in downfade time 5 Press F8 again to end Test ends effect immediately Note Only one effect can be tested at a time If you test a second effect it replaces the first test During the test the display for fader 8 displays the effect number and flashes Test in yellow During the step test the effect plays back on stage one step at a time Press Next to move from step to step During the test you can modify it in the effect display Keystrokes Action Command line 1 From the Effect display Selects Edit mode press S7 Edit Features 2 Press S6 Test Steps Display switches to Live Enter 3 Press Next Puts step 1 on stage Repeat to advance through each step 4 Press F8 Effect is cleared from fader 8 Obsession Il User Manual 249 250 Record an effect to a cue An effect cue interacts with other cues and the keypad in a last action manner An effect loaded to a fader activates the low level when the effe
152. cent Blocking Whether cue is blocked Parked Whether cue is parked on a fader Obsession Il User Manual 171 172 Chapter 10 Cues Chapter 11 Tracking Cue only This chapter explains how to use Obsession ll as a tracking system or as a cue only system with conventional lights or moving light fixtures The normal state for the Obsession ll system is in the tracking mode but you can switch to cue only or back to tracking mode again in a configuration procedure The following options are described e Tracking e Cue Only e Cue Only Track key Tracking In Tracking mode if you modify a channel level the new level tracks forward into subsequent cues until it encounters a specific instruction to change levels In the following case five cues are recorded in Tracking mode Their levels track forward until changed by a new cue The bold characters indicate levels set by that cue The regular characters indicate a tracked level Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Cue 1 FF Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 50 0 0 0 Obsession Il User Manual 173 Tracking with ML fixtures Tracking depends upon whether a fixture is selected e f no fixtures are selected then tracking affects all channels and fixture attributes except channels and attributes at zero e If some fixtures are selected then tracking affects all fixture attributes in the selected fixtures including those at zero e f some at
153. chase order or other document of Customer ETC s commencement of performance and or delivery shall not constitute a waiver of such terms and conditions or any acceptance of any terms and conditions contained in the Customer s order or other documents Acceptance of any product or service by the Customer will be construed as acceptance of ETC s terms and conditions Any dispute or questions of construction with respect to any order placed with ETC shall be governed by the laws of the State of Wisconsin All prices are in US Dollars FOB ETC s factory or warehouse Prices models and specifications are subject to change without notice Orders must be in writing Phone orders will be accepted from established accounts when followed by written confirmation The acceptance of any order does not imply conformance with plans and specifications unless the plans and specifications accompany the order and are accepted as binding by ETC Equipment ordered which differs in any way from our standard catalog items will require drawings approved in writing by the Customer When drawings are approved they shall take precedence over all other written or verbal instructions Orders are effective only when accepted and acknowledged by the factory Minimum order is 25 00 net exclusive of freight Price protection will be given on orders entered for immediate shipment and for project orders entered before the effective date of a price increase All
154. ches These switches are visible through the right side panel of the RVI device Use a pin or similar fine pointed object to change settings Front Back o O o 123456 1213456 amp If you are using ThinNet cabling the BNC connector set the back six DIP switches to On up Set the front six to Off down If you are using ThickNet cabling the DB15 connector set the front six switches to On up Set the back six to Off down If you are using Twisted Pair cabling the RJ45 connector set the front six switches to On up Set the back six to Off down Appendix A Installation and setup Installing RVI monitors You may install additional monitors at remote locations Additional monitors duplicate the master console s displays or provide User 2 displays 1 Insert the female end of the monitor power cord in the moni tor connector and the male end of the monitor power cord in the interface device connector labeled Power out 2 Connect the monitor cable to the connector labeled CRT 1 or CRT 2 on the interface device 3 Turn the monitor power switch to its On positions VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video 2 Green video 3 Blue video 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Red ground 7 Green ground 8 Blue ground 9 nc 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 nc 13 H H V sync 14 V sync 15 nc Obsession
155. ck the Memo display automatically any time you turn the system on 2 Alert is ON O Editing mode The current editing mode appears in the upper left corner When you type a memo in Insert mode text to the right of the cursor moves to the right In Replace mode text to the right of the cursor is replaced by the new text Press S1 Insert Replace Mode to switch between modes O Alert If Alert is on the Memo advisory appears when the system turns on Press S5 Set Alert to activate Alert Press S6 Clear Alert to deactivate Alert Text Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter text The arrow keys move the cursor on the screen Press S2 Clear Memo to erase the Memo screen Press S3 Clear Line to erase only the line you are currently entering or editing O Command line Softkeys 28 Chapter 3 Monitor displays To enter a memo follow these instructions Keystrokes 1 Zi Press Memo Type Shut down console following show on the alphanumeric keyboard Press S5 Set Alert Action Selects Memo display mode Enters your memo on the Memo screen Activates the alert when sys tem is turned on memo advi sory will automatically appear Obsession Il User Manual 29 Preview Preview allows you to see levels in the next cue in the cue list You may also use Preview in Live or Blind to check the levels in any submaster group or cue To activate Preview mode in Live press Live S1
156. cking is enabled and this processor is mastered functioning as the primary processor by the console Light off means that either tracking is disabled or this processor is functioning as the backup ETCNet Light blinks during ETCNet activity DMX Switcher The outputs from the two processors in a Obsession ll redundant tracking system are routed through a device called a DMX switcher This switcher is mounted between the two processors in a 19 touring case The front panel of the DMX Switcher contains a 3 position keyswitch and associated LED devices Two of the keyswitch positions are labeled Primary and Secondary corresponding to the designations made in Hardware setup page 365 The third position is labeled AUTO and is the normal operating position for redundant tracking When you turn the keyswitch to primary or secondary the DMX Switcher will only accept inputs from that processor not from both The switcher LEDs tell you whether the system is operating with the primary or the secondary processor Obsession Il User Manual 363 Console The Obsession ll console has a centering keyswitch in the upper right corner of the face panel On each side of the center position are two LEDs labeled Primary and Secondary In normal tracking the Primary LED is lit You can override normal tracking by momentarily moving the switch toward the Secondary LED At that moment the secondary processor assumes control thus re
157. cond is the default Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setupl Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter Press 1 I O Options Enter Press 4 SMPTE Frame Rate Enter Press Enter again Press Enter again Press Enter again Action Command line Selects Input Output Configuration menu Selects l O Options menu I O Options 24 fps SMPTE SMPTE frame rate is set to 24 fps I O Options 25 fps SMPTE SMPTE frame rate is set to 25 fps You may continue to cycle through the frame rates by press ing Enter Obsession Il User Manual 333 334 Creating SMPTE programs The console lets you create SMPTE programs in the SMPTE Events display or in Learn mode 00 00 31 00 Cue 31 C31 Dream Ballet SMPTE EVENT 7 LABEL C31 Dream Ballet u SMPTE Time Status Chapter 27 SMPTE Current SMPTE time red is internal clock gray is external Current SMPTE playback status Pause mode or Run mode Status of the internal clock either enabled or disabled SMPTE time at which the internal clock starts SMPTE time at which the internal clock resets loops to the First time List of events in the SMPTE program SMPTE time of each event also shows the number of SMPTE frames per second Command sent out for that event Elements may include Go Cue Sub Bump Sub Bump On Sub Bump Off and Macro Sets a rate for Go or Cue events overrides the recorded cue rate Label f
158. cording to the Channel Order also defined by the user 15 After the Start Chan is set levels can be set in the fixture s attributes and recorded into cues You cannot control the moving light however until you set Start DMX512 Obsession ll User Manual 89 Start DMX512 Remote Dimmer Swap Focus Frame Table 90 This is the DMX512 address to which Start Chan is patched The Obsession II system starts patching the fixture at the Start DMX512 channel specified assigning DMX512 addresses in the order given by the fixture s personality Start DMX512 requires two numbers First you must supply the port number 1 6 Second you must supply an address on the port 1 512 Use the DMX512 START address provided on the fixture or in the fixture s user s manual If the fixture s personality has the has Remote Dimmer flag set then the fixture will use a dimmer in the dimmer rack to control the Intensity The operator will need to set the Remote Dimmer number here using a conventional dimmer number Swap Focus is used to swap the location of the pan and tilt attributes in a fixture from what they were set in its personality This is useful when two moving lights are hung 90 degrees off of each other and one s Pan is the other s Tilt Swapping one of them will make the Pan Attribute move both lights in the same direction Frame Tables are used to assign a different set of labels to a fixtu
159. cs SW Version Information og PWN Console Mode When finished in the Console Setup menu press S8 Return to return to normal console operation 358 Appendix A Installation and setup Ethemet setup Ethernet is a proprietary communications protocol based on the IEEE standard 802 3 ETC adapted this popular protocol to its line of lighting control devices and calls it ETCNet ETCNet is the basis of the communication network that connects the Obsession II remote console with its processor s as well as with monitors printers Remote Interface Units Remote Focus Units DMX512 devices and other devices The console and all network devices have connectors for three types of network cabling ThinNet ThickNet and Twisted Pair The connector you select depends upon which of type of cabling is in use at your location For more information about wiring choices see the ETCNet Planning and Installation Guide Typically multiple devices are on the network but in some systems the console is connected directly to a single processor When more than a console and single processor is involved you will have a network hub or concentrator to connect them together The Ethernet Setup display allows you to operate your console with or without a concentrator If you are using a concentrator such as with a dual processor system the UTP Cable setting in the Ethernet Setup should be NORMAL If you have a single processor connected direct
160. ct step first runs The low level stays active until the effect is canceled ends or control of a channel is taken by a subsequently activated cue You may give an effect a manual upfade or downfade time allowing you to fade it up and down with the playback slider If the effect has a manual upfade it must have a manual downfade and the dwell time is Hold Effects with a Hold dwell time automatically park to a fader An effect with a Hold dwell time runs on the fader until you press the fader button to begin the downfade Press the fader button once to fade out an effect loaded to a playback fader in the recorded downfade time Note Press the fader button twice to cancel an effect from the fader immediately Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Record and enter Live RECORD CUE 9 the cue in which to record the effect 3 Press Effect and enter Live RECORD CUE 9 EFFECT the effect to record to the 1 cue 4 Press Enter Live RECORD CUE 9 EFFECT 1H The cue that follows an effect cue will run channels taken from the effect in its own downfade time So if cue 1 contains an effect cue 2 will run channels it takes from cue 1 in cue 2 s down time Chapter 16 Effects Delete an effect from a cue Remove an effect from a cue by entering the cue number and pressing Effect Enter without entering an effect number Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Cue and enter the
161. ct List gt EL Attribute EA Return Editing Features EF Negative Insert Step Alternate Delete Step Reverse Delete effect Bounce Build Copy effect Random Test Steps Random Rate Test Effect Return Return By Channel BC By Label BL By Dimmer BD By Dimmer BD By Dimmer BD By Label BL By Label BL By Channel BC By Channel BC Unpatch Unpatch Unpatch Suppress Display Labels Suppress Display Labels Suppress Display Labels A B A B A B Dimmer Double Dimmer Double Dimmer Double Independent Setup Menu Channel System Settings Channel 1 O Configuration Set Time Show Name Clear Config Set Date Show Comments Load Config Store Config Load Diskette Store Diskette Print Config Take Control System Shutdown HD Functions Return HD Functions RPS Setup Menu Profiles Select by Name Read Cues Clear All Store Show Read Patch Clear to End Overwrite Show Read Submaster Fill Between Erase Show Read All Read Effects Read Groups Read Show Read Profiles Copy Profile Read Part of Show RPS Read Macros Reset Profile Sort Return Obsession Il User Manual Return 403 Setup Menu ptions 8
162. ction Command line 1 Press Effect 2 Press Effect Enter the Effect 1 8 EFFECT 2 effect to label Press Label Effect 2 8 LABEL Type Disco Scene on the Effect 2 LABEL Disco Scene keyboard 5 Press Enter on the con Effect 2 8 LABEL Disco Scene E sole Chapter 16 Effects Delete effects You must be in the Effect display to delete individual effects Delete all effects from the Clear Functions menu Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Effect 2 Press S7 Edit Features 3 Press S3 Delete Effect Effect 2 8 DELETE EFFECT 4 Enter effect to delete Effect 2 8 DELETE EFFECT 5 unless the effect is already selected 5 Press Enter Effect 2 E DELETE EFFECT 5 E Please confirm 6 Press Enter or press Effect 5 8 DELETE EFFECT 5n Clear to cancel Please confirm 8 Copy effects You may copy an effect or use effects as building blocks for new effects Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Effect 2 Press S7 Edit Features Effect 2 E 3 Press S4 Copy Effect Effect 2 COPY EFFECT 4 Enter the effect to copy Effect 2 8 COPY EFFECT 2 5 Press At Effect 2 8 COPY EFFECT 2 6 Enter the new effect oN 2 m COPY EFFECT 2 7 Press Enter Effect copy Effect 2 COPY EFFECT 2 is complete 12 If the effect to which you are copying is already recorded you must confirm that you wish to replace that effect with the new one Obsession Il User Manual 253 The E
163. d READ SUBMASTERS Press Enter Please confirm 5 Press Enter or press Console reads part into Clear to cancel memory Message appears on screen Operation in progress Please stand by Command line reads Hard Drive Functions READ SUBMASTERS Please confirm 11 You may not save part of a show to the hard drive If you want to save any part you must record the whole show Obsession Il User Manual 289 Erasing a show You may erase a show from the hard drive if you no longer need it or if you need space on the drive Save a backup copy of the show on diskette if you might need it again Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 4 Hard Drive Selects Hard Drive Functions Functions Enter menu 3 Use level wheel or Highlights the selected show Next Last Page and Page to select show You may also press S1 Select By Name enter the show s name on the alpha numeric keyboard and press Enter 4 Press S4 Erase Show Hard Drive Functions and press Enter ERASE SHOW Please confirm 5 Press Enter or press Hard Drive Functions Clear to cancel ERASE SHOW E Complete Replacing a show You may erase a show from the hard drive and replace it with the show currently in memory To do so follow the steps above but press S3 Overwrite Show Enter in step 4 The new show may appear elsewhere in the list depending on y
164. d deficiencies in your fixtures and protect equipment from stress Obsession ll automatically assigns a linear fade to dimmers and uses the default profile from your system settings for cues In a linear fade the elapsed fade time is directly proportional to the output level In other words when 25 percent of the fade time has passed the output level is 25 percent of the fade s full level When the fade is half finished the level is at 50 percent Obsession II provides 32 profiles including ten preset profiles and 22 that are user definable You may assign any profile in place of a patch level to dimmers or to cues and cue parts For information about creating and editing profiles see Chapter 18 Profiles page 265 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 0 Default Cue System Settings ENTER Profile and press Enter DEFAULT PROFILE 0 32 4 Enterthe profile you wish System Settings ENTER to assign as the default DEFAULT PROFILE 0 32 5 profile 5 Press Enter or press System Settings ENTER Clear to cancel the DEFAULT PROFILE 0 32 5 9 operation 2 A default cue profile must start at O and end at Full 50 Chapter 4 System settings Enabling disabling Blackout and Grandmaster To disable or enable Blackout and the Grandmaster follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press
165. dating cues In Tracking mode Record update without Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Record or Update Cue 1 Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They remain at full until a subsequent cue sets them to a different level Record update with Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Record or Update Cue 1 Cue Only Track Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They are set to zero in the next cue unless that cue has another setting for them In Cue Only mode Record update without Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Record or Update Cue 1 Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They are set to zero in the next cue unless that cue has another setting for those channels Record update with Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Record or Update Cue 1 Cue Only Track Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They remain at full until a subsequent cue sets them to a different level Obsession Il User Manual 175 176 Blind In Blind use the Cue Only Track key only when adding or modifying channel levels Changes in channel levels are automatically recorded into the selected cue as you make them In Tracking mode Change levels without Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They remain at full until a subsequent cue sets them to a different level Change levels wi
166. des in these colors White Gray Unselected dimmer channel number Yellow Selected dimmer number Magenta Dimmer level Blue Dimmer profile Live channel levels on the Patch by Channel display appear in the same colors as in Live See Colors page 14 26 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Setup menu The Setup menu allows you to access system setting information print and disk functions diagnostics and profile and macro editing as well as control information for options such as MIDI and SMPTE It also indicates your current software version Setup Menu Diagnostics The Diagnostics option provides access to three useful screens for troubleshooting system problems e The Diagnostics identifies and monitors hardware and network system activity e The Message Log keeps a record of all events and activity messages e The ETCNet Self Tests display lets you run diagnostic tests on most devices attached to your ETCNet network New Features New Features provides information about newly added features and options Press Setup 1 5 Enter to display the New Features text Use the Level wheel Page Page or the up down arrow keys to scroll through The text may also be printed by means of a softkey Obsession Il User Manual 27 Memo The Memo display provides a screen of text to view or print The console can also be configured to advise you to che
167. ding a parked cue When you play back a cue Obsession Il normally assigns it to the first available fader If you prefer you can use Park to specify the fader in which a cue plays A parked cue always plays in the specified fader You may park a cue on a virtual fader but you cannot bump a cue to a virtual fader The only exception is when two cues are parked to the same fader When this happens the second cue displaces the first the first cue moves to a virtual fader A parked cue does not reside permanently in its fader Once the cue plays back the fader is available for other cues Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Set channel or fixture attribute levels 3 Press Record 1 1 Park Records cue 11 parked to 8 Enter fader 8 Live RECORD CUE 11 PARK 8 If you park a cue but do not specify the fader to park the cue to Obsession II will choose any physical fader to run the cue on and will not allow it to be transferred to a virtual fader Obsession Il User Manual 155 Modifying a recorded cue live In Live if you want to add remove or modify channel or attribute levels you must play the cue make your changes then re record the cue If you are not familiar with procedures for playing cues see Chapter 13 Playing back cues page 187 The following two principles apply when updating or re recording a cue in Live mode e When in tracking mode press Cue Only Track after you press Record
168. ds Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 8 Selects cue 8 Live RECORD CUE 8 4 Press Profile 5 1 Records cue 8 Assigns profile 5 Enter to its upfade and profile 1 to its downfade Live RECORD CUE 8 PROFILE 5 1 Chapter 10 Cues Recording with a modified fade rate Rate allows you to record cues that play back faster or slower than their recorded fade time This can be especially helpful when you are calculating complex timing information for multipart cues or effects Fade rate is expressed as a percentage of the cue s recorded fade time 28 A cue with a fade rate of 100 percent plays back at its recorded fade time A rate of 300 plays the cue back three times faster and a rate of 50 plays the cue back half as fast as its recorded fade time For example when a cue has a ten second fade time a rate of 200 plays the cue in five seconds a fade rate of 50 plays the cue in 20 seconds Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 9 Selects cue 9 Live RECORD CUE 9 4 Press S5 Rate then Records cue 9 with a fade rate of enter 2 O 0 on the key 200 percent Fade runs in half pad Press Enter the recorded fade time Live RECORD CUE 9 RATE 200 28 f you adjust the rate on a cue containing an effect the adjustments affect step time
169. e Department 3030 Laura Lane Middleton WI 53562 Phone 1 608 831 4116 Europe Electronic Theatre Controls Ltd 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU Phone 44 181 896 2000 Asia Electronic Theatre Controls Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Hong Kong Phone 852 2799 9325 Internet Email address mail etcconnect com World Wide Web Home Page www etcconnect com Chapter 1 Getting started Chapter 2 Take control Obsession Il may operate in a network of two or more Obsession consoles that compete for the control of a set of shared dimmers Because a dimmer cannot resolve competing control signals the consoles and network must determine which of the competing Obsession consoles will take control of these dimmers Resolving conflicts between consoles competing for the control of shared dimmers falls to a communication protocol operated over an Ethernet network This competition may be for all available dimmers in the system or only for those dimmers that are defined as under the control of the communication protocol The competition between consoles for dimmer control is resolved at two stages in the operation of a console First when a console is booted up the operator must make a determination whether or not to take control of the shared dimmers Second when any console patches one or more shared dimmers all consoles operating at that time on the Ethe
170. e Park status The level at which the channel is parked If Multiuser is installed the User that parked the channel e Dimmers Lists the dimmers assigned to the channel as space permits Finding unused channels Press About Enter to display the About window for the first unused channel In Live after doing so use Next and Last to page through all unused channels 80 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Channel Usage display Select the Channel Usage display from the Setup Menu Chan Chan Chan The Channel Usage display shows you the number of times each channel is used in a cue group effect or submaster Customize the information that appears on the display by pressing the softkeys described on the following page Obsession Il User Manual 81 82 Channel Usage softkeys Chan Chan 29 E 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 S1 Select Range Shows a range of channels or cues Press S1 enter the cues or channels to show then press Enter S2 Cues Shows channels used in cues S3 Cue moves levels Shows the number of times the channel level rises and its highest level in the show S4 Groups Shows channels used in groups S5 Effects Shows channels used in effects 86 Subs Shows channels used in submasters S7 Used Unused Allows you to choose whether to show used or unused channels within the currently selected categories and ranges 88 Sort Allows you to s
171. e attributeS o o o ooo 158 Deleting a CUS ass ene E Sn ertet 159 Working with cues in Blind mode 160 Recording or modifying single cues 161 COPYING CUES ox sou BS eh p M Ie n EM 162 Cue Spreadsheet exei ene OE SRE Le 163 Moving CUES 34 wean Pee anne eos RS 166 Moving and copying ranges 167 Blind Cue Listo aa sea eee p pt PEN 168 Renumbering a cue occ 169 Labelling 68S aia BA aad Gay o RR s 170 AbOUt CUGAY fan nae a eda ede uw oq o NS nae 170 Chapter 11 Tracking Cue Only co 173 TRACKING MED e ia Big od 173 Tracking with ML fixtures llle 174 CU ON Ys iui eer e ec tok o racc ATO RD 174 Cus Ony Track KEY se cataratas 175 LIVE em ebrii Dep ede 175 is Ino ERES PEE E PRAEDA 176 Chapter 12 Multipart cues co 179 Record a multipart cue in Live o 180 Convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in Live 181 Set attributes for multipart CUBS 182 Move channels to another part of a multipart cue 182 Record a multipart cue in Blind 0 183 Convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in Blind 184 Obsession ll User Manual Xi Convert a multipart cue to a standard cue Delete a part from a multipart cue Chapter 13 Playing back eues co FadetS is pata e a od Pade a da Physical faders saiti uas eee E Mrrt al faders eet EUR Gee eel a Fader status display
172. e connector is at the left side near the back Go to the Obsession I Console Setup menu using one of the three techniques given under Go to the Obsession Il Console Setup menu page 358 Using the alphanumeric keyboard select option 6 in the Con sole Setup menu Press 1 Enter Enter on the alphanumeric keyboard This should change the setting back to Obsession ll console and restore console keyboard control Return to the Console Setup menu by pressing S8 Return on your console keyboard Obsession Il User Manual 361 Redundant tracking The Obsession II dual processor system DPS provides you with an on the job backup processor that steps in instantly and runs your show if the main processor ever fails This feature is known as redundant tracking or full tracking backup The two processors of an Obsession I DPS communicate with one another with the console and with other units using ETCNet the Ethernet based ETC network protocol The console is normally the one provided with an Obsession ll system but it can be an Obsession remote console too Like the Obsession I remote console the Obsession ll console does not contain its own hard drive and communicates with the processors on the network When you turn on a system configured to run in redundant tracking the show in the primary processor is loaded automatically into the secondary processor Both processors synchronize to receive show information including all
173. e from both console and RFU appear immediately on both the console monitor and the RFU LCD Warning Do not connect or disconnect the RFU when it is on Obsession Il User Manual 351 352 Obsession Off Line This innovative software package allows you to use your IBM PC or PC compatible personal computer to simulate the operation of Obsession ll It can create edit and save shows for Obsession Il or any Obsession model that runs Obsession ll software Obsession Off Line s menus operator prompts and help screens are identical to those of Obsession II Nearly all of Obsession II s features are available in Off Line using exactly the same keystroke sequences as in the console itself Program effects multipart cues and linked sequences in Obsession Off Line and play them back there too Work between shows copying cues submasters dimmer profiles and patch information from one show to another thereby eliminating unnecessary and time consuming reprogramming Print show information on your computer rather than from the console When you re ready to observe the results copy the show to a diskette and load it to the console If you re still developing the show or want to put it into a show library use your computer s hard drive for storage rather than multiple diskettes For more information about Obsession Off Line contact your local dealer or call ETC at 800 688 4116 You can download a free copy of Obsession Off Line and an associa
174. e in the patch display or press S6 Channel if in By Channel mode in the patch display For Profiles and Macros you may restrict the printout to a partial list with the Thru or keys Chapter 22 Print functions Printing ML functions Press Setup 6 Enter 3 Enter to go to the Print Moving Light Functions menu and select the number of the printout you want The table below shows what you get for each choice Personalities A list of personalities in the current show including complete information about each personality and each attribute in the personality The list also includes the frame table of any discrete attributes Personality A list of personalities in the current show List including each personality s label Fixture A list of fixtures in the current show Attribute including complete information about each Patch attribute s channel and dimmer patch Fixture Patch A list of fixtures in the current show including the label and the start channel and start DMX of each fixture Libraries A list of libraries in the current show including the label and the levels of all attributes in the library Library List A list of libraries in the current show including each library s label Attribute All the attributes in the show including labels Display List and categories Encoder and The current contents of the Encoder Setup Touchscreen and Touchscreen Setup displays Setup
175. e interpreted as percentages The column label and meaning of the data are controlled by the software installed in the first rack See your Sensor User Manual for details The display lists up to 18 dimmers at once with error messages if any interlaced Press S6 Select Dimmer Enter to select a specific dimmer Press S6 Enter to view the first dimmer with a reported error Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Dimmer rack status The Rack Status display provides information about specified racks including rack type starting address port information voltage frequency and ambient temperature Press Setup 1111 Enter 2 Enter to access the Rack Status display Press S7 Select Rack Enter to select a specific rack Next to select the next rack or Last to view the last rack Rack Status OK Sensor SR12 1 Disabled OK 116 Vac 116 Vac 115 Vac 60 Hz Rack Status e Rack type displays this rack s type Possible rack types include SR6 SR12 SR24 SR48 SP6 SP24 and SP48 followed by AF if it s an Advanced Features rack e Start address displays the rack s lowest dimmer number e Port A B Type indicates whether the dimmer is normal dashed entry or set to Dimmer Double e Status indicates the port s present status e Rack voltage displays the input voltage for each of the three phases A B and C e Rack frequency displays the input frequency in hertz Hz e Ambient temperature
176. e previous step on At the end of the chase all steps are on they all turn off to start the next pass In a negative effect all steps are on at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements off and leaves previous step elements off At the end of the chase all elements are off S6 Random Plays steps back in random order Random creates lightning flashing or strobe effects Random can t be combined with Alternate Reverse Bounce or Build Assign attributes to an effect Follow these steps to assign attributes to the effect you created in the previous example Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press S5 Attribute Displays attribute softkeys 2 Decide whether effect is positive or negative Press S1 Positive Negative to change if necessary 3 Selectadditionalattributes Selected patterns are displayed from the softkeys at the top of the effects display Note To remove an attribute select it again 242 Chapter 16 Effects Overall fade times Each effect has an overall upfade dwell and downfade time When you create an effect the times default to 5 Hold 5 upfade of five seconds dwell of hold downfade of five seconds Note Dwell is how long the effect runs between the initial upfade and the final downfade Hold assigns an infinite dwell meaning the effect runs until the associated fader button is pressed starting the downfade Note Upfade dwell and downfade times are applied
177. e those other softkeys Preview Attribute Block Library Speadsheet gt CS Fixture Cue List gt CL Rate Delete Cue Copy Cue Flexichannel gt FC Cue List CL Return Flexichannel FC Replace With All Channels Block Block Cue Show Channels Cue List gt CL Spreadsheet gt CS Current Channels Return Return View Channels Move Cue Delete Cue Rate Delete Cue Copy Cue Copy Cue Flexichannel gt FC Return Obsession Il User Manual 399 ML Live MS MS ML Live ML Live MS Attribute Library All Block l Library List Attribute List Copy Fixture Spreadsheet CS Update Clear Library Position Rate Beam Delete Cue Image ML Blind Copy Cue Return ML Blind MS Macro Wait Retunm___ Attribute All Library Block Copy Fixture Spreadsheet gt CS Cue List gt CLP Clear Library Position Rate Delete Cue Copy Cue 400 Return Return a See Cue Spreadsheet under Live Blind page 399 b See Cue List under Live Blind page 399 Sub Display Sub Sub List SL Appendix D Softkeys S1 Sub Type Sub Type Bump Status Bump Status Spreadsheet SS Spreadsheet SS Sub List SL Return Hold Rate Unload Sub Copy Sub Unload S
178. ect is loaded to a submaster it fades proportionally between zero and the effect s high level The slider acts as a master Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Load Sub Live LOAD SUB 2 Enter submaster number Live LOAD SUB 10 3 Press Group or Effect Live LOAD SUB 10 GROUP 4 Enter the group or effect Live LOAD SUB 10 GROUP 1 you wish to load 5 Press Enter Live LOAD SUB 10 GROUP 1 Note Due to limited memory you may not be able to load all your effects to submasters The actual number depends on effect size Chapter 15 Submasters Copying submasters You may copy a look from a submaster or use a submaster as a building block for a new submaster Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press S7 Copy Sub Sub COPY SUB 3 Enter the submaster to Sub COPY SUB 1 copy 4 Press At Sub COPY SUB 1 5 Enter the new submaster Sub COPY SUB 1 SUB 9 6 Press Enter Submaster Sub COPY SUB 1 SUB9 copy is complete Hint To save time you can copy a range of submasters in the Sub List or Spreadsheet display Clearing submasters You must be in Submaster display mode to clear the contents of individual submasters Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press S6 Unload sub Sub UNLOAD SUB 3 Enter submaster to clear Sub UNLOAD SUB 2 4 Press Enter Sub UNLOAD SUB 2 m Please confirm 5 Press Enter to delete the Sub UNLOAD SUB 2 m s
179. el display Levels of all channels in selected submaster O Sub Selected submaster and its characteristics O Command line O Softkeys 20 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Park Park lets you view parked channels and dimmers and work with them just as you would in Live In the Park display the command line defaults to park mode so you do not need to press Park except when using the command Unpark All Press Page and Page to move through park display lists 2 180 182 184 D Parked dimmers All parked dimmers and their levels O Parked channels All parked channels and their levels Command line O Softkeys Park colors Channel and dimmer numbers and levels display in Park mode in these colors EA Dimmer or channel level White Unselected dimmer or channel number Yellow Selected dimmer or channel number See Chapter 19 Park page 273 Obsession Il User Manual 21 Effect Effect lets you work on effects without affecting the look on stage In the Effect display the command line defaults to step selection O Memory left Memory remaining for storing effects Effects left Additional effects out of 100 you can create if memory allows Attributes Attributes applied to effect O Label Current effect s label if any Fade times Current effect s fade times O Random Rate Indicates if current effect has a random rate and what its range is
180. elects an attribute ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 Specifies library 2 Sets the selected attributes to the library levels ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 LIBRARY 2 m a Press Next or Last to set the selected fixtures to the levels in the library before or after the selected library If you want to set the selections to levels in the default Home library simply press Home in this step Obsession Il User Manual 141 Labeling a library To set or change a library s label follow this procedure Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press S2 Library 2 3 Press Label and enter your label such as Scene 7 on the keypad 4 Press Enter Clearing attributes from a library A attribute is cleared from a library when it no longer has any recorded levels in the library Action Command Line Specifies which library ML Live LIBRARY 2 Sets the library label as you specified ML Live LIBRARY 2 Scene 1 8 To clear all recorded levels of an attribute from a library follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 2 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 Press More Softkeys S4 Clear Library 2 Press Enter 142 Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Action Command Line Selects a fixture ML Live FIXTURE 2 Selects an attribute ML Live FIXTURE 2 ATTRIBUTE 4 Specifies library 2 to clear Clears the recorded levels for attribute 4 from library 2 ML Live FIXTURE 2 ATTRIBUTE
181. enable Multiuser Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects I O Configuration Configuration Enter menu 3 Press 1 I O Options Selects I O Options menu Enter 4 Press 3 Multiuser ENABLE MULTIUSER Enter 5 Press Enter to enable Multiuser is enabled Multiuser or press Clear to cancel 6 Turn your system off then Multiuser is activated back on Obsession Il User Manual 305 Configuring Multiuser The Multiuser Configuration screen displays all devices in your ETCNet network The first three columns list all network devices and their network addresses The device address is factory assigned and is on the back of the device itself A appears by the device number of an active RFU or TouchPad If a new device is added to the network the device and its address appear on the screen once you turn the device on Press S6 Sort to sort the list by User then by device type consoles Remote Interfaces RFUs TouchPads 1 Main Console 62 00 00 User 1 Control Booth 1 0 Devices DEVICE NUMBER 3 LABEL Backstage RFU a This section covers e Assigning devices to Users e Labeling network devices e Using Video Expand e RFU modes e Slider controls e Deleting devices 306 Chapter 24 Multiuser Assigning devices to Users To configure Multiuser assign each device in your system to a User Assign devices as indicated Lue s LITT Console EH Vide
182. erry G80 1800 and Keytronic 101 keyboards Although you may use keyboards from other manufacturers ETC does not guarantee compatibility 1 Set the selector switch to the AT position if applicable 2 Insert the keyboard cable into the connector labeled Keyboard on the Obsession Il front panel Console connector DIN 5 pin female Keyboard pinout 1 Clock 2 Data 3 Reset 4 Ground 5 5 Vdc Obsession II User Manual 371 Installing a printer Obsession ll supports parallel printers including some laser printers Among the printers supported are the IBM Proprinter Epson FX80 and Canon Bubblejet 1 Insert parallel printer cable into connector labeled Parallel Printer on the console s back panel 2 Insert opposite end of the printer cable into the printer 3 Turn printer power switch on and verify that printer is on line Console connector Printer connector DB25F Centronics D36 Pinout Signal Pinout 1 STRB 1 2 DO 2 3 D1 3 4 D2 4 5 D3 5 6 D4 6 7 D5 7 8 D6 8 9 D7 9 10 ACK 10 11 Busy 11 12 13 Not used 12 18 14 to 17 nc 13 to 15 17 19 to 36 18 to 25 Ground 16 372 Appendix A Installation and setup Remote Focus Unit RFU You may connect an RFU to any device on ETCNet including to a remote console to a processor to a Remote Interface unit or toa Remote Video Interface You may also connect multiple RFUs to network devices in your system without any interference between their command lines
183. ers and DIP switches 376 JUPES Lg wera ISO C Hm Bee ae os 376 DIP SWITCHES i ara DEDE D eSI 376 Remote Interface Node 6 2 0 0 eee 377 Instala Miss d Ce atte oA On tete ed 377 DIP switch settings Node board 378 Remote Video Interface RVI o 379 Installing th RVI zs rA eters eae e peca 379 Configuring the RVI for ETCNet 380 Installing RVI monitors lille 381 RVI Board venei ec ete Sag hale eoe uid 382 Installirig MIDI oo oca RR PPP 383 InstallingeSMPTE 4 caet ctim ttem echtes 383 Appendix B References sees 385 Installing an Obsession remote console 386 Main DIP switch settings Node Board 387 Designer s Remote Console oo o oooooo o 388 Installing a Designer s Remote Console 389 DRC Main DIP switch settings Node Board 390 Node board configuration oo ooooooooo 391 Node Board RevisioND oo oooooocooooco oo 391 Node Board RevisiONA oo ooooococoococoo oo 392 Appendix C Error messages sse 393 Programming errors 2 ee 393 ETC linkerrors s i ee rb hh OH Pide 396 GEItlGal GETOFS sco Ms ert eee bte t Rea 396 Secondary EOS ue eO Y des 396 Appendix D O A A A O 399 A TA REIDRIAUVE AISES 407 xvili Table of contents Chapter 1 Getting started This chapter introduces you to Obsession Il and the things you need to know to efficiently use this manual You will
184. es Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select channels and set Channel levels appear on the channel levels Command display 3 Press Record 1 Enter Records the selected channels as cue 1 Live RECORD CUE 1 a Press Next rather than the cue number to record as the next cue in normal sequence When you record the cue it appears in yellow on the Cue Spreadsheet At the same time channel levels change from red to colors based on the channels level movements from cue to cue For more information on channel level colors see Colors page 14 Recording a cue with a single fade time You may modify the fade time while recording a cue Fade times may be specified in the range 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes either as minutes and seconds or in a decimal format Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 2 Selects cue 2 Live RECORD CUE 2 4 Press Time 1 O Enters a fade time of ten seconds Live RECORD CUE 2 TIME 10 5 Press Enter Records cue 2 with a fade time of ten seconds Live RECORD CUE 2 TIME 10 Obsession Il User Manual 147 148 Recording a cue with split fade times You may record a cue with different upfade and downfade times with used as a separator in your entries Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 3 4 Press Time 1 O
185. es Previous page submasters LEDs flash slowly Note When you read a new show from a disk the Obsession ll system loads the same page that was loaded from the previous show Any submasters on stage when you read a new show remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Move sliders to home to load new submasters Submaster LEDs Each submaster slider has an LED below it The LED s color and state indicates the current state of that submaster Color State Meaning None Off Submaster not loaded in this page Green Solid Additive submaster loaded in this page Green Slow Blink Additive submaster loading into this page Loads when slider reaches home position s Green Fast Blink Additive submaster on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade Red Solid Inhibitive submaster loaded in this page Red Slow Blink Inhibitive submaster loading into this page Loads when slider reaches home position s Red Fast Blink Inhibitive submaster on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade Obsession Il User Manual 215 216 Submaster bump buttons Press and hold the bump button located below each submaster slider to hold the submaster contents on stage at its recorded level The look turns off as soon as you release the button If the submaster has a programmed fade press the bump button to start the fade A bump button is in one of three modes enabled disabled or solo If it s disabled pressing
186. es The effect is also assigned attributes and time values that apply to the effect overall Attributes control how the effect plays its steps All effects are either positive or negative When you initially create the effect it defaults to a positive chase Attributes In the following On means setting elements to their high level Off means setting them to their low level Alternate Reverse Bounce and Build can be combined with any other pattern except Random S1 Positive All elements start Off Each step turns its assigned elements On and the previous step s elements Off S1 Negative All elements start On Each step turns its assigned elements Off and the previous step s elements On S1 Positive Negative toggles back and forth between positive and negative Obsession Il User Manual 241 S2 Alternate If the effect is positive the first pass through the effect is positive the second pass is negative Subsequent passes alternate between positive and negative If the effect is negative the first pass through the effect is negative the second pass is positive Subsequent passes alternate between negative and positive S3 Reverse Steps run in reverse numerical order S4 Bounce Steps run first in forward then in reverse order Subsequent passes alternate between forward and reverse S5 Build All elements are off at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements on and leaves th
187. es and attributes without a category are not assigned Perform an encoder trackpad Auto Setup as follows Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 4 Encoder Setup Selects the Encoder Setup Enter display Encoder Setup 3 Press S6 Auto Setup 4 Press Enter Enter Performs an Auto Setup Encoder Setup AUTO SETUP B Please Confirm E Obsession Il User Manual 103 104 Touchscreen setup The Touchscreen Setup display lets you establish where attributes appear on the LCD touchscreen Attributes are arrayed over 23 labeled buttons As you work with attributes you can use the buttons to directly select the attribute you want Touchscreen Setup There are three pages of attribute buttons Each page has 23 attribute buttons and a Next button Press Next to switch to the next page of attribute buttons page 1 appears when Next is pressed in page 3 Touchscreen Auto Setup After you patch or repatch fixtures in the show you may create a default touchscreen button order for the Attribute Button display You can use this as is or as a starting point for your customizing Auto setup places the show s attributes into the same order as in the Attribute Display Setup starting in the first row and filling all six columns Perform a touchscreen Auto Setup as follows Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup
188. es by changing the acceleration of encoders and the trackpad Encoder acceleration is set as a group not for each encoder individually Accelerations range from 1 to 999 with 100 considered normal Larger values mean quicker changes and less precision Smaller values mean slower changes and greater precision Therefore you can multiply acceleration as much as 10 times normal or reduce it to as much as 1 100 of normal Adjust encoders and trackpad accelerations in the Encoder Setup display with the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 4 Encoder Setup Selects the Encoder Setup Enter display Encoder Setup 3 Press S4 Encoder Accel 4 Press 5 0 Enter Sets encoder acceleration to 50 Encoder Setup ENCODER ACCEL 50 8 5 Press S5 Track Pad Accel 6 Press 7 5 Enter Sets trackpad acceleration to 75 Encoder Setup TRACK PAD ACCEL 75 m Chapter 8 ML setup Auto Setup After you patch or repatch fixtures in the show you may have the Obsession ll system create a default encoder trackpad setup You can use Auto Setup as is or as a starting point for you to develop your own setup Auto Setup places all used attributes of the same category on the same page in the order beam color image and position Pan and tilt are always placed on the trackpad on every page but they are also placed in the position category Unused attribut
189. es not have fades times or profiles normally associated with cues Any group may also be used as a focus group When used that way the channels are stored with a reference to the group rather than with the actual levels in the group If the group is then recorded as a focus group to a cue group or submaster the channel levels are taken from the group during playback Channels may also be recorded directly to a focus group The group that results has zeros for every channel except those with levels set above zero This chapter includes the following sections e Channels and attributes in groups e Creating groups e Viewing groups on stage e Modifying groups e Labeling groups e Deleting groups e Copying groups e Using cues or submasters as groups e Using Group to modify cues groups or submasters e Group Spreadsheet e Group List Obsession Il User Manual 195 196 Channels and attributes in groups Groups may be created or modified by specifying either channels or fixture attributes but both may not be specified in the same command For instance if you want to add channel 1 and fixture 5 to a group make these modifications separately Determining what is recorded into a group The Group and Focus group commands may be used interchangeably when recording groups cues or submasters They differ significantly however in what is recorded Note carefully the following rules applied to records or updates when using the
190. ess Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 1 Personality Setup Enter 3 Press 8 4 Press Labell and type your label such as Variation 8 on the alphanumeric key board b Press Enter 6 Press S5 Pers Editor 7 Press 1 Enter Press S1 Attribute 6 Press Enter Repeat steps 7 9 for all other attributes Press 8 Press S7 Copy To S1 Hard Drive Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies personality 8 will be added Names the new personality Adds personality 8 to the list with the specified label Personality Setup PERSONALITY 8 LABEL Variation 8 8 Enters the Personality Editor display Selects channel order 1 Personality Setup CHAN 1 amp Selects attribute 6 Adds attribute 6 to the personality Personality Setup CHAN 1 ATTRIBUTE 6 m Selects the new personality Saves personality 8 to the hard drive Personality Setup PERSONALITY 8 COPY TO HARD DRIVE a Select a number that is not already assigned to a personality in your show and the console assigns the next highest number on the show s personality list b Obtain the attribute number from the Attribute List View the Attribute List by pressing More Softkeys S7 Attribute List Obsession Il User Manual 121 Editing a personality After creating a new personality or to edit an existing personality
191. essing Go to cue Out Enter Now re record group 1 with some but not all of the channels in fixture 1 set at 5096 Clear the stage by pressing Go to cue Out Enter Load and play back cue 1 Look again at the Live display Note that some of the levels in the cue are now set at full some at 5096 showing that the cue s link to the group caused the cue to change when the group changed This illustrates the power of linking a cue to a group by means of the Focus Group command Clear the stage by pressing Go to cue Out Enter Now re record group 1 without focus group references as explained under Removing all focus group links page 157 Load and play back cue 1 again Look again at the Live display Note now that all orange references to the group have been removed but the levels those channels had before the links were broken are retained This illustrates what happens when the focus group link is broken Obsession Il User Manual 197 Creating groups You may create a group either in Live or in ML Live modes If in Live the command line selection default is to channels If in ML Live the command line selection default is to fixtures Use the one that best suits your purposes Channels and fixtures may not both be specified in the same command For instance if you want to add channel 1 and fixture 5 to a group you need to make these modifications separately In all the examples for creating a group below you ma
192. etes specified fixture Fixture Patch DELETE 9 Obsession Il User Manual 93 Editing fixture attributes The Attribute Patch display lists attributes for a selected fixture and identifies features and assignments related to each attribute This display allows you to change the Independent setting It also provides the means to quickly show the Fixture List and Attribute List on the playback monitor Attribute Patch A Number assigned to attributes in a partic ular fixture Attribute Label associated with each fixture attribute Flip Specifies whether an attribute s output is reversed flipped with respect to the input control Currently unsupported as a distinct feature Independent Specifies whether an attribute is controlled by the Blackout Go to Cue Zero or Grandmaster commands Channel Specifies the channel to which the attribute is patched DMX 512 Address Specifies the DMX512 address to which the attribute is assigned 94 19 20 See Lists page 110 for additional instructions information about showing the Fixture and Attribute Lists You can flip an output by creating and applying a reverse linear profile 100 level at 0 6 fade and 0 level at 100 fade This will only work properly for 8 bit channels See Chapter 18 Profiles page 265 Chapter 7 Patching moving lights Changing an attribute s Independent status You
193. eu ee I edt SE ets 253 COPY ENEE urnas nios se ded te ren zu d aca a MA AL dp dle 253 The Effectibl St 3 ss BS es Foye mutet vies 254 Chapter 17 A A E O 255 Create Macros ca has cic EA ody iru Dee 255 Use LOA ccce ed ety 256 Use Macro display mode 000 00 257 Next macrosz zzv a ek Rae ohh A 257 M cro Walt ena net es d Anstatt tede A s 257 Hold for input esse a ett bs er eT ee 258 LINK macros ii ere EP TRE 259 Use submasters in macros 0 00 eee eee 260 Play Macross Cac tob A toe fa 261 Cancela marO seu oss vo PESE U pede es whe 261 Modify macros lisse 261 Clear TnacroS zelda A he Eee ay ol doh epe 262 COBY MACOS i Ai ns tne Arden eds M At pet de tete 262 Sample MACOS iii Lee Pelee haga Powe 263 Chapter 18 PROMOS utor Longa te OO ats a a 265 Listo POPES sa ha clara Se ech te Seo tear aig teed quta 266 Profle display cesser dees decks EE ee aed es 267 Profile edit controls ni ye ei e e ee 268 Edimoga proie Tes Ce er Ls 269 Creating anew profile ssi visse be eR 269 Gleapto Bnid oeae aaa AIME a od ee Bie AS 270 Clear Allis cil ap eese pm d 270 Fil Between syiir oO fees ue ceni tne sneer teed Me 9 EN 271 RHesetting a profiles ocu e eer ert A Pasa 272 Copying a profile o o oo ooooooooooo ooo o 272 Eabeling a profile cio RE eh EI eR Rees 272 XIV Table of contents Chapter 19 Pall ecco vate ater uut anon ier EL Ue 273 Parking dimmers and channels 00
194. evels but wish to revert to the last saved settings press S6 Reset Settings 5 Return to the Console Setup menu by pressing S8 Return Facepanel diagnostics The function of every control on the facepanel of your console can be directly verified in this display Return to the Console Setup menu by pressing Blackout Stop Back and Go simultaneously SW Version Information This display identifies all of the firmware storage devices and the processors that are in your Obsession ll system Also identified for each is the version number and some descriptive information Use this information when working with an ETC service agent to resolve problems that may occur in your system Appendix A Installation and setup Console Mode Option 3 Console Mode is preset at the factory and should read Obsession II Console THIS SETTING SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED If for any reason it does get changed to Submaster Console please follow the procedure below to change it back If still in the Console Mode screen 1 Connect the keyboard to the console The console connector is at the left side near the back On the alphanumeric keyboard press 1 Enter Enter This should change the setting back to Obsession Il console and restore console keyboard control Return to the Console Setup menu by pressing S8 Return on your console keyboard If starting from a powered down console 1 Connect the keyboard to the console The consol
195. ew macros Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 10 Macro Editing 3 Press S4 Copy Macro 4 Enter the number of the new macro Press At 6 Enter the macro to which you wish to copy g 7 Press Enter Macro copy is complete Chapter 17 Macros Action Command line Selects Macro display mode Macros COPY MACRO Macros COPY MACRO 5 Macros COPY MACRO 5 Macros COPY MACRO 5 9 Macros COPY MACRO 5 9 m Sample macros To create these macros go to Macro display mode Setup 1 0 Enter and enter the keystroke sequences as shown below Macro display mode This macro takes you directly to the Macro editing screen bypassing the setup screen Enter this keystroke sequence Macro 1 Enter Setup 1110 Enter Store Macro Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 10 E Channel check This two part macro automatically runs through each channel with a two second wait in between each channel Running macro 2 starts the channel check then runs macro 3 Enter this keystroke sequence Macro 2 Enter 1 At Full Enter S71 2 Enter M3 Macro line reads 1 9 FULL E MACRO WAIT 2 E M3 Then enter this keystroke sequence Macro 3 Enter Next S7 2 Enter M3 Macro line reads NEXT MACRO WAIT 2 E M3 Dimmer check This two part macro automatically runs through each dimmer with a two second wait in between each dimmer Running macro 4 starts the dimmer check then runs
196. ey at the end of your sequence to create the link This automatically ends and stores the macro This example creates a macro that sets all active channels to 50 percent fades them out then runs another macro Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 1 0 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press Macro 1 Enter Selects macro 1 to create MACRO1 3 Press Enter At 5 0 Sets all active channels to 50 Enter percent Macro line reads 8 508 4 Press Sneak Time 1 O Sneaks all active channels out in Enter ten seconds Macro line reads m 50m SNEAK TIME 10 5 Press M3 Stores macro Links macro to macro 3 Macro line reads m Y 50 E SNEAK TIME 10 8 M3 40 You may also link a macro to a cue See 152 Obsession Il User Manual 259 260 Use submasters in macros Submaster bump buttons can function in macros in three different ways as a normal bump button to always fade a submaster to full regardless of its current condition or to always fade a submaster out regardless of its current condition Use 5 Sub Bump On to fade the submaster up regardless of its current setting Use S6 Sub Bump Off to fade a submaster out regardless of its current setting This macro turns a submaster on for five seconds then turns it off Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 1 0 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press Macro 1 Enter Selects macro 1 to create
197. ffect List From the Effect display press S8 Effect List to enter the Effect List A list of recorded effects and their labels is displayed The most recently modified effect is highlighted The Effect List shows all recorded effects including their numbers and labels Use Page Page 1 Next and Last to move forward and backward within the list Note If you read effects from a different show with more channels in it than the current show effects that use channels above the current show s maximum channel count are displayed in red 254 Chapter 16 Effects Chapter 17 Macros A macro lets you store a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes Macros simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can program up to 2 000 macros depending on available memory Press the M1 through M7 to record or play back macros 1 through 7 Record or play back macros 8 through 2 000 by pressing M and entering the number of the macro This chapter includes the following sections e Creating macros e Playing macros e Modifying macros e Clearing macros e Copying macros e Sample macros Create macros You can create a macro in Macro display mode or you can use the Learn function to record a sequence of keystrokes as you actually enter them in any other mode You can include any key or button on the console except Store Macro in a macro You cannot enter slider settings or fader or ra
198. file The characteristics of the Profile Display are given below for profile 1 which obeys the IES Square Law Profile 1 IES Square Law Complete 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Intensity 0 5 15 22 28 33 37 41 44 48 52 55 59 63 67 72 77 82 88 94 FL ny 80 O 8 Intensity 7 4 20 rf 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Fade Completion Profile 12 e Si S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 Clear Clear To Fill Copy to Reset Setup All End Between Profile Profile Menu The profile s number and label Complete The percentage of fade completion in five percent increments called fade points The currently selected fade point is highlighted Intensity The level assigned to each fade point indicates that no level is assigned to that point Graph relating fade point intensity to the position of each fade point along the fade completion axis G Vertical bars on the graph present a profile of levels for the range of fade points Obsession Il User Manual 267 268 Profile edit controls Make selections and change levels in the Profile Display using console controls as follows Next ecce Selects next profile East
199. fixture s manufacturer The Home Levels are stored in a default Home Library Library O for fixtures that use this personality Use the home library to bring the fixture quickly to its default levels Discrete attributes have a frame table and you can edit the table by selecting the attribute and pressing S7 Frame Editor See Frame Tables page 112 for more infor mation about frame tables Obsession Il User Manual 119 120 Creating a personality If you don t have a personality that matches your fixture Obsession II allows you to create one The new personality must have a unique name label Also attributes in the personality must match the data type and DMX512 Order specified by the fixture s manufacturer Create a personality in the Obsession ll Personality Editor When adding attributes to the personality the Personality Editor defaults to an 8 bit data type non independent status and a DMX512 Order that matches the Channel Order you assign Assign a Channel Order so that you can view fixture channels the way you like them such as the intensity pan and tilt attributes always in the same order in Live and Blind displays You may change these assignments and others for each attribute by editing the personality after first creating and saving it Chapter 8 ML setup Follow the procedure below to create a personality add attributes to it and save the new personality to the Obsession ll hard drive Keystrokes 1 Pr
200. for all dimmers to be displayed you will see three dots following the last dimmer listed Obsession Il User Manual 9 10 Chapter 2 Take control Chapter 3 Monitor displays Obsession ll supports two color monitors called the Command and Playback displays Use Swap to exchange the monitor displays This chapter includes the following sections e Command display features e Examples of command displays e Flexichannel e Playback display Obsession Il User Manual 11 Command display features The Command display is the display on which you create and modify the various elements that make up a show Different Command display modes allow you to work on cues submasters groups effects and so forth The Displays keys choose the Command display mode Softkeys A line of white boxes known as softkeys runs across the bottom of the Command display as shown for the lower portion of the Live display below These correspond to the keys labeled S1 through S8 Their contents indicate the current function of the associated key If a softkey is blank that key has no function Live 1 EA NE S4 s5 S6 S se 4 and basal Dad More Softkeys When additional softkeys are available Obsession ll displays the l character above the S8 softkey Note the J above the Flexichannel softkey in the illustration of softkeys above Press More Softkeys to cycle through all softkeys available in a display Command line
201. for the macro to hold then press Enter Obsession Il User Manual 257 258 Hold for input You may create macros that stop at a given point and wait for you to enter instructions As you record the macro in Macro display mode when you reach the point at which you want the macro to hold press S8 Hold For Input Note This function does not work in Learn Macro mode When the macro runs it stops at the point where Hold for Input was entered and flashes Macro holding for input Enter the instructions needed then press Cont Macro to continue the macro Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 1 0 Enter 2 Press Macro 3 Enter 3 Press Setup 6 Enter Print Functions 4 Press 1 Enter Print Cues 5 Press S8 Hold for Input 6 Press Enter Live 7 Press Store Macro Chapter 17 Macros Action Command line Selects Macro editing mode Selects macro 3 to create Macros MACRO 3 B Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 6 Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 6 m 1 m Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 6 8 1 HOLD FOR INPUT Macro line reads SETUP DISPLAY 6 8 1 HOLD FOR INPUT BLIVE DISPLAY Use this macro in Live to print individual cues as you create them To use press M3 enter the cue then press Cont Macro Link macros Any macro may end with a link to another macro 9 When the first macro runs the second macro automatically follows Press the appropriate macro k
202. frame rate can be changed A SMPTE program may also have a Loop time The Loop time which you can set determines when the SMPTE program repeats This chapter includes the following sections e Enabling external SMPTE input e Enabling internal SMPTE input e Setting SMPTE frame rate e Creating SMPTE programs e Playing back the SMPTE program Obsession Il User Manual 331 332 Enabling the external SMPTE clock Before you can run SMPTE programs driven by an external SMPTE time source you must enable the SMPTE port Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter 3 Press 1 I O Options Enter Action Command line Selects Input Output Configuration menu Selects I O Options menu 4 Press 3 External SMPTE Enable SMPTE Clock Enter 5 Press Enter External SMPTE is enabled Enabling the internal SMPTE clock Before you can run SMPTE programs driven by the internal SMPTE clock you must enable it Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press More Softkeys S2 Enable Clock 4 Press S2 Disable Clock Chapter 27 SMPTE Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display Enables the internal SMPTE clock Internal Clock Enabled appears at the top of the display Disables the internal SMPTE clock Setting SMPTE frame rate The SMPTE frame rate may be set to 24 25 or 30 frames per second 30 frames per se
203. g Update to modify a cue Update is a selective record function that allows you to modify any cue s channel or fixture attribute levels in Live mode then re record the cue without recording the entire stage look Only levels set on the keypad or attribute level controls are recorded The update does not include levels set by submasters on stage Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Use the keypad to select Selects channels or attributes the channels or attributes Live CHAN 1 10 whose levels you want to modify 2 Modify levels as desired Sets modified levels then press Enter Live CHAN 1 gt 10 75 8 3 Press S4 Update 8 Updates and re records the Enter active cue Live UPDATE CUE8 m Obsession Il User Manual 157 158 Removing selective focus group links If your cue has focus group links in it and you don t want them there you can update the cue selectively to remove them The links in the cue are replaced by the focus group levels Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 and 3 3 Press S5 Position 4 Press Focus Group Enter 5 Press S4 Update 6 Press Focus Group Cue 3 Enter Action Command line Select a display Selects fixtures 1 and 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 Selects the position attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION Removes the links from the selected fixtures and attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION FOCUS GROUP Updates
204. g one or the other depending upon your needs Setting levels with the Group command When you set levels at the same levels that exist in a group and then record into a cue group or submaster those recorded levels are unaffected by later changes in the group See Determining what is recorded into a group page 196 to learn how levels are set in a group when using the Group command The procedure below is used to assign fixture attribute levels with a group Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects fixture 1 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 6 Selects attribute 6 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 6 4 Press At Group 3 Specifies group 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 6 GROUP 3 5 Press Enter Sets the attributes at the levels recorded in group 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 6 GROUP 3 E a You can also select the group on the touchscreen See Touchscreen page 99 for more information 132 Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Setting levels with the Focus Group command Using the Focus Group command rather than the Group command to set levels is especially valuable when setting the levels of fixture attributes First of all levels set that way continuously update to reflect later changes such as when you reposition a fixture that is used in many cues Second the Focus Group command ensures that you will record zeros everywhere except where non zero levels exist in
205. gs are invalid for your particular system or changes in the configuration of your system requires new settings Also certain console devices such as the touchscreen and LCD devices may require adjustment either for the first time or to readjust if operating conditions change or an operator wants something different Finally ETC provides a diagnostic screen for use when there is a question about the proper operation of facepanel components Go to the Obsession Il Console Setup menu Console setup procedures related entirely to the console not to the processing unit s Go to the Console Setup menu as follows 1 Start with the console power switched OFF 2 Disconnect the network cable from the rear panel of the con sole 3 Afterremoving the network cable switch console power ON You will first see startup messages on the monitor These will end and you will then see dots running across the bottom of the screen When the dots appear do one of the following to bring up the Console Setup menu e Press the Stop Back and Go keys simultaneously e Press the bump buttons of the first four submasters si multaneously e Attach an alphanumeric keyboard to the console The console connector is at the left side near the back On the alphanumeric keyboard press the Alt F1 F3 keys simultaneously Choose from these Console Setup menu options Ethernet setup Touchscreen calibration LCD Backlight Setup facepanel Diagnosti
206. gs for the submaster modify to Full 3 Enter channel numbers Sets new levels and set new levels To Live CHAN 7 85 m remove a channel press Out 4 Press Record then press Records submaster with new the bump button for the levels submaster you are Live RECORD SUB 7 8 modifying Removing all focus group links You may re record a submaster to remove all focus group links in it Remove those links with the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Goto ML Live Select a display 2 Press Record Focus ML Live RECORD FOCUS Group GROUP SUB 5 3 Press Sub 5 Selects sub 5 4 Press Enter Re records sub 5 without any focus group links ML Live UPDATE FOCUS GROUP SUB 5 E Chapter 15 Submasters Removing selective focus group links If your submaster has focus group links in it and you don t want them there you can update the submaster selectively to remove them The links in the submaster are replaced by the focus group levels The procedure for removing links from submasters is a little different from removing links from cues or groups Instead of using the Focus Group command you set the channels which have the link you want to break at group levels using the Group command This preserves the levels that come from the group while removing the link Discover the number of the group that from the Live or the ML Live displays Following is the procedure to use assuming that gr
207. h Normal State 1 Off Open On Closed 3 4 Off Open 6 Off Open On Closed 7 amp 8 Appendix A Installation and setup Function Normal operation Normal operation Normal operation Reserved DMX512 addressing Addresses DMX512 outputs 1 1 536 DMX512 addressing Addresses DMX512 outputs 1 537 3 072 Unused Remote Video Interface RVI Installing the RVI The Remote Video Interface provides ports for two monitors an alphanumeric keyboard and an RFU It also provides a serial port The illustrations below show the Remote Video Interface s front and back panels and indicate the connector for each accessory ETCNet Remote Video Interface back panel Electronic Theatre Controls Inc A CRT Displays Switched Outlets AC Input CRT 1 co CRT 2 co Pott 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Avo c9 ee erial Keyboard Cese use wees o 6 25A SB CON N O o Olfa NN LA a ETCNet Remote Video Interface front panel O ETCNet ERES interface ows O Power l RFU l SERI Off A onsole me mi 1 Plug the network cable into the appropriate connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet Obsession Il User Manual 379 380 Configuring the RVI for ETCNet The RVI must be configured for the type of cabling you are using in your ETCNet system and this is done with DIP swit
208. h Normal State Function 1 Off Open Factory use only normal operation 2 On Closed Factory use only normal operation 3 Off Open Factory use only normal operation 4 On Closed Remote Console enables Remote Console interface 5 through 8 Off Open Reserved normal operation Obsession Il User Manual 387 388 Designer s Remote Console The Designer s Remote Console DRC is a small control panel you can use from a remote location It contains all console controls except for submasters faders rate controls Grandmaster and Blackout button It also has connectors for two video monitors DMX512 outputs an RFU a printer and an alphanumeric keyboard Obsession isplays Group Sub Cue list list List System A b e e e Power Off eu Stop Back Go Appendix B References Live Blind Group Sub Effect Park Patch Setup Memo Mirror Expand Contr M1 M2 M3 M4 MS MB M7 M Last Page Swap Next Page GOTO si sz sa sa se 57 sa iad A a gl ypa qu Undo About Leam Help 4v Part Cue Record Thu Dim Store Cont Rem lao Mar SUD 1 8 din 10 Park Macro Label Group 405 Out 10 Sneak RES ue Only Profile Link Effect 1 2 Ful Level l a Follow Wait Time Clear 0 At Enter
209. hannel Use More Softkeys S6 Flash to alter the level of a selected channel between 15 percent and Full The channel flashes as long as the instruction remains on the command line You may only flash one channel at a time Example To flash channel 1 press More Softkeys S6 Flash 1 Enter Or 1 More Softkeys S6 Flash Enter As long as the Flash command remains on the command line use Next and Last to step through the channels 76 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Sneak channels Sneak lets you fade selected channels or fixture attributes in a specific time as follows e toalevel you choose e to the last levels at which they were set by faders or a submaster or e tonew levels recorded for the cue in Blind since the last time the cue was run in faders The following example shows how to sneak channels where the channel number the level and the time are all specified on the command line Note the footnotes for other options Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press 5 At 5 Selects channel 5 Sets level at 5096 Live CHAN 5 50 SNEAK 3 Press Sneak P Press Time 1 0 Selects 10 second Sneak time Press Enter Fades channel as specified Live CHAN 5 50 SNEAK TIME 10 m a f you do not select a sneak level the channel will sneak to the level determined in step 3 b Pressing Sneak as shown causes a sneak to the last level set by faders or a
210. hannel level attribute level in ML displays changes to one of the following Blue Level is higher than in the previous cue Green Level is lower than in the previous cue Magenta Level is unchanged tracking from the previous cue Yellow Level was set by a submaster White Level represents a blocked channel or is set by an effect If you select a channel attribute for ML displays but don t change its level it returns to the control of whatever set its level originally direct operator control fader or submaster when you release it Chapter 3 Monitor displays Command displays Live The Live display shows you the current levels of all active channels In the conventional Live display the command line defaults to channel selection a 3 14 15 21 45 46 47 48 49 50 9 70 71 72 73 74 75 7 98 99 00 EI Time Foll Link Prof Rate Bl Pk Label 1 5 Live CUE 1 O Tracking Cue Only Console operating mode O Page Channel page Use Go To Pagel Page or Page to switch pages Parked Dimmers and or Channels Indicates that dimmers and or channels are parked on stage O Flexichannel mode Current Flexichannel mode if enabled Channel display Shows in order from top to bottom channel number channel level and focus group reference O Cue Active cue and its characteristics Command li
211. he RFU 2 Onthe RFU keypad press and hold Thru and 3 Turn the RFU back on The RFU LCD displays the following RFU Number 01 Enter to cont Backlight Timeout min 00 sec 30 4 Onthe RFU keypad enter the RFU number Press 0 before single digit numbers 5 Press Enter the minutes of inactivity before the LCDs backlight turns off 6 Press Enter seconds Note Set the time to 00 00 to disable the backlight Times may go up to 99 99 7 Press Enter Updated information is stored and the RFU returns to normal function Obsession Il User Manual 309 310 Phantom mode In addition to User 1 and User 2 RFUs may be assigned to Phantom mode An RFU in Phantom mode may only run dimmer and channel checks and park or unpark dimmers and channels Levels set by RFUs in Phantom mode do not appear on the Live display nor are they recorded into cues groups or submasters If your RFU is a User 1 or User 2 device you may temporarily switch it into Phantom 3 mode from the RFU by turning the RFU off then pressing and holding Clear while you turn it back on If your RFU is in Phantom mode you may temporarily switch it into User 1 mode from the RFU by turning the RFU off then pressing and holding Clear while you turn it back on The RFU remains in User 1 until it is turned off or reset Note While the RFU is temporarily switched out of its assigned mode a yellow triangle marks its User i
212. he internal clock to start at Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Selects SMPTE Events display Enter 3 Press More Softkeys Sets the current SMPTE time S1 Set Time 1 5 0 0 to 15 seconds Enter To clear the clock and exit Run Mode follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press More Softkeys S3 Sets the clock to the First time Reset Events Enter and puts the console in Pause Mode Obsession Il User Manual 343 344 Chapter 27 SMPTE Chapter 20 Accessories This chapter includes instructions for working with the following Obsession ll accessories The Remote Focus Unit is available from ETC as an optional purchase e Alphanumeric keyboard e Remote Focus Unit RFU e Obsession Off Line e Show Translator For accessory installation instructions see Appendix A Installation and setup page 355 Obsession Il User Manual 345 Alphanumeric keyboard Plug the Obsession Il alphanumeric keyboard into the processor s labeled back panel connector as shown in the illustration below The keyboard is a standard PC AT compatible keyboard Keyboard connector Selecting keyboard mode The keyboard has three modes of use Alphanumeric mode Facepanel emulation mode and Remote Display Control mode Use Scroll Lock and Num Lock on the a
213. hed channel levels on a highest level basis The home position for an additive submaster s slider is zero Inhibitive submasters An inhibitive submaster contains channels whose output is held below a specified level An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it prevents channel outputs from exceeding a specified level The home position for an inhibitive submaster s slider is Full Change type When you change a submaster from one type to the other the change does not become effective until you move its slider to the home position for its old type then to the home position for its new type Changing type does not affect levels recorded in a submaster Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub Sub SUB 1 3 Press S1 Sub Type Sub SUB 1 ADDITIVE or Enter Sub SUB 1 INHIBITIVE amp 214 Chapter 15 Submasters Submaster pages There are 48 physical submasters and a page key that double the number of submasters that are available Obsession ll displays the message Submaster page 1 or Submaster page 2 in the upper right corner of the Playback display To switch the page press Sub Pagel enter 1 or 2 and press Enter When you load a new page any submasters set at a level above zero remain at their current settings until you move them to their home position The new submasters then load This prevents the stage from going black or changing levels when you switch pag
214. hile Conventional and ML displays are display modes e When you want to move between display types within a display mode press the destination key once For example to move from Live to Blind press Blind Or to move from ML Blind to ML Group press Group once e When you want to move between display modes for a given type press the destination key once For example to move from Group to ML Group press Group once Or to move from Live to ML Live press Live once e When you want to move both between types and modes you need to press the destination key twice For example to move from Live to ML Blind press Blind twice Or to move from ML Live to Group press Group twice Following are some additional Obsession ll features when working with fixtures and ML displays e In ML displays all fixtures are automatically selected unless you make one or more specific selections e When working with fixtures in any display the intensity attribute is automatically selected unless you make one or more specific attribute selections e A fixture selected in an ML display is placed on the attribute encoders with its fixture number highlighted in yellow The screen scrolls if necessary to display the fixture e lf you specify a range of fixtures in an ML display all are highlighted in yellow and the screen scrolls to display the fixture with the lowest number e Each selected fixture is highlighted in yellow in the Fixtu
215. hows read from diskette into a console that has fewer channels or dimmers than the console on which the show was created might suffer losses in the transfer 2 The channels and dimmers patched in the first that don t exist in the second will be ignored You may be able to increase the portability of a show to a smaller capacity console by using one or more of the following programming techniques 1 Patch in order using lower numbered channels and dimmers first 2 Assign more than one dimmer to some channels See Creating a custom patch page 55 3 Use Dimmer Doubling See Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling page 66 9 The system software must be compatible when transferring shows See Show Translator page 353 for details Obsession Il User Manual 283 284 Chapter 19 Diskette functions Chapter 21 Hard drive functions Obsession ll is equipped with an internal hard drive This lets you back up and retrieve your I O configuration and all or part of your shows The following options are described in this chapter e Drive management e View hard drive directory e Store a show and system settings e Reada show and system settings e Read a show e Read part of a show e Erase a show e Store I O configuration Drive management Obsession II s hard disk drive lets you save a large number of shows on the console The actual number depends on the size of the shows When you select hard drive options any fades in prog
216. igned to the controlling device Finding unused dimmers Press About Dimmer Enter to show the About Dimmer display for the first unused dimmer After doing so in Live use Next and Last to page through all unused dimmers If all dimmers are used this will take you to dimmer 1 64 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Dimmers and ETCLink If your system uses ETCLink to monitor dimmers through an ETC Sensor dimming system additional dimmer information can be obtained at the console Dimmer monitoring must be enabled for this information to be displayed in the About Dimmer display See Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring page 315 fibout Dimmer 1 FL Not Parked 0 1 0 0 Set e Rack Slot number The rack and slot in which this dimmer is located e Console dimmer level The dimmer output level the Obsession ll system is sending to the dimmer e Rack dimmer level The actual output level at which the dimmer is set e Dimmer level source The source of the control signal which set the dimmer s level Possible sources include DMX A DMX B Rack e Recorded lamp load The load at which the selected dimmer was recorded e Load at full The load on the dimmer when the level is at Full e Actual load The actual load currently on the dimmer e Dimmer error Current dimmer errors if any Obsession ll User Manual 65 Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling ETC s Dimmer Doubling technology can increase the controllab
217. iguration 0 ooo 291 Othierioptlors vies t s ede aulas Boe Me weal a 291 Chapter 22 Print functions 293 Print FUNCTIONS 3 iore ek Se ted ualle ae as 294 Printshow functions o as 294 Printing with flexichannel active o o o o 295 Printing setup functions 20 00 00 ce eee 296 Printing ML functions ieran eric erun hei e eee eee 297 Obsession ll User Manual XV Chapter 23 Clear functions oo 299 Clear FUNCTIONS MENU zii eoe REY RO IU Yn 300 HeSStSVSIO oot tem e DURS m ROV ANTA Ser s 302 Chapter 24 RA O tates 303 Multiuser display notes ooooococococooo 304 Enabling Multiuser lille 305 Configuring Multiuser lille 306 Assigning devices to Users 0 0 0 0 eee 307 Labeling network devices 0 308 Using Video Expand 2 222000005 308 REU Sins idee uiv heen beng a VR hara 309 Slider eontrolSs x dit ew ek Wee VS 311 Deleting devices 0 000 eee eee 313 Storing Multiuser configuration 0005 314 MIP OR fate S dee t x aan S RE Dee e ep HEP 314 Enable Disable Multiuser devices 314 Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Fatal d ooa TAA Gk At ren D 315 Gonfig ring E CLIK x mat oe eR hin 316 Enabling dimmer monitoring 205 316 Storing ETCLink configuration 2 0 0 0 0 000000 317 Working with dimmer loads 2 317 Record loadsa pre n ore a ela wok d eec
218. immer Mon itoring Enter 3 Press 4 Load Manage ment Enter 4 Press S7 Print Screen 5 Press Enter Action Command line Selects Dimmer Monitoring menu Selects Load Management display Load Management PRINT SCREEN Load management screen sent to printer Load Management PRINT SCREEN Obsession Il User Manual 321 322 Dimmer status The Dimmer Status display provides information about dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost or scale values Press Setup 1 1 Enter 3 Enter to enter the Dimmer Status display Dimmer Status Dimmer Status e Type shows the dimmer s amperage and whether the dimmer is high rise or standard Feedback indicates Advanced Features dimmer modules e Recorded load displays the load at which the selected dimmer was recorded e Firing mode indicates whether the dimmer is normal dashed entry set to Dimmer Double or switched e Output curve indicates the output curve assigned to the dimmer equals 00 e Rack number indicates the rack the dimmer is located in e Slot number indicates the rack slot the dimmer is in e Panic mode indicates whether the dimmer is assigned to a panic circuit indicates an unassigned dimmer e Boostlists values in volts reported for the dimmers For those racks reporting scale values the column heading changes to Scale and these data ar
219. in Blind mode Blind mode allows you to create preview or modify cues without affecting the current look on stage When you work with a cue in Blind or ML Blind changes are automatically recorded The difference is that Blind mode has conveniences for recording channels and ML Blind has conveniences for recording fixture attributes The following examples illustrate operations on cues in Blind mode but in each case analogous operations are available in ML Blind From Blind you can also display the Cue Spreadsheet and Cue List See Cue Spreadsheet page 163 and Blind Cue List page 168 160 Chapter 10 Cues Recording or modifying single cues In Blind mode select the cue to record or modify then make the desired changes You do not need to record the cue The cue is automatically recorded when you make the changes If it doesn t already exist entering a new cue number creates it Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Bling 2 Press Cue 1 3 Enter Selects cue 13 Blind CUE 13 E 3 Select desired channels or fixture attributes and set levels 4 Press Time 1 O Other Enters a fade time of ten cue attributes can also be seconds added here Blind CUE 13 TIME 10 5 Press Enter Records cue 13 with a fade time of ten seconds Blind CUE 13 E TIME 10 a If Obsession ll is in tracking mode press Cue Only Track after you set any level or give any instruction that affects levels before pressing
220. ince Live defaults to channels you may omit the second step of this procedure to unpark all channels Obsession Il User Manual 275 276 Parking groups cues and submasters Obsession Il lets you park the channels used in groups cues and submasters Parking a group cue or submaster parks all the channels at the level indicated in the park instruction not the recorded levels Parking a group Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Group 5 Selects group 5 Live GROUP 5 3 Press At 9 Selects the level at which to park the channels in the group Live GROUP 5 9 4 Press Park Enter Parks the channels in the group at the selected level Live GROUP 5 E 90 PARK a Tounpark the group s channels perform this procedure without this step Parking a cue or submaster To park the channels used in a cue or submaster follow these steps pressing either Cue or Sub respectively in step 2 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Group Cue 1 Selects cue 1 to park Live GROUP CUE 1 3 Press At 5 Selects the level at which to park the channels in cue Live GROUP CUE 1 5 4 Press Park Enter Parks the channels in the cue at the selected level Live GROUP CUE 1 50 PARK 8 a To unpark the cue or submaster s channels perform this procedure without this step Chapter 19 Park Chapter 19 Diskette functions Obsession ll is equipped with a 3 5 i
221. ing between fixtures llle Working with libraries llis Library Selection display o ooo o Recording alibrary 00 202000055 Updating alibrary leere Usinig a librarys eet pis Labeling a library llis Clearing attributes from a library Deleting a library 0000020200005 Chapter 10 FI MSRP Channels and attributes in cues oo o ooooo Working with cues in Live M0de Table of contents Recording CUES xs ose peewee ede T EN meh 147 Recording with default fade times 147 Recording a cue with a single fade time 147 Recording a cue with split fade times 148 Recording a cue without submasters 148 Recording a manual cue 0 00 eee 149 Recording with wait times 0 00005 149 Recording with Link and Follow 150 Using Link to link a macro to acue 152 Recording with non default output profiles 152 Recording with a modified fade rate 153 Recording a block CUB o oooooooooooo 154 Recording a parked cue 0 0 eee 155 Modifying a recorded cue live 156 Modifying channels or fixture attributes in a cue 156 Removing all focus group linkS 157 Using Update to modify a cue 157 Removing selective focus group links 158 Modifying cu
222. ing procedure Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press Record Focus Group 3 Press Group 5 Press Enter Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Action Command line Selects the Live mode Live GROUP 1 Live GROUP 1 FULL Alters look Live RECORD GROUP Live RECORD GROUP 1 Please confirm Live RECORD GROUP 1H Please confirm Action Command line Select a display ML Live RECORD FOCUS GROUP Selects group 5 ML Live RECORD FOCUS GROUP GROUP 5 Re records group 5 without any focus group links ML Live RECORD FOCUS GROUP GROUP 5 m Using Update to modify groups Update allows you to modify a group without recording the entire stage look Updating a group takes the channels or attributes on stage that are also in the group and modifies the group s levels to match the stage Update ignores channels or attributes on stage unless they are already part of the group or you specify new ones to add Using Update to change levels in a group The following procedure to update channels in a group does not add new channels only allows changes to the levels of existing channels in the group If updating fixture attributes you might find it more convenient to select ML Live in step 1 to reduce the keystrokes needed to select attributes in step 3 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Group enter the Puts group s current look on group number Press Full stage Ente
223. is empty that fader is inactive A cue shown in the gray box is pending and will run when Go is pressed A cue shown in the blue box is running Expand Expand shows up to 100 additional channels on the Playback display when channels are being displayed on the Command display such as for Live and Blind Also Expand shows up to 5 additional fixtures on the Playback display when fixtures are being displayed on the Command display such as for ML Live ML Blind or ML Group Expand works like a toggle switch between the normal Playback display and the expanded Command display Obsession ll User Manual 35 Cue List Cue List displays a list of recorded cues Cue List is the default Playback display mode It also provides information on cue characteristics including fade and wait times Follow Link Profile Rate Block Park and Label Q 9 9 9 00 RESTORE AFT D lt Grandmaster Blackout Current Grandmaster setting indicates when Blackout is active e Show info and time Name and comments assigned to show current time and SMPTE time if enabled Submaster page Indicates which page of submasters is active 36 Chapter 3 Monitor displays Cue characteristics O Cue number Number and parts of cue O Fade times Cue s upfade and downfade O Wait times Cue s wait time s 9 Follow Delay after this cue runs before the next cue runs automati cally Link Cue or macro linked to this cue
224. is enabled any channels set to a level in the previous cue are set to zero in the new cue See Enabling disabling Clear Channels in Cue Only page 51 Obsession Il User Manual 177 178 Chapter 11 Tracking Cue only Chapter 12 Multipart cues A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information Parts accept most standard cue attributes with the exception of Link Follow and Label Each part may contain any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part Upfade and downfade wait times in multipart cues allow you to program fades that do not start immediately when you play the multipart cue When you press Go to start a multipart cue some parts may start immediately and others may start up to 99 59 minutes later The total duration of a multipart cue is equal to the combined wait and fade times of the longest part This chapter includes the following sections e Recording a multipart cue in Live e Recording a multipart cue in Blind Obsession Il User Manual 179 180 Record a multipart cue in Live You may record or selectively record to cue parts in any cue not only the active cue If you record to a cue other than the active cue the cue sheet does not move to the recorded cue Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select channels and enter channel levels then press Enter For example 1 Thru 5 Full
225. isabling Clear Channels in Cue Only 51 Setting the date ies yei pd tp ee ear DEA 52 Setting the tinens uua tte sg als li 52 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights 53 One to one patch a eit cR TRE 54 Creating a custom patch 0 00000 ersi s 55 Patching by dimmer ooo 55 Patching by channel 2 2000055 56 Patching by dimmer label 0 000005 57 Proportional patching 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee 58 Unpatching individual diMMerS o 59 Labeling dimmers 000 000 cee eee 60 Assigning a profile to a dimmer 5 61 DIMMMENCHECK s ue cce Eee d et s tet PEE 62 Flash dimmmer llis 62 About Dirrilier iu epe p4AALISA e S 63 Finding unused dimmers ooo 64 Diramers and ETGLEInks codem e a Gute eds a 65 Table of contents Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling 66 Independent channels 0202000005 67 Setting Live channel levels in Patch 67 Chapter 6 Setting channel levels 0 0000 000000 69 Selecting channels Citado e RR RA 70 Selecting channels with Flexichannel active 70 Setting channel levels 0 0 00 00 002 71 Using groups to set channel levelS 73 Setting levels with the Group command 73 Setting levels with the Focus Group command 74 Using grouped channels to set channel levels 75 Blacko t 14 5 4 os eee 76 Flashich
226. isplay mode If modifying fixture attributes you might find it more convenient to select ML Group mode in step 1 to reduce the keystrokes needed to select attributes in step 5 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Group Selects the Group mode 2 Press S1 Select Group Group GROUP 3 Enter the group number Group GROUP 1 4 Press Enter Group GROUP 1 2 5 Select channels and set Creates look new levels are levels recorded into group automatically a You must use S1 Select Group to view or edit a group Pressing Group brings up another group s levels in the current group b You can use this procedure to create a new group in group mode If you enter a group number that doesn t exist a new group is created with that number Obsession Il User Manual 201 202 In Live mode Follow these steps to modify channels in a group in Live display mode If modifying fixture attributes you might find it more convenient to select ML Live mode in step 1 to reduce the keystrokes needed to select attributes in step 4 Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press Group and enter the group to modify 3 Press Full Enter 4 Select channels and set levels 5 Press Enter 6 Press Record Group 7 Enter the group you are modifying and press Enter 8 Press Enter Removing all focus group links You may re record a group to remove all focus group links in it Remove those links with the follow
227. ist A bietet tene Spreadsheet period eeee List neces A Next Dr Page right O Page Ai Last TES Page left Cuca Page Si Mirror SEES E Swap Aia Expand dr By Dim Chan Backspace Clear TES Help Chapter 28 Accessories Remote Focus Unit RFU The Remote Focus Unit RFU is a small portable control panel You can use an RFU with or without a remote monitor The RFU includes a two line LCD screen The top line of the display shows the current cue on the left and counts down wait or fade times on the right The second line is the command line Obsession o e Cuel Live o Goto M1 Rec Thru Dim Next Load Rem e Cue M2 Cue 7 8 9 Dim Last M3 Group 4 5 6 Out Park Stop Cue Back M4 Sub 1 2 3 Full Srl Go M Time Clear 0 At Enter Remote Focus Unit o Keypad The keys on the RFU keypad function exactly like their counterparts on the console e Time display Shows the wait or fade time for the running cue e Cue display Shows the currently running cue e Command line Shows current command entries from RFU or console e Power switch The power switch is on in the up position and off in the down position The console keypad and RFU operate simultaneously Changes mad
228. isted above but press 6 Read Cues Enter Enter in step 4 Obsession Il User Manual 281 Storing 1 0 configuration ETCLink dimmer monitoring MIDI SMPTE and Multiuser input output I O settings are stored as part of your l O configuration and are not saved with show or system settings information This configuration remains in your system s memory until it is replaced or you reset the system You may wish to back up your configuration information Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 2 Input Output Selects l O Configuration menu Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S5 Store Diskette Insert a formatted diskette in drive 4 Press Enter Enter Stores configuration Restoring configuration To restore the configuration information after a system reset follow the steps listed above In step 3 press S4 Load Diskette to load a stored configuration from a diskette Other options Press S1 Clear Config to clear the current configuration Press S6 Print Config to print out the current configuration on your printer Note Selecting Clear All from the Clear menu will not erase configuration information from system memory Note Selecting Reset System from the Setup menu or a deep clear 7 8 9 held down while turning system on does erase configuration information from system memory 282 Chapter 19 Diskette functions Transferring shows between consoles S
229. ive FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 50 TIME 10 amp a If you do not select an attribute either Attribute 1 or All Attributes are selected the latter if you do not set a level in step 4 b If you do not select a sneak level the attributes will sneak to levels determined in step 5 c Pressing Sneak as shown causes a sneak to the last level set by faders or a submaster If you press Sneak Cue however the attributes sneak to the levels in the current cue d If you skip this step the sneak occurs in the default sneak time See Setting default Sneak time page 49 25 Also see Sneak channels page 77 Obsession Il User Manual 135 136 Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Parking attributes Park places an attribute at a level that will not interfere with recording cues groups and submasters You can also use Park to force a cue to load into a specific fader or to stay parked in the first available fader A parked cue will not be bumped off its fader unless the new cue is also parked You may park attributes as you park ordinary channels or dimmers To park an attribute at a level follow this procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects fixture 1 ML Live FIXTURE 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 Selects attribute 4 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 4 Press At 6 Specifies a level on the keypad Press Park Enter Park attributes as specified ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBU
230. l Attribute DMX512 Start Remote Dimmer Independent Frame Table Fixture List Attribute Patch gt AT Attribute List Return Attribute Display Return Category C Position Category gt C Beam Image Move Attribute Color Auto Setup Attribute List Return Encoder Setup Return Touchscreen Setup Page Page Encoder Row Attribute Encoder Accel Column Attribute Track Pad Accel Auto Setup Auto Setup Attribute List Attribute List Return gt ML Setup Return gt ML Setup Obsession Il User Manual 405 406 Appendix D Softkeys Index cue list marken 154 Symbols cue list marker 154 gt cue list marker 37 A About Channel oec 79 SUS im c Sh cedri 170 193 Dimmer Lr e gt e e nt 63 Accelerations 102 Additive submasters 214 All ChanmnelS o o o o 31 All Man All Manual 193 Alphanumeric keyboard Alphanumeric mode 347 Facepanel mode 347 Installation 371 Remote display mode 350 Assigning devices in Multiuser 307 Attribute Display Auto setup 107 Change category 108 Label attribute 109 Move attribute 109 Attributes AUtOo Set p cover da 107 Category c src eR 106 Copy leve
231. l 87 Deleting a personality from your show Delete personalities from the show as follows Keystroke 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter 2 Select 1 Personality Setup Enter 3 Press S3 Show Enter 4 Press S6 Delete Pers 1 0 5 Press Enter Enter 88 14 Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Personality Setup SHOW Selects personality 10 to delete Deletes personality 10 Personality Setup DELETE PERS 10 8 14 You may not remove a personality that is in use in the show Terminate that use by repatching all fixtures that use the personality Chapter 7 Patching moving lights Patehing ML fixtures Go to the Fixture Patch display to add moving light fixtures to the show To patch a fixture choose a fixture number and assign a personality to it The fixture is placed on the fixture list Set the fixture s start channel and it s ready for use Fixture Patch Fix Num Any number from 1 to the maximum number of fixtures the Obsession Il system supports Label The fixture s label up to 10 characters long Personality The fixture s personality Fixtures can use any one of 20 available personalities Start Chan This is the first channel to which a fixture is patched and is defined by the user Patching is handled automatically by Obsession II ac
232. l Usage information you may restrict the printout to a partial list using the Thru or keys For example print only part of the recorded cues as follows 1 Select options 1 2 or 3 from the Print Show Functions menu 2 Enter a cue number 3 Press Part then enter the part number 4 Press Enter in response to Please Confirm if your previous entries are correct Chapter 22 Print functions Cues A list of cues in the current show including each cue s attributes and the levels of all channels in the cue Cue moves A list of move information for cues in the current show Information includes all channels that rise or fall in the cue all channels that are blocked or tracking and the levels for each of them Cue list Submasters A list of cues in the current show including each cue s attributes Full information about all submaster Submaster memories including upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels Also includes levels of all channels in the submaster Full information about all submasters list including upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels Groups A list of groups in the current show including each group s label and the levels of all channels in the group Group list A list of groups in the current show including each group s label Effects A list of effects in the current show including complete information abo
233. lay You can use the Obsession s touchscreen display to set attributes at library levels When fixtures and attributes are selected any library that contains levels for the selections is displayed by number and label on a touchscreen button Simply touch the button and the library levels are transferred to the selected attributes If there are more libraries than fit on the touchscreen buttons the display can be stepped to another screen with the Back or Next buttons at the bottom of the touchscreen display Recording a library You can use one fixture or a range of fixtures to record a library Levels will be recorded into the library for each distinct personality in the range If there are several fixtures with the same personality in the range only levels from the first fixture with that personality will be recorded into the library To record a library use the following procedure Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects a fixture ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 Selects an attribute ML Live FIXTURE1 ATTRIBUTE 4 4 Press Record S2 Specifies the library number Library 1 0 5 Press Enter Records to the library ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 RECORD LIBRARY 10 E a For all library operations the command defaults to all attributes when you don t specify particular attributes b Must be in the range 0 199 You may also press Home or a touchscreen library
234. lay Enter Press More Softkeys twice Press S2 Set First SMPTE First Time Press 1 O O O Enter Sets ten seconds as the start ing time for the SMPTE show Press S3 Set Last SMPTE Last Time Press 5 0 0 0 0 Enter Sets the SMPTE show to reset at the five minute mark To clear the First and Last times use Reset Loop Keystrokes Action Command line 1 2 Press Setupl Press 9 SMPTE Events Selects SMPTE Events display Enter Press More Softkeys twice Press S4 Reset Loop First time is set to zero and Enter Last time is set to 23 59 59 29 Obsession Il User Manual 337 338 Editing SMPTE programs Once you create a SMPTE program it s easy to make changes Deleting SMPTE events Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press More Softkeys twice Press S6 Delete Event 5 Press 5 Thru 6 Enter 6 Press Enter to delete the events or Undo to leave it unchanged Inserting SMPTE events Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events and press Enter 3 Press S2 Insert Event 4 Enter Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display SMPTE Delete Event Enters events 5 and 6 to delete SMPTE Delete Event 5 6 Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display The new event is inserted before this event SMPTE Insert Event 4 E A new event 4 is inserted all foll
235. le circuits of a 110 volt 60 Hz dimming system Dimmer Doubling converts the output of a single ETC Sensor into two separate signals Both signals then provide discrete levels for two ETC Source Four lights You must configure the console by setting the mode of the dimmer and the dimmer s port before the dimmer will function in Dimmer Doubling mode Each dimmer and port is set individually Before patching set the port mode with the procedure given under Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling page 370 When a dimmer is set to Dimmer Double it is functionally split into two dimmers that are distinguished by A or B for that dimmer number If a channel was patched to the dimmer before it was doubled the patching is assigned to both the A and the B parts thus keeping the number of controlled circuits the same rather than doubled To control the doubled parts of a dimmer independently you need to separately patch the A and B parts See Creating a custom patch page 55 for that procedure Set dimmers to Dimmer Double with the procedure below Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Patch 2 Enter the numbers of the Patch DIMMER 5 gt 9 dimmers to multiplex Press Dim first if you are in By channel mode Use Hl or Thru to select multiple dimmers 3 Press S7 Dimmer Patch DIMMER 5 gt 9 DIMMER Double DOUBLE 4 Press Enter Patch DIMMER 5 gt 9 DIMMER DOUBLE B Please confirm 5 Press Enter to confirm
236. lects I O Options menu 1 O Options ENTER ETCLINK ADDRESS 1 O Options ENTER ETCLINK ADDRESS 1 1 Please confirm Press Enter to confirm the New address is set new address press Clear to cancel a The first number you enter in step 5 is the system num ber This is almost always 1 The second number is the console number This is usually 1 but in large systems could be 2 Enabling dimmer monitoring Once the ETCLink address is set you can enable dimmer monitoring Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setupl Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter Press 1 I O Options Enter Press 2 Dimmer Moni toring Enter Press Enter to enable dimmer monitoring or press Clear to cancel 316 Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Action Command line Selects I O Configuration menu Selects I O Options menu ENABLE DIMMER MONITORING Dimmer Monitoring is enabled Storing ETCLink configuration Your ETCLink configuration remains in your system s memory until it is replaced or you reset the system You may back up configuration information on a diskette or the hard drive See pages 282 or 291 for instructions Working with dimmer loads Obsession II in conjunction with a Sensor AF dimming system lets you monitor individual dimmer loads This helps you identify burned out lamps incorrectly lamped fixtures and unplugged fixtures among other problems The first step in monitoring loads is to
237. levels You can also use the levels in cues and submasters to set channel levels For this purpose the channels in the cue or submaster are automatically treated by Obsession as if they are elements of a group If the selected channels are also present in the grouped cue or submaster the selected channels are set to the levels in the cue or submaster Follow the procedure below to use a cue to set selected channels Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 GotoLive 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Selects channels 1 through 5 Live CHAN 1 5 3 Press At Cue 2 Specifies cue 2 Live CHAN 1 5 9 GROUP CUE2 4 Press Enter Sets channels 1 through 5 to levels in cue 2 ML Live CHAN 1 5 GROUP CUE 2 m a Substitute Sub for Cue in this step to use the channels of a submaster rather than those of a cue to set attribute levels Obsession II User Manual 75 Blackout Press Blackout to reduce all Obsession ll system output to zero Press the button again to restore output Blackout affects parked channels and dimmers but not independent channels Disable Blackout in System Settings When you press Blackout Live levels appear in gray This lets you see that outputs are disabled but also lets you see what levels will be when outputs are re enabled 3 14 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 Flash c
238. levels Turn an encoder clockwise to increase the level and counterclockwise to decrease the level Above each encoder is an LCD display that can show two lines of text When a fixture is selected these displays light up for the attributes that are in the fixture s personality The name of the attribute is shown on the top line of the display and its current level is on the bottom line three dashes if multiple fixtures are selected Obsession ll provides six pages of encoder assignments more than enough to cover every attribute of every fixture s personality Attributes are initially assigned to encoders and pages but you can change the assignment for your convenience Trackpad The Obsession ll trackpad is a touch sensitive device that reads horizontal or vertical motion on the trackpad surface and sends that information to adjust the levels of two fixture attributes Typically the trackpad is used for the pan and tilt attributes but any two fixture attributes may be assigned to it Chapter 8 ML setup Touchscreen The touch sensitive LCD touchscreen always shows one of the following three displays e All the attributes patched in your show up to 64 e All the libraries in your show up to 199 e All the groups in your show up to 999 Normally the attribute display is showing If you press the Library key the display switches to the library display to enable you to make your selection from it Similarly if you pre
239. likely cause is a lamp failure Either replace the lamp or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load Data error on Rack DMX port A B Please check DMX cabling and connections between the console and the rack Rack ambient temperature is high at degrees F The temperature does not yet exceed acceptable operational limits but the rack should be checked Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is low at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is outside the acceptable operating range at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room immediately The phasing in Rack is not allowed The rack has been shut down Please check the input power service Rack DMX port A B is now operating correctly Rack phase A B C voltage has returned to acceptable levels Rack airflow has been restored Obsession ll User Manual 397 398 Appendix C Error messages Appendix D Softkeys Speadsheet CS Live Live MS Preview Attribute Block Cue Library Spreadsheet gt CS Fixture Update SMPTE List Rate Delete Cue SMPTE Run Flash Record Minus Sub Macro Wait gt Live Flexichannel gt FC Return a MS in this and other tables below refers to other softkeys available in the display Press More Softkeys to se
240. lity Setup PERSONALITY 4 LABEL yourlabel m Obsession Il User Manual 127 128 Chapter 8 ML setup Chapter 9 setting ML attribute levels This chapter explains how to set attribute levels for moving light fixtures For information on setting channel levels for conventional lights see Chapter 5 Setting channel levels This chapter contains the following sections e Which display to use when setting attribute levels e Using the keypad to set levels e Using encoders to set levels e Using groups to set levels e Using grouped channels to set levels e Using Sneak to fade between levels e Parking and unparking attributes e Copying levels between fixtures e Using libraries to set levels Obsession Il User Manual 129 130 Characteristics of ML displays You can set fixture attribute levels either in Conventional displays Live Blind or Group or in ML displays ML Live ML Blind and ML Group When working in ML displays the command line defaults to fixture selection so you need only press the fixture number If you want to select a fixture in Conventional displays press Channel Fixture and then the fixture number Conversely if you want to select a channel in ML displays press Channel Fixture and then the channel number The same Live Blind and Group display keys are used whether calling up Conventional or ML displays For the sake of this discussion we ll consider that Live Blind and Group are display types w
241. lltimeandpress Live SUB 4 TIME 6 3 11 2 6 Enter downfade time and Live SUB 4 TIME 6 3 6N press Enter a If you do not enter a dwell time for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell See next page for information about Manual dwell Note Once a timed submaster is running pressing the bump button changes the direction of the fade For example if half of the upfade is complete pressing the bump button starts the downfade from 50 percent Chapter 15 Submasters Hold If you record a submaster with a dwell time of Hold the submaster fades up when you press the bump button then holds until you press it again You may assign a Hold dwell only from Submaster display mode Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub Sub SUB 3 Enter submaster to which Sub SUB 5 to add fade times 4 Press Time Sub SUB 5 TIME 5 Press S5 Hold and Sub SUB 5 TIME HOLD press Enter Manual If you record a submaster with a manual dwell the upfade starts when you press and hold the bump button It runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full while you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release it Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub Live SUB 2 Enter submaster number Live SUB 6 3 Press Time Live SUB 6 TIME 4 Press Enter Live SUB 6 TIME Obsession Il User Manual 219 220 Adding a rate to a sub
242. lowers the output level to match the slider This allows the submaster to recreate the levels on the stage at the time of the update any time the submaster slider is returned to its setting at the time of the update Step time must be in seconds or tenths You may not set step times in hundredths of a second Too many cues parts to put on wheel The channel you have selected appears in more than 1 536 cues and parts The wheel can control a maximum of 1 536 elements Obsession ll User Manual 395 ETCLink errors ETCLink provides a wide variety of advisory messages including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These are either critical messages or secondary messages Obsession ll displays all messages in yellow on the Dimmer Status and About Dimmer screens Possible error messages follow Critical errors Dimmer has shut down due to an over temperature condition The dimmer will remain shut down until the condition is cleared at the dimmer rack Use About Dimmer to determine the rack number for the dimmer Rack DMX port A B failure Either there is a problem with the DMX cabling connections between the console and the rack or the rack has been configured incorrectly Rack A B C phase input main voltage is in error at V Rack input main frequency is out of spec at Hz Rack has shut down due to fan failure or other interruption of air flow Please check the rack looking f
243. lphanumeric keyboard to set its mode 2 For installation information see Installing the alohanumeric keyboard page 371 346 Chapter 28 Accessories Alphanumeric mode Use Alphanumeric mode Scroll Lock OFF Num Lock OFF to label various functions such as cues submasters profiles etc Names can consist of letters numbers or the symbols 9o amp 1 and as well as the comma and period See the labelling instructions in the chapters for each function You can also use Alphanumeric mode to enter memos Use memos to keep notes reminders or leave instructions for other console users Keystrokes Action 1 Press Memo 2 Type in notes and memos on the alphanumeric keyboard 3 Press any other display key Ends Memo mode Facepanel mode In Facepanel emulation mode Scroll Lock ON Num Lock OFF console keys are mapped to corresponding keystrokes on the alphanumeric keyboard but not the keypad This mapping lets you use the keyboard as a subsidiary facepanel Commands A full list of keyboard equivalents is given in alphabetic order below Most of the console commands may be generated by pressing one or more keys on the alphanumeric keyboard in a single operation A few however require a sequence of keystroke operations When more than one keystroke operation is required the separate keystrokes are shown separated in the list by the symbol ABOUT efte ater hie en von ca Me era S le
244. ls 138 Defaults o desert SS 122 Edi vedete soit enmt e 94 AAA NR 94 Introduction 84 labels zo rA nanc ra iA as 109 EISE ustedes eain E 111 STS ei eco rata 111 Orden os ore e ER pes 106 Park Unpark 137 P rkifig did nee pa 137 A ere AA 297 Selection defaults 196 Se tlevels kee ss 131 SME AK Ei cest ov ees 135 Touchscreen 99 Auto followW 150 Auto setup Attribute Display 107 Encoders amp Touchscreen 103 Touchscreen 104 B Back default time 49 Backlighting Encoders amp Touchscreen 360 A oe ce ERR 309 Backup Electrotle o teret 5 Looks with Sensor 325 Black0Ut oooooooooo oo 76 Enable disable 51 Blind Cue EISb esee rS 168 Cue Only Track 176 177 Display i HERI eS 16 Multipart cues 183 185 Range edit ovv 163 Record cue 05 161 Renumber cue 169 Replace with 164 Spreadsheet 163 Block Cue recording 154 Boost Values o o o oooooo 322 Bump buttons 216 By Channel rns safe ees 25 56 By Dimmer 24 55 By Label nnna naana eek as 26 57 C Category CHANGE sz uertice dto ds 108 Change level Cue Only Track key 176 Channel Assigning as independent 67 Blocked channel 154 AS OOM s oi eret iras 14 GIOUBSS
245. ly to the console the UTP Cable setting in the Ethernet Setup should be CROSSED 1 To change the Ethernet Setup press 1 Enter Enter to switch between NORMAL and CROSSED Reconnect the network cable to the console Press S8 Return to return to the Console Setup menu Touchscreen calibration Calibrate the touchscreen by following the instructions given in the monitor display or on the touchscreen itself 1 Save your calibration by pressing S5 Store Settings 2 Revert to the last saved calibration by pressing S6 Reset Set tings 3 Return to the Console Setup menu by pressing S8 Return Obsession Il User Manual 359 360 LCD backlight setup The LCD displays for the encoders and touchscreen are all illuminated by backlighting The backlighting of the left wing of encoders the right wing of encoders and the touchscreen can be separately adjusted The console display confirms these adjustments as you make them and the backlighting changes can be seen immediately 1 Rotate the lower encoder in each encoder wing to adjust the backlighting for that entire wing 2 Rotate the upper encoder of the left wing to adjust the back lighting for the touchscreen 3 When you are satisfied with your backlighting settings press S5 Store Settings to save them Once the settings are saved the backlighting returns to those levels when power is restored to the console 4 f you adjust backlighting l
246. mary processor s disk drive Press 4 Enter Enter Enter Wait until the Advisory Message clears and control is returned to the main menu Translating a showfile 1 7 Place the diskette containing the showfile into the primary processor s disk drive Press 2 Read directory on a diskette Enter Enter Enter to confirm you have the showfile you want to translate Press Enter to return to the main menu Press 3 Read all on diskette Enter Enter Enter to perform the translation Remove the source diskette from the processor Place the fresh formatted diskette in the primary processor s disk drive Press 1 Store show as a 4 x show on diskette Enter Enter Enter Remove diskette from disk drive and store both Returning to console operation 1 Zi Press Control F8 to exit the Show Translator At the CAETC gt prompt type OBS 354 Chapter 28 Accessories Appendix A Installation and setup This appendix includes instructions for installing Obsession ll and any optional accessories Chapter 4 System settings page 43 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights page 53 and Chapter 8 ML setup page 97 explain software settings that may need to be revised before you begin a new show Some components of the original Obsession system are compatible with the Obsession ll system and are discussed in Appendix B References page 385 This chapter includes the following installation proced
247. master Rate lets you record submasters that play back faster or slower than their recorded fade times This can be especially helpful when you are calculating complex timing information for effects loaded to a submaster Note If you adjust the rate on an effect submaster the adjustments affect step times and step In Dwell Out times Rate adjustments don t change the overall effect In Dwell Out time Fade rate is expressed as a percentage A submaster with a fade rate of 100 plays back at its recorded fade time A rate of 300 plays back three times faster A rate of 50 plays back half as fast Rate may be 0 999 percent Keystrokes 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub 3 Press 7 4 Press More Softkeys S5 Rate 5 Press 2 0 0 to enter a rate of 200 percent 6 Press Enter Action Command line Sub SUB Sub SUB 7 Sub SUB 7 RATE Sub SUB 7 RATE 200 Sub SUB 7 RATE 200 Press the bump button to start submaster upfade Chapter 15 Submasters Live control of a submaster s rate You may change the rate of a running submaster in Live This also works if the submaster is not running In either case the new rate is automatically recorded Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press Rate 3 Press Sub Bump Move Rate Wheel Action Command line Activates rate control Live RATE Selects submaster Live RATE SUB 8 m Sets and records fade rate If submaster is running fade
248. may assign default upfade and downfade times of 0 1 second to 99 59 minutes to cues or control fade times manually Default fade times are five seconds Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 7 Default Fade Time and press Enter 4 Enterthe time you wish to assign to both the upfade and downfade or for a different upfade and downfade enter upfade time press and enter downfade time Or to enter an upfade only enter upfade time and press Or to enter a downfade only press and enter down fade time Or for a manual fade don t enter anything 5 Press Enter to set the time s or press Clear to cancel the operation Chapter 4 System settings Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME 5 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME 3 6 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME 3 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME 6 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME System Settings ENTER DEFAULT FADE TIME 5 Setting default Back and Go To Cue times You may assign a default fade time to Go To Cue and Back When you use these functions to play back a cue its fade time overrides the fade time assigned
249. ments but usually the trackpad controls pan and tilt on each page Any attribute may be assigned to any encoder or trackpad axis and can be assigned more than once provided the assignments are on different pages on one page and can simultaneously be assigned to an encoder or trackpad axis on any other page Encoder Setup You may assign any attribute to any encoder or to either trackpad axis The same attribute can appear in more than one spot on one page or on multiple pages 100 Chapter 8 ML setup Make encoder and trackpad assignments as follows Keystrokes f 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 4 Encoder Setup Enter Press S1 Page 1 Use the arrow keys to select the encoder or trackpad axis to edit Press S7 Attribute List Press S3 Attribute 2 0 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Encoder Setup display Encoder Setup Selects page 1 to edit Encoder Setup PAGE 1 Encoder Setup PAGE 1 ENCODER 4 Brings up the Attribute List display to you can select the number of the attribute you would like to assign Specifies attribute 20 to assign to the selected control Assigns the attribute to the selected control Encoder Setup PAGE 1 ENCODER 4 ATTRIBUTE 20 8 Obsession Il User Manual 101 102 Accelerations The encoders and trackpad respond to your movements with selectable rates and sensitivities Change these respons
250. mers e Independent channels e Set Live channel levels Obsession Il User Manual 53 One to one patch The one to one patch assigns dimmer 1 to channel 1 dimmer 2 to channel 2 and so on If there are more dimmers than channels excess dimmers are automatically patched to channel zero SeeUnpatching individual dimmers page 59 for more information on channel zero Follow these steps to select a default one to one patch Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup to display the Setup menu 2 Press 5 Clear Functions Clear functions Enter 3 Press 9 Reset Patch 1 Clear functions RESET to 1 Enter PATCH Please confirm 4 Press Enter to confirm Sets patch to default one to your selection of one to one patch one default patch or press Clear to cancel 54 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Creating a custom patch You may create virtually any dimmer to channel configuration Multiple dimmers may be assigned to single channels but multiple channels may not be assigned to a single dimmer There are three patch display modes By Dimmer By Label and By Channel Press S1 or S2 to select the mode Patehing by dimmer In the By Dimmer patch display you may view labels assigned to dimmers Press S4 Suppress Labels to hide or reveal the labels The keypad defaults to dimmer selection Follow these steps to patch dimmers to a control channel Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Pre
251. mmand Example ML display Following is an ML Live display which differs from ML Blind or ML Group displays only in the softkeys and command line defaults In ML Live the command line defaults to fixture selection in ML Blind to cue selection in ML Group to group selection 10 5 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 1 gt 3 FOCUS GROUP 2 9 O Fixture Displays fixture number type and label O Focus Group references Shows that intensity pan and tilt attributes of fixture 1 are set to focus group 1 O Discrete fixture attribute Frame labels for discrete attributes of fixture 1 showing Open for F X and Closed for Strobes O Cue Active cue and its characteristics Command Line O Softkeys Obsession Il User Manual 19 Submaster Submaster allows you to modify and create submasters In the Submaster display the command line defaults to channel selection Q Blind subnaster page Paso o D a To2 44 5 B gt S 2 16 17 18 19 20 FL FL FL 12 41 42 43 44 4 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 7 FL FL FL FL FL 85 8 90 91 92 93 94 95 45 45 45 45 45 amp Sub Up Duell Down Rate Label 1 5 Hold 0 1 Sub SUB 11 6 D s4 s5 S6 S7 En Status sheet List Sub Sub 0 Page Channel page Use Go To Pagel Page or Page to switch pages O Submaster page Submaster page Use Sub Pagel to switch pages Flexichannel mode Current Flexichannel mode if enabled Channel lev
252. n the Used By column on the Multiuser Configuration screen Chapter 24 Multiuser Slider controls In a Multiuser system special rules apply to the Grandmaster submaster or fader sliders These rules take effect when User 1 and User 2 try to use the same slider simultaneously e Submasters f operators on User 1 and User 2 both move the same submaster slider channels output at the higher of the two levels e Playback faders f both Users move the same fader slider the system reads the slider set at the higher level In other words before you can take manual control of a fade both Users fader sliders must be at zero e Grandmaster f both Users move the Grandmaster channels output at the lower of the two levels The Slider Allocation screen lets you bypass these rules by assigning specific sliders to User 1 or User 2 Once assigned only that User s consoles may use the slider This lets you use a slider even if the other User has that slider at a conflicting setting Use the Slider Allocation screen shown below to assign the slider to your own User See next page for instructions on assigning sliders Slider fillocation GM Faders 1 Subs 1 13 25 37 Slider Allocation Obsession Il User Manual 311 312 Keystrokes Ji 2 Press Setup Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter Press 2 Multiuser Configuration Enter Press S7 Sliders Press the softkey for the slider s
253. nch high density diskette drive on the left end of the console s front panel or the front panel of an Obsession ll Processor Unit It lets you back up your shows The following options are described in this chapter e Diskette management e Format diskettes e Store a show and system settings on diskette e View show diskette directory e Read a show and system settings from diskette e Read patch or cues from diskette e Store I O configuration e Share shows with other Obsession models 8 See Chapter 21 Hard drive functions page 285 for information about storing shows on the Obsession ll system hard drive Obsession Il User Manual 277 278 Diskette management Obsession Il s disk drive lets you save one show per high density 3 5 inch diskette This allows you to work on more than one show at a time or to use more than 1 000 cues for your production by loading a second show into memory In any of the procedures below you may use either the console disk drive or processor disk drive In a tracking DPS system use the console or the active processor not the backup processor When you select diskette options any fades in progress stop Therefore if you need to load an additional show in the middle of a performance load it between cues when all channels are static Fader and submaster outputs are maintained as the new show loads Formatting a diskette Vvarning Formatting a diskette erases all recorded information
254. nd port 6 to 2 561 Obsession Il 750 only sets ports 1 and 2 If you prefer you may set different starting numbers for the DMX512 ports This would avoid having any rack receiving signals from two ports 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration Enter 3 Press 3 DMX Ports Enter 4 Press 1 DMX Port enter the port number and press En ter or use J to select a port 5 Press S3 Starting Number enter the desired number and press Enter twice to confirm your choice 6 Console indicates port starting number 4 You cannot set the ports starting DMX512 numbers if using Dimmer Doubling See Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling page 370 Obsession Il User Manual 369 370 Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling If your console is controlling an ETC Sensor dimming system that can operate in Dimmer Doubling mode each dimmer and the dimmer s DMX512 port must be individually configured to support that feature Use the procedure below to configure the port Use the procedure given under Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling page 66 to configure individual dimmers Warning Set the port mode using the procedure below BEFORE you create your patch Changing a port to or from Dimmer Doubler mode unpatches all conventional lights and moving light fixtures controlled by that port Moving light fixtures cannot be patched to a port assigned to Dimmer Double mode To set the port operating mode
255. ne Softkeys Obsession Il User Manual 15 Blind Blind lets you work on cues without affecting the look on stage In the conventional Blind display the command line defaults to channel cue selection Pee OG 11 12 13 14 15 46 47 48 49 50 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 81 82 83 84 85 8 91 92 94 95 96 97 98 99 00 Cue Time Wait Foll Link Prof Rate Bl Pk Label 3 5 Blind CUE 3 CHAN 1 gt 10 FOCUS GROUP 2 Tracking Cue Only Console operating mode O Page Channel page Use Go To Pagel Page or Page to switch pages Memory left Memory remaining for storing cues Large cues use more memory Cues left Additional cues out of 1 000 you can create as memory allows Flexichannel mode Current Flexichannel mode if enabled Channel display Shows in order from top to bottom channel number channel level and focus group reference Cue Active cue and its characteristics Command line O Softkeys Chapter 3 Monitor displays Group Group lets you work on groups without affecting the look on stage In the conventional Group display the command line defaults to channel selection 12 3234 5 6 7 8 2131415 16 17 18 45 45 45 45 45 75 75 75 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 56 57 58 59 60 81 82 Group Label 1 C C DOWN Group GROUP 1 u 7 0 Page Channel page Use Go To Pagel Page or Page to switch pages Memory left Memory remaining for storing gr
256. new channel at S4 Insert Channel 4 channel order 4 Of Or Press More Softkeys Specifies a channel will be S6 Delete Channel 6 deleted at channel order 6 6 Press Enter Inserts a new channel at channel order 4 Personality Editor INSERT CHANNEL 4 m 23 Both channels of a 16 bit attribute are deleted at once 24 You may use Thru to insert or delete a range of channels at once 124 Chapter 8 ML setup Moving a channel To move a channel in the channel order follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 1 Personality Setup Enter Type 9 and press Enter Press S5 Pers Editor Press More Softkeys S5 Move Channel 4 Press At 1 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Specifies personality 9 for editing Personality Setup PERSONALITY 9 amp Enters the Personality Editor display Specifies the channel at Channel Order 4 will be moved Specifies the channel will be moved to Channel Order 1 Moves the channel from location 4 to location 1 Personality Editor MOVE CHANNEL 4 18 Obsession Il User Manual 125 126 Deleting a personality You may delete a personality from a show from a diskette or from the hard drive but only if it is not being used for a fixture To delete a personality follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press
257. ngs 20 x 5 FORMAT System Settings 25 x 4 FORMAT 8 or System Settings 20 x 5 FORMAT Enabling disabling Level Wheel You may enable or disable the level wheel Use this to protect against changing levels by bumping the wheel Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 5 Level Wheel and press Enter 4 Press Enter to disable the wheel if enabled or to enable it if disabled or press Clear to cancel the operation Chapter 4 System settings Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings ENABLE LEVEL WHEEL Or System Settings DISABLE LEVEL WHEEL System Settings ENABLE LEVEL WHEEL or System Settings DISABLE LEVEL WHEEL 9 Setting default Level You may assign a value between zero and 100 to the Level key The default value is 100 percent Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setupl Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter Select 6 Default Level and press Enter Use the keypad to enter the value 0 100 to assign Press Enter to assign the value to Levell or press Clear to cancel the opera tion Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings ENTER DEFAULT LEVEL 0 100 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT LEVEL 0 100 75 System Settings ENTER DEFAULT LEVEL 0 100 75 8 Obsession Il User Manual 47 Setting default fade times You
258. nnel display even though it is not first in the fixture s DMX512 order Attributes are assigned from the list on the Attribute Display Setup screen If the attribute you want is not on the list go to the Attribute Display Setup screen and label a custom attribute to be the same as the desired attribute Each personality holds up to 64 attributes and each attribute can appear in the personality once Data Types DMX512 Order Home Level Frame Table There are three for Obsession II channels as follows 8 bit Uses one DMX512 channel Displays a level of 0 100 percent 16 bit Uses two DMX512 channels Displays levels between 0 and 65535 in the ML displays In conventional displays they appear as two consecutive channels displayed 0 100 percent Discrete 8 bit attributes that display labels describing the current level setting Typically used for things like gobo and color wheels Discrete attributes have a set number of values called frames and each frame has a value range that it shows up in The Frame Table stores this information This release of ML software does not support the Flip function Independent attributes do not go to zero when you press Blackout or enter Go To Cue Zero They are also not affected by the Grandmaster If you enter Go To Cue Out independent attributes go to zero The DMX512 Order is an ordering of attributes required by the fixture The DMX512 order is specified by the
259. nt cues Press Cue Only Track after you enter channel levels and before pressing Enter to avoid this 32 Note Channels with zero levels blocking channels are lost in this process A group cannot contain blocking channels Obsession Il User Manual 185 186 Chapter 12 Multipart cues Chapter 13 Playing back cues Faders Obsession II s eight physical faders and 118 virtual faders allow you to play back up to 126 cues simultaneously You may play back a cue automatically using the timing information programmed into it or you may take manual control This chapter contains the following sections e Faders e Fader status display e Loading and playing cues e Controlling fades manually e Sneak cue Obsession II has physical and virtual faders A physical fader allows you to control the fade manually and modify the fade rate A virtual fader only allows you to control the fade rate When you run a cue Obsession ll places it in the lowest numbered physical fader available It puts cues with split upfade and downfade times in the first available pair of faders If all eight physical faders are in use the oldest running cue transfers to a virtual fader and is replaced with the new cue Physical faders Obsession II has eight physical faders labeled F1 F8 A physical fader includes a slider and a fader key Status information for each physical fader appears at the bottom of the Playback display Virtual faders Obsession
260. numeric keyboard to LABEL Stage Manager enter the label 6 Press Enter I O Devices DEVICE NUMBER LABEL Stage Manager Using Video Expand Video Expand lets you display four different video screens instead of two With Video Expand a Remote Interface or Remote Video Interface provides two additional Channel screens Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects Input Output Configuration Enter Configuration menu 3 Press 2 Multiuser Selects Multiuser Configuration Configuration Enter display 4 Press S1 Device 1 O Devices DEVICE Number and enter the NUMBER Remote Interface 5 Press S3 Video Expand I O Devices DEVICE NUMBER VIDEO EXPAND 6 Press Enter For Device Type Video Expand replaces Remote Interface 1 O Devices DEVICE NUMBER 3 VIDEO EXPAND Chapter 24 Multiuser RFUs Remote Focus Units RFUs may be User 1 or User 2 devices Phantoms or disabled To assign an RFU to User 1 or User 2 see page 307 To disable an RFU see page 314 See next page for information about Phantom Setting the RFU number and backlight Each RFU in a Multiuser system should have a different number 1 through 16 This makes it possible to identify them on the Multiuser configuration screen Press to move from field to field on the RFU settings display Follow these steps to set the number of an RFU Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Turn off t
261. o Interface Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects I O Configuration Configuration Enter menu 3 Press 2 Multiuser Selects Multiuser Configuration Enter Configuration screen 4 Press S1 Device 1 O Devices DEVICE Number and enter the NUMBER number of the device from the list on the screen 5 Press S2 Used By and I O Devices DEVICE enter the User from the NUMBER USED BY USER 2 softkeys available S1 User 1 S2 User 2 S3 Phantom 1 S4 Phantom 2 S5 Phantom 3 6 Press Enter to confirm Device is assigned to User the assignment 1 O Devices DEVICE NUMBER USED BY USER 2 7 Press S6 Sort Enter Sorts the device list by User 1 O Devices SORT E Obsession Il User Manual 307 308 Labeling network devices You may label network devices up to 25 characters This will help you identify them on the Multiuser Configuration screen Hint If you have more than one of a particular type of device label each according to its use or location Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press 2 Input Output Selects Input Output Configuration Enter Configuration menu 3 Press 2 Multiuser Selects Multiuser Configuration Enter Configuration display 4 Press S1 Device 1 O Devices DEVICE Number and enter the NUMBER device to label 5 Press Label and use the I O Devices DEVICE NUMBER alpha
262. of the console processor or network device labeled RFU Switch the RFU power On Configure the RFU with the procedure given in a following section RFU console connector XLR 6 pin female RFU pi 1 oOo a A U N nout Data to RFU Data Data from RFU Data Common AC ground 12 Vdc fused 2A Appendix A Installation and setup Configuring an RFU After connecting the RFU to the network device assign it an identification number and multidrop setting with the following procedure 1 Turn off the RFU 2 Press and hold 4 Thru and on the RFU keypad 3 Turn the RFU back on The RFU LCD displays the following RFU ID 201 Multidrop no Enter to cont Backlight Timeout min 00 sec 30 4 Enter the RFU ID number 01 16 Press 5 Press 1 to enable multidrop RFU Press 0 to disable multi drop Press 4 7 6 Enter the minutes of inactivity before the backlight turns off Press 4 Enter seconds 7 Press Enter to return the RFU to normal function The con figuration will be stored You must precede single digit numbers with a 0 All RFUs connected to the same port must have multidrop enabled If any have multidrop disabled none will function properly Set the time to 00 00 to disable the backlight The maximum allowable time is 99 99 Obsession Il User Manual 375 Setting jumpers and DIP switches Jumpers A jumper is a small plastic connector
263. onnector used by each accessory The alphanumeric keyboard connector is on the front panel ETCNet Remote Interface back panel switched outlets manufactured by optional 1 0 DMX out parallel port 626A sb 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Electronic Theatre Controls Inc RFU 1512 513 1024 1025 1536 parall Middleton WI USA ox LA oe ee Ss Y WIN IN Zn 9l Q O E 6 26Asb 120VAC 50 60 Hz ETCNet Gru m E ps E CRT2 ts dA tp gt To activate the Remote Interface adjust the settings of a number of jumpers on the Remote Interface s main circuit board 1 Remove the screws that secure the top panel Raise the top panel to expose the internal circuitry 3 Setthe DIP switches as explained on the next page Connect jumpers as explained under Node board configuration page 391 4 Close the facepanel and replace the screws Obsession Il User Manual 377 378 DIP switch settings Node hoard A set of DIP switches are located inside the Remote Interface on the corner of the circuit board nearest the power switch Open the Remote Interface find the switches and change the setting if the Interface addresses DMX512 outputs higher than 1 536 Switches are either On Closed or Off Open The Remote Interface does not use DIP switches 7 or 8 DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the Remote Interface will not start Switc
264. ons tions Enter menu 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Clear Functions RESET 1 to 1 Enter PATCH Please confirm 4 Press Enter Clear Functions RESET PATCH Complete E 300 Chapter 23 Clear functions Following are the clear function options Show Erases all information in a show from console memory This does not include patch or system configuration information Cues Erases all cue information Submasters Erases all submaster information Groups Erases all group information Effects Erases all effect information Profiles Resets all profile information to factory default Macros Erases all macro information SMPTE Erases all SMPTE information Events Reset Patch 1 to 1 Resets all channels to the default 1 to 1 patch See Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights page 53 for more information about this default patch Patch Assigns all shared dimmers to channel zero Fixtures Unpatches all fixtures Libraries Removes all libraries from the show Personalities Removes all personalities from the show and unpatches all fixtures Clear All Erases all show and system setting informa tion but does not affect the I O configuration information Obsession Il User Manual 301 302 Reset System Use Reset System to erase all show information from the console reset your patch to 1 to 1 and reset all configuration information to factory defaults If you do not
265. or dirty air filters blocked air passages or fan failure ETCLink has failed Please check cabling and connections If the problem persists please call a qualified service technician Rack processor error Secondary Errors Dimmer has a load but the recorded load is zero Because the recorded load is zero the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine whether the dimmer has a load error The load on dimmer has changed Because the dimmer is not at a output level high enough to determine its level the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine the size of the load To correct the problem use Check Loads to determine the size of the load change 396 Appendix C Error messages The load on dimmer has changed from W to W A decreased load indicates lamp failure An increased load indicates that a lamp has been added since the last Record Load Correct the problem or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load DC output has been detected on dimmer If this condition persists it may harm the connected load Please check the connected load An SCR has failed On in dimmer The dimmer should be replaced An SCR has failed Off in dimmer The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed on The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed off Either the circuit breaker has tripped or the dimmer needs to be replaced Dimmer s load has failed The most
266. or each event In the SMPTE Events display Follow these steps to create a SMPTE program from the SMPTE Events display Keystrokes 1 10 11 12 Record the cues submasters and macros to include in the program Press Setupl Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter Press 1 Select Event 1 Enter Press Time 1 0 0 Enter Press Cue 1 Enter Press S7 Rate 1 2 5 Enter Press Label and use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter a label Press Enter Press S1 Select Event 2 Enter Press S3 Bump 1 Enter Press Time 2 0 01 Create event 3 and enter a time of three seconds Press Macro 1 Enter Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display SMPTE Creates and selects event 1 SMPTE Event 18 Sets the SMPTE Time to one second SMPTE Event 1 E Time 00 00 01 00 Enters cue 1 into the event SMPTE Event 1 E Cue 1 8 Enters a rate of 125 percent of the recorded fade rate SMPTE Event 1 E Rate 125 m Labels event 1 Tells submaster 1 to bump Obsession Il User Manual 335 336 In Learn mode SMPTE Learn mode lets you record macro keys submaster bump buttons and Go commands into SMPTE events as you press them Learn mode lets you record a SMPTE program live without concerning yourself with SMPTE time Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press More Softkeys 4 Press S7 Learn
267. orded submaster without recording the entire stage look Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Setsubmaster slider to 10 Puts submaster s current look on stage 3 Select and set desired Selects channels and sets channel levels to add to levels the submaster 4 Enter the channels to add Live CHAN 5 gt 9 Press S4 Update Live CHAN 5 gt 9 UPDATE 6 Press Sub enter the sub Live CHAN 5 gt 9 UPDATE master to update and SUB 8 press Enter Or Press the submaster s bump button 228 3 amp You cannot add channels to a range of submasters Chapter 15 Submasters Creating inhibitive submasters Inhibitive submasters let you limit the intensity level for a group of channels When an inhibitive submaster is set at 10 100 percent channel output is not inhibited As you pull the slider down channel outputs are limited to the slider s level setting An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls all channels If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster its level appears as a yellow zero A red bump button LED indicates an inhibitive submaster Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub 2 Press Sub and enter the Selects submaster to change submaster to make inhibi Sub SUB 9 tive Press S1 Sub Type Sub SUB 9 INHIBITIVE 4 Press Enter The LED Channel levels change to IN and flashes green the submaster num
268. ort the channel list by channel number or by frequency of use ascending or descending Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Chapter Patching moving lights This chapter explains how to patch moving lights using fixture personalities For convenience in this manual we often use ML to refer to moving lights such as ML fixtures or the ML display To learn about patching conventional lights see Chapter 4 Patching conventional lights The following items are covered in this chapter e ML terms e Incorporating fixture personalities into the show e Patching ML fixtures Obsession Il User Manual 83 84 ML terms Before you use the software you should learn the meaning of a few new Obsession ll terms that relate to moving lights These terms are explained below Fixtures Fixtures are multi attribute DMX512 devices Typically these are moving lights but they could also be color scrollers relays smoke machines or any other DMX512 devices Attributes Each type of fixture has a set of attributes that you use to control the device To illustrate this let s look at a standard ellipsoidal spotlight This light has only one thing you can control namely how bright it is You control the spotlight s brightness or intensity by adjusting the level of a DMX512 channel that is assigned to the spotlight Its intensity is its only attribute A moving light by contrast has multiple attributes A very basic one might have only three
269. ould occur if you take control of dimmers when booting up the console or subsequently by creating a patch In either case all consoles operating in the network including yours are notified immediately that your console has patched taken control of shared dimmers If those dimmers you patch are already patched elsewhere on the network they are immediately assigned to channel zero in those other consoles Similarly while you are operating on the Ethernet network and another console takes control of shared dimmers you patched that console will notify you and other consoles immediately and remove those dimmers from your patch Such notification is made with a Dimmer Taken advisory superimposed on your existing console display This advisory is shown below followed by an explanation of its contents Dimmer Taken 192 168 3 11 80 gt 86 88 gt 95 THE PATCH HAS BEEN MODIFIED System Name of the Ethernet system Address Address of the console that generated the Dimmer Taken advisory Label Name of the console that generated the Dimmer Taken advisory The Dimmer Taken advisory lists the dimmers that were taken by another console The dimmers taken are listed individually or in a range Entries in the list are separated by a plus sign If in a range the first and last number in the range is listed with a forward marker gt in between If the list is too long
270. oup 1 caused the links in the fixtures and attributes that you want to remove Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Goto ML Live Select a display 2 Press 1 and 3 Selects fixtures 1 and3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 3 Press S4 Position Selects the position attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION 4 Press At Groupl 1 Sets the levels of the selections Enter at group 1 but without a link to group 1 ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION GROUP 18 5 Press Record then press Re records the submaster the bump button for the ML Live SUB2 submaster you are re recording a You don t need to specify fixtures but if you don t all fixtures are selected b You don t need to specify attributes but if you don t all attributes for the selected fixtures are selected Obsession Il User Manual 225 226 Using Update to modify submasters Update lets you modify an individual submaster s channel or fixture attribute levels live then re record the submaster without including the entire stage look You may also update a range of submasters or update all active submasters at once The following rules govern the updating of submasters Update only adds currently selected channels or fixture attributes to the individual submaster The update does not include levels set by submasters on stage When you use Update to modify a submaster control of stage levels reverts from the keypad to the modified submaste
271. oups Large groups use more memory Groups left Additional groups out of 999 you can create if memory allows O Flexichannel mode Current Flexichannel mode if enabled O Channel level display Level of all channels recorded in selected group O Group Label of selected group Command line O Softkeys Obsession Il User Manual 17 18 ML Live ML Blind and ML Group These three ML displays are especially convenient when working with moving lights In each the patched fixtures may be displayed in tabular format with the attributes of the displayed fixtures heading the rows Assigned levels or focus group references are contained in the rows for each fixture Levels for 8 bit channels display as percentages levels for 16 bit channels display as the digital value 0 65535 and discrete channels display frame labels To show a ML display press the corresponding key for the conventional channel display The key behaves as a toggle between that display and the corresponding ML display For example if you press Live and do not see the ML Live display press it again If already in an ML display in either Live or Blind pressing the other of these will take you to the corresponding ML display not back to the conventional channel display Selecting fixtures and attributes Fixtures are numbered from 1 to 500 If you are entering multiple fixtures use Thru or the softkey All Attributes are numbered from 1 to
272. our sort method 290 Chapter 21 Hard drive functions Storing 1 0 configuration ETCLink dimmer monitoring MIDI SMPTE and Multiuser input output I O settings are stored as part of your l O configuration and are not saved with show or system settings information This configuration remains in your system s memory until it is replaced or you reset the system You may back up your configuration information onto the hard drive Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Select 2 Input Output Selects O Configuration menu Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S3 Store Config 4 Press Enter Enter Restoring configuration To restore the configuration information after a system reset follow the steps listed above In step 3 press S2 Load Config to load a stored configuration Other options Press S1 Clear Config to clear the current configuration Press S6 Print Config to send the current configuration to your printer Note Selecting Clear AII from the Clear menu will not erase configuration information from system memory Note Selecting Reset System from the Setup menu or a deep clear 71 8 9 held down while turning system on does erase configuration information from system memory Obsession Il User Manual 291 292 Chapter 21 Hard drive functions Chapter 22 Print functions Obsession ll supports parallel printers including some laser printers See nstalling a
273. ource diskette or hard drive as well as those copied to the show You can edit a personality in the show The figure below shows personalities displayed from the hard drive Hard Drive Personality Setup 86 Chapter 7 Patching moving lights Copying personalities Personalities are stored either on diskette or on your Obsession Il system s hard drive In order to use a personality you must first copy it to the show Once in the show you may use the personality as is or edit it if you wish as described in Editing a personality page 122 More than one personality may be copied to the show at once but a show may not have more than 20 personalities You may not have more than one personality with the same name in the show or on the hard drive Copy a personality to the show as follows Keystroke 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 1 Personality Setup Enter Press 1 Hard Drive Or Press S2 Diskette Press Enter Press 6 S7 Copy To S3 Show Press Enter Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Personality Setup display Personality Setup Read from hard drive OF Read from diskette Displays personalities on the hard drive or diskette Personality Setup HARD DRIVE E Specifies personality 6 to be copied to the show Copies specified personalities to the show Personality Setup PERSONALITY 6 COPY TO SHOW m Obsession Il User Manua
274. out cue Action Command line Records Cue 12 Live RECORD CUE 12 LABEL Enters cue label Live RECORD CUE 12 LABEL The Big Story Records Cue 12 with label Toad exits Live RECORD CUE 12 LABEL The Big Story The About key provides you with cue attribute and status information You may use Next or Last to page through cues Keystrokes 1 Press About Press Cuel 3 Enter the number of the desired cue or default to the current cue 4 Press Enter 5 Press Clear 170 Chapter 10 Cues Action Command line ABOUT ABOUT CUE ABOUT CUE 6 About Cue screen is displayed ABOUT CUE 6 About Cue screen is cleared About Cue 1 Pending in faders 1 2 Toad Hall 10 3 Q5 Status The current status of the cue Not recorded Not active Pending in fader Running in fader Complete Time Left The remaining time until cue completion if it is running in a fader Current rate The rate at which the cue is running if not 100 percent Label The cue s label Number of moves The number of channel level changes Time The recorded length of the cue from start of fade to completion May be split Wait The time between when you press Go and when the fade begins Wait time may be split Link The cue to which this cue is linked Follow The time before the following cue runs automatically Profile The profile s assigned to the cue Rate The cue s recorded rate if not 100 per
275. output For example Press 1 Thru 5 Full Rem Dim Enter Use the Grandmaster slider to control all live outputs proportionally It does not affect parked channels parked dimmers or inde pendent channels Disable the Grandmaster in System Settings You can use Rem Dim without setting a level For example enter 1 Thru 5 Rem Dim Enter to set the output of all channels except 1 through 5 to zero and leave them at their current levels Chapter 6 Setting channel levels Using groups to set channel levels There are two ways you can use groups to set levels either with the Group command or the Focus Group command Following is an explanation of the procedures to use for each and reasons for using one or the other depending upon your needs Setting levels with the Group command When you set levels at the same levels that exist in a group and then record into a cue group or submaster those recorded levels are unaffected by later changes in the group See Determining what is recorded into a group page 196 to learn how levels are set in a group when using the Group command The procedure below is used to assign levels to channels with a group Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Live 2 Press 1 Thru 9 Selects channels 1 through 9 Live CHAN 1 gt 9 3 Press At Group 4 Specifies the group from where the levels are derived Live CHAN 1 9 9 GROUP 4 4 Press Enter Sets
276. owing events are renumbered Chapter 27 SMPTE Sorting Events New events are added to the end of the event list Events are played back based on the recorded time not the event number Use the Sort function to renumber events in the order of their times Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter 3 Press More Softkeys S6 Sort Copying SMPTE events Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display Reorders the SMPTE event list based on each event s SMPTE Time Lets you copy the selected event or range of events from one time slot and insert the copy in another Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setupl Press 9 SMPTE Events Enter Press More Softkeys twice Press S7 Copy Event Press 1 Thru 5 Press Time 2 5 O O Press Enter Action Command line Selects SMPTE Events display SMPTE Copy Event Selects events 1 through 5 to copy SMPTE Copy Event 1 gt 5 Time 00 00 25 00 Copies event 1 to a new event starting at 25 seconds events copied from 2 through 5 maintain the same time spacing as the originals a Press S5 Move Event in this step To move a block of SMPTE events from one time to a different time Obsession Il User Manual 339 340 Editing events Each event is assigned a time Each cue may have a rate applied and the event may be labeled Change any of these elements in an event by following the same procedure used
277. pears in the upper right corner of the command display Follow the procedure below to park a dimmer Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Dimmer 3 3 Selects dimmer 33 to park Live DIMMER 33 3 Press Full Selects the level at which to park it Live DIMMER 33 FULL 4 Press Park Enter Parks the dimmer at the selected level Live DIMMER 33 O FULL PARK a In this and subsequent procedures regarding Park park a channel by pressing Channel instead of Dim meri 274 6 If a dimmer is parked and the channel the dimmer is patched to also is parked the dimmer s parking level takes priority over the channel s parking level If the dimmer is then unparked it reverts to the channel s parked level Chapter 19 Park Unparking dimmers and channels You may unpark one or all dimmers or channels at any time When either is unparked its level reverts to the level the console is currently assigning it Unparking one dimmer or channel Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Dimmer 9 Selects dimmer 9 to unpark Live DIMMER 9 3 Press Park Enter Unparks the dimmer Live DIMMER 9 PARK Unparking all dimmers or channels To unpark all parked dimmers follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Dimmer Live DIMMER 3 Press Park Enter Unparks all parked dimmers Live DIMMER PARK S
278. printer in Appendix A Information regarding each of the following may be printed Show Functions Cues and Cue Moves Submasters Groups Effects Channel Usage Setup Functions System Settings Input Output Configuration Patch Profiles SMPTE Events Macros Memos ML Functions Personalities Fixture Attributes Patch Fixture Patch Libraries Attribute Display Encoder and Touchscreen Setup Obsession Il User Manual 293 294 Print functions Choose the Print Functions menu from the setup display On that menu are three options Print Show Functions Print Setup Functions and Print ML Functions Each of these options takes you to an additional display and menu You may obtain printings in each of those displays as well as control the printer as follows e Stop the printer temporarily by pressing S1 Pause Printer The printer continues until all characters in its memory have been printed then stops Press S1 again to resume printing e Cancelaprintjob by pressing S2 Cancel Printer The printer continues until all characters in its memory have been printed then stops Print show functions The print show functions you may print all or in part are shown in the table that follows this section To print all show functions use the following procedure 1 Press Setup 6 Enter 1 Enter to go to the Print Show Functions menu 2 Press the number of the printout you want For all but the Channe
279. proceeds at new rate Recording submaster to the other page You may specify the page to which you record submasters Keystrokes 1 Ze 3 Create the look in Live Press Recoral Press Sub and enter the sub number Press Sub Pagel and enter the page on which you want to record submaster Press Enter Action Command line Live RECORD Live RECORD SUB 9 Live RECORD SUB 9 SUB PAGE2 Live RECORD SUB 9 SUB PAGE 2m Obsession Il User Manual 221 Recording a submaster minus a submaster Obsession II lets you program a submaster with the current levels on stage except for those contributed by another submaster S7 in Live automatically enters the keystroke sequence Record Sub on the command line Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press S7 Rec Minus Live RECORD SUB Sub 4 Press 5 Instructs that levels raised by submaster 5 be ignored Live RECORD SUB 5 5 Press Sub 3 Selects submaster to record Live RECORD SUB 5 SUB 3 6 Press Enter Records submaster 3 minus submaster 5 s levels Live RECORD SUB 5 SUB 3 a If you don t enter a sub number here you record the submaster without including levels contributed by any submaster Labeling submasters Use the alphanumeric keyboard to assign labels up to 25 characters to submasters Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live
280. propriately e g the first three attributes would be Intensity Pan and Tilt It also places all unused attributes at the end of the list To run an Attribute Auto Setup follow these steps Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Selects the ML Setup menu 2 Select 3 Attribute Dis Selects the Attribute Display play Setup Enter Setup display Attribute Display Setup Press S6 Auto Setup Press Enter Enter Performs an Auto Setup Attribute Display Setup AUTO SETUP Please Confirm E Obsession Il User Manual 107 Changing an attribute s category Whenever a category key is used in the ML screens all attributes assigned to that category are selected This allows a shortcut to commonly used sets of attributes Use the category keys on the console to make your category selections The following list describes each of the available categories Position Position attributes control the physical posi tion of the fixture Position attributes include Pan and Tilt Beam ess Beam attributes control the quality of the fixture s field Beam attributes include Inten sity Zoom Focus lris and Frost Image Image attributes control the shape of the fixture s field Image attributes include Gobo and F X Color Color attributes control the color of the fixture s beam Color attributes include Color Cyan Magenta Yellow etc None
281. r 3 Select channels in the group and change their lev els 4 Press S4 Update Live UPDATE Press Group enter the Live UPDATE GROUP 1 8 group number and press Enter a Someorall of the group s channels may already be on stage from another source b You can press Focus Group instead of Group to ensure that all channels in the group not at zero will be set at zero Obsession Il User Manual 203 Use Update to add new channels to a group If you specify the channels in your command line you may use Update to add new channels to an existing group Existing channels in the group may be updated at the same time Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Press Group 3 Full Puts a group s current look on Enter stage Live GROUP 3 FULL E 3 Select channels and Alters look change their levels 4 Press 5 Thru 1 0 Live CHAN 5 10 Press S4 Update Live CHAN 5 10 UPDATE 6 Press Group 3 Enter Channels are added and or updated Live CHAN 5 10 UPDATE GROUP 3 a Channels specified can be either inside or outside the group Those inside the group are updated Those outside the group are added b You can press Focus Group instead of Group to ensure that all channels in the group not at zero will be set at zero 204 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Removing designated focus group links If your group has focus group links in it and you don t want them
282. r When updating or re recording an existing submaster in Live mode and there are levels for a channel on stage that has a focus group reference the focus group s level is updated while the submaster retains the reference If the focus group no longer exists levels for those channels are stored in the submaster that referenced the non existing group Chapter 15 Submasters Update the same channels Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Setsubmaster slider to 10 2 Puts submaster s current look on stage 3 Select and set desired levels Selects channels and sets to update levels 4 Press S4 Update Live UPDATE 5 Press Sub enter the sub Live UPDATE SUB 8 1 master to update and press Enterl or Press the submaster s bump button P a Warning If you don t set the slider to 10 Obsession ll updates the submaster proportionally This means that the outputs on stage will match their current level only when the slider is at its current position Obsession ll adjusts channel levels to match slider level to accommodate this When this happens levels on stage drop to the new levels The Obsession ll system warns you before this happens b Enter a range of submasters here if you wish If you do not enter a submaster number all active submasters are updated at once Obsession Il User Manual 227 Using Update to add channels In Live Update lets you add additional channels or fixture attributes to a rec
283. r Fades are controlled by the rate wheel Live RATE CUE 2 Note Press About Cue and enter the cue number to view timing information for a cue on a virtual fader You may place all active faders under control of the rate wheel Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Rate Enter Activates rate control Live RATE 2 Move rate wheel All fades are controlled by the rate wheel Live RATE All Man All Manual The All Man All Manual function allows you to place all active faders physical or virtual under manual control When you press All Man all cues currently running freeze and are placed under the control of the Rate wheel Once the faders are on the Rate wheel the fader display shows the percentage of completion of each cue on a physical fader Use the Rate wheel to increase or decrease the percentage of completion of all running cues Once a cue is complete it leaves its fader and the rate wheel Cues captured by All Man cannot be controlled by the fader sliders Press the appropriate fader key to release a cue captured by All Man on a physical fader Note All Man does not control effect cues Effects loaded to cues will run normally Obsession Il User Manual 193 194 Chapter 13 Playing back cues Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Channels with levels may be recorded into groups Up to 999 groups numbered 1 through 999 in whole numbers may be recorded in a show A recorded group do
284. r Load Management LOAD CHECK E Please Confirm 7 Press Enter to proceed Loads are checked for all with the load check or press dimmers with levels above Clear to cancel zero Load Management LOAD CHECK E Please Confirm Obsession Il User Manual 319 320 Clear Loads Clear Loads lets you clear recorded dimmer loads thus disabling load error messages for those dimmers This can be useful if you know that the load on a dimmer or group of dimmers will change over the course of a show Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 1 Dimmer Monitoring Enter 3 Press 4 Load Manage ment Enter 4 Press S1 Clear Loads If you wish enter a specific dimmer or dimmers to clear 5 Press Enter 6 Press Enter to proceed with the load clear or press Clear to cancel Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Action Command line Selects Dimmer Monitoring menu Selects Load Management display Load Management CLEAR LOADS Load Management CLEAR LOADS Please Confirm Loads are cleared for all dimmers with levels above zero Load Management CLEAR LOADS Please Confirm Y Printing load errors When a dimmer s load isn t close enough to its recorded load it generates a load error Load error messages appear on the Load Management display shown here Load Errors Load Errors You may print a list of all dimmers with load errors Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 1 D
285. r 10 Cues Renumbering a cue You may renumber a cue to a different spot on the Blind Cue List If you renumber the cue to a spot not adjacent to its current location the cue will be copied to the new spot without deleting the old cue Renumbering to an adjacent spot deletes the old cue For example suppose your cue list starts with cues 1 5 and 9 If you renumber cue 1 to cue 4 cue 1 is deleted and your list now consists of cues 4 5 and 9 On the other hand if you renumber cue 1 to cue 6 cue 1 is copied to cue 6 and your list consists of cues 1 5 6 and 9 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Bling 2 Press Cue and use the Selects the desired cue keypad to enter the current Blind CUE 3 number of the cue to renumber 3 Press At and enter the Blind CUE 3 CUE 13 new number for the cue 4 Press Enter Moves the cue to its new spot on the Cue List Deletes cue 3 if there were no cues between cue 3 and 13 Blind CUE 3 CUE 13 31 If the new cue number belongs to an existing cue you must confirm that you wish to replace the existing cue Obsession Il User Manual 169 Labelling cues Use the alohanumeric keyboard to assign labels to cues Labels may be up to 15 characters long Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 1 2 Label 4 Type the desired label For example call cue 12 The Big Story 5 Press Enter Ah
286. r functions page 299 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Group Selects group display 2 Press S6 Delete Group Group DELETE GROUP 3 Enter group to delete Group DELETE GROUP 1 4 Press Enter Group DELETE GROUP 1 8 Please confirm Press Enter to delete the Group DELETE GROUP 1 E group or Clear to cancel Please confirm E 34 You may also label groups in the ML Group mode in which case you would press S4 Select Group in step 2 35 You may also delete groups in the ML Group mode in which case you would press More Softkeys S6 Delete Group in step 2 206 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Copying groups You may copy a look from one group to another If you copy to another group that already exists it is replaced The example below is for the Group display mode but the equivalent process for the ML Group mode would be to substitute More Softkeys S7 Copy Group in step 2 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Group Selects Group display mode 2 Press S7 Copy Group Specifies the group to copy 1 Group COPY GROUP 1 3 Press At 5 Specifies the group to copy to Group COPY GROUP 1 5 4 Press Enter Competes the copy operation Group COPY GROUP 1 5m Using cues or submasters as groups Cues and submasters include channels for conventional or moving lights as well as other characteristics You can group these channels and attributes as a selection tool in Llve
287. r or dimmers to record 6 Press Enter Load Management RECORD LOADS Please Confirm 7 Press Enter to proceed New loads are recorded for all with the load record orpress dimmers with levels above Clear to cancel zero Load Management RECORD LOADS Please Confirm 318 Chapter 25 Dimmer monitoring Check loads Load Check compares the current load with the recorded load Loads that differ by more than 20 percent appear in the Load Management display To identify the dimmer s to check use either the CEM or the Obsession II to set the desired dimmers at a level above zero The system checks 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been checked If you have multiple racks 24 dimmers in each rack are checked simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system checks 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Load Check changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a check load operation press S6 Load Check Enter Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Set dimmers to be checked to a level above zero Only dimmers above zero are checked 2 Press Setupl Press 1 1 Dimmer Selects Dimmer Monitoring Monitoring Enter menu 4 Press 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management ment Enter display 5 Press S6 Load Check Load Management LOAD You may enter specific CHECK dimmers to check 6 Press Ente
288. re List playback display Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Using the keypad to set attribute levels When you want to set the level of one or more attributes of a fixture follow the procedure below Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 3 3 Press S1 Attribute 6 4 Press At 5 5 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects fixtures 1 and 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Selects attribute 6 for both fixtures ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 ATTRIBUTE 6 Specifies a level on the keypad ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 ATTRIBUTE 6 5 Sets the intensity at 5096 for attribute 6 of fixtures 1 and 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 ATTRIBUTE 6 508 Using encoders to set attribute levels To set the attribute level for one or more fixtures using encoders or the trackpad follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 3 Press Page 2 Rotate the encoder or move on the trackpad Action Command Line Selects fixtures 1 and 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Selects encoder page 2 Selects the level s a This selection assumes that the attributes to be adjusted are represented on encoder page 2 See Encoders and trackpad setup page 100 Obsession Il User Manual 131 Using groups to set attribute levels There are two ways you can use groups to set levels either with the Group command or the Focus Group command Following is an explanation of the procedures to use for each and reasons for usin
289. re s Discrete Attributes without having to create multiple personali ties for each variation The first table contains a set of default labels See Frame Tables page 112 Most users have a common set of Color or Gobo frames and only a few that will be different When a Fixture is patched the user will choose one of the four tables to be used for that Fixture This will use that Frame Table for all of the Discrete Attributes in the Personality so if the Personality has a Color wheel and a Gobo wheel and the Fixture is set to Frame Table 3 then it will use Frame Table 3 in both the Color and the Gobo Attributes 16 Start DMX512 is the same as the number set on the moving light see the moving light s manual on how to set the address Chapter 7 Patching moving lights 17 Setting up a new fixture You can patch one fixture at a time or select two or more to which you can assign the same personality Follow these steps to patch two fixtures at once Keystroke 1 2 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Select 2 Fixture Patch Enter Press 3 4 Enter Press 1 Personality 5 Enter Press S2 Start Channel 5110 Enter Press S3 Start DMX512 11 Press 5 10 2 Press Enter a Must be in range 1 6 b Must be in range 1 512 17 Action Command Line Selects the ML Setup menu Selects the Fixture Patch display Fixture Patch Selects fixtures 3 and 4 Fixture Patch FIX
290. reate a variety of effects accommodate variations and deficiencies in your lighting equipment and protect equipment from stress You may apply profiles to dimmers or to cues in place of a patch level Obsession Il is equipped with 32 profiles including a library of ten preset profiles Profile O a linear profile cannot be edited The other nine preset profiles are all editable Profiles 10 through 32 must be created by the user For more information on profiles see Recording with non default output profiles page 152 Assigning a profile to a dimmer page 61 and Setting default cue profile page 50 The following topics are covered in this chapter e Identification of profiles e Profile display e Edit profiles e Clear and fill profile values e Reset a profile e Copy a profile e Labela profile Obsession Il User Manual 265 List of profiles All user defined profiles are initially set as profile O to a linear relationship but are fully editable Following is a list of the ten preset Obsession Il profiles 0 Linear not editable 1 IES square shown below 2 Slow bottom 3 Fast bottom 4 Fast top 5 Full at 196 6 Out at 10096 7 Preheat at 596 8 Preheat at 1096 9 Hot patch 266 Chapter 18 Profiles Profile display Profiles may be viewed and edited in the Profile Display To enter the Profile Display press Setup 7 Profiles Enter The display defaults to Profile O a linear pro
291. record the normal load for the desired dimmers By running Record Loads the system learns what the correct dimmer loads should be during normal operation If at any time the system detects a discrepancy of more than 20 percent between the recorded and actual loads it displays an error message identifying the dimmer that is the source of the problem Record Loads should be the last step in setting up your system Note You may record Loads from the console or from a CEM in your Sensor AF system Loads may not be recorded on standard Sensor systems Obsession Il User Manual 317 Record loads Record Loads records 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been recorded If you have multiple racks 24 dimmers in each rack are recorded simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system records 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Record Loads changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a record load operation press S2 Record Loads Enter Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Setdimmers to be recorded to a level above zero Only dimmers above zero are recorded Press Setupl Press 1 1 Dimmer Moni Selects Dimmer Monitoring toring Enter menu 4 Press 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management ment Enter display 5 Press S2 Record Loads if Load Management you wish enter a specific RECORD LOADS dimme
292. ress stop Therefore if you need to load an additional show in the middle of a performance load it between cues when all channels are static Fader and submaster outputs are maintained as the new show loads Obsession Il User Manual 285 Viewing hard drive directory When you select Hard Drive Functions from the Setup menu you see a list of all shows currently stored on the hard drive sorted by reverse date most recent date first s Nam ow n I i Mad Times 9 23 98 1 36p Hard Drive Functions If you save a show work on it then save it again you will see two copies of the show on the hard drive distinguished only by the date or time of the last saving You may also list the shows by name or by date in order of entry most recent shown last Press S8 Sort until the method you desire appears on the command line then press Enter to select that method The upper left corner of the display shows the listing method The upper right corner of the display shows the percentage of hard drive space still available for saved shows 286 Chapter 21 Hard drive functions Storing a show and system settings When you store a show to the hard drive all system settings patch settings cues groups submasters effects and any other information that you have in the console at the time you store the show are saved Fades are interrupted during the store operation and do not resume when store is complete Keystrokes
293. rnet network are informed that control of the dimmers was taken These two conditions are explained in more detail below Obsession Il User Manual 7 Take control on boot up The first thing an operator sees when booting up an Obsession console residing on an Ethernet network is the Take Control screen That screen is shown below followed by an explanation of its features Take Control Capture Test Last Q on List Take Control Clear Patch Clear Show System Shutdown Take Control Current Show The name of the show currently residing in console memory Take Control Softkey S1 that allows this console to take control of all shared dimmers Clear Patch Softkey S4 that allows this console to retain the current show in memory but unpatches all shared dimmers repatches them to channel zero Clear Show Softkey S5 that removes the current show from memory System Shutdown Softkey S8 that shuts down this console Before operating on the Ethernet network you must either take control of dimmers or clear the patch Clearing the show has the same effect as clearing the patch but also clears console memory so that a new show can be read into memory or created Chapter 2 Take control Dimmer Taken advisory While operating on the Ethernet network you may have control of dimmers that are shared with other consoles on the network This c
294. rokes 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 4 Press At Group Cuel 2 5 Press Enter Action Command Line Selects fixture 1 ML Live FIXTURE 1 Selects one or more attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 Specifies cue 2 Sets attribute 4 of fixture 1 to the level of that attribute in cue 2 ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 GROUP CUE 2 m a Substitute Sub for Cue in this step to use the channels of a submaster rather than those of a cue to set attribute levels Chapter 9 Setting ML attribute levels Sneak attributes Sneak lets you fade selected channels or fixture attributes in a specific time as follows 2 e toalevel you choose e to the last levels at which they were set by faders or a submaster or e tonew levels recorded for the cue in Blind since the last time the cue was run in faders The following example shows how to sneak fixture attributes where the fixture the attribute level and the time are all specified on the command line Note the footnotes for other options Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects fixture 1 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Press S1 Attribute 4 3 Selects one or more attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 4 Press At 5 Sets Sneak level ML Live FIXTURE 1 ATTRIBUTE 4 Q 5 Press Sneak Press Time 1 0 Sets Sneak time to 10 seconds Press Enter Starts the fade as specified ML L
295. ructions for channels Chapter 10 Cues Cue Spreadsheet Cue Spreadsheet displays recorded cues and their channel levels The spreadsheet is ideal for modifying levels copying and deleting cues and viewing the effect on subsequent cues The Spreadsheet s range editing feature allows you to modify multiple cues at the same time In Blind Press S3 Spreadsheet to display the cue spreadsheet FL FL FL FL FL 00 00 Spreadsheet CUE 38 u Range editing in Cue Spreadsheet The cue spreadsheet allows you to use and Thru to select and modify groups of channels and cues Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 3 Press Cue and enter the cues to modify in this case 1 Thru 5 4 Press Enter 5 Press Time 6 Enter the new times for the cues 7 Press Enter 000 000 0 O FL 0000 0 0000 00 00000 000 0 O0 Action Command line Displays Cue Spreadsheet Spreadsheet CUE1 gt 5 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 Spreadsheet CUE1 5 TIME Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 E TIME4 6 Spreadsheet CUE 1 gt 5 TIME 4 6 Obsession Il User Manual 163 164 Replace With Replace With allows you to find channels at a specific level and change only those channels to a different level You may combine this with range editing Keystrokes 1 Press Bling 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 3 Press Cue and enter the cues to modify in this case 1 Thru 5
296. s 6 Thru 1 0 Record Part 2 Enter Press 1 1 Thru 1 5 Record Part 3 Enter Action Command line Creates a standard cue containing channels 1 through 20 at Full Creates part 1 Places channels 1 through 5 in part 1 Remaining channels are placed in part 8 Live CHAN 1 gt 5 RECORD CUE 1 PART 1 Creates part 2 Moves channels 6 through 10 from part 8 to part 2 Live CHAN 6 10 RECORD CUE 1 PART 2 Creates part 3 Moves channels 11 through 15 from part 8 to part 3 Live CHAN 11 15 RECORD CUE 1 PART 3 E Note When a normal cue is split into a multipart cue all of the channels in that cue are placed in part 8 From part 8 you may move them to any one of the other seven parts Obsession Il User Manual 181 Set attributes for multipart cues Time Wait Profile Park or Rate attributes can be assigned to a part Attributes are assigned and function exactly as they do for whole cues In the following example Time Profile Part or Rate could also be entered in step 3 Follow these steps to add a wait time to a part Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Cue then enter the Selects cue number cue number Live CUE 1 2 Press Part then enter the Selects part number part number Live CUE 1 PART 2 3 Press Wait then enterthe Selects part number time you want the part to Live CUE 1 PART 2 WAIT 4 wait before running If using split wait times enter times separa
297. s Dim then enter the Patch CHAN 18 DIMMER 10 gt numbers of the dimmer s 20 you want to patch 5 Press Enter Patch CHAN 18 DIMMER 10 20 a For a dimmer set to Dimmer Double press S5 A or S6 B after entering the dimmer number If you select a multiplexed dimmer without specifying A or B the selection defaults to A b As long as the selected channel number is on the command line e add an additional dimmer by pressing Dim 2 Enter and e you may press Next to go to the next channel 56 Chapter 5 Patching conventional lights Patching by dimmer label In By Label patch display you may view dimmer numbers Press S4 Suppress Dimmers to hide or reveal dimmer numbers The keypad defaults to dimmer selection For information on assigning labels to dimmers see Labeling dimmers page 60 Follow these steps to patch a dimmer to a control channel Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Patch 2 To select By Label mode Selects By Label patch press S2 in By Channel display mode or 1 in By Dimmer mode 3 Use the alphanumeric key Patch DIMMER Bax board to type the label of the dimmer to patch 4 Press S8 Channel then Patch DIMMER Bax enter the channel number to CHAN 5 which to patch the selected dimmer 5 Press Enter Patch DIMMER Bax CHAN 5 m Obsession II User Manual 57 58 Proportional patching You may proportionally inhibit the output of individual dimmer
298. s and step In Dwell Out times They do not affect the overall In Dwell Out time Obsession Il User Manual 153 Recording a block cue In a tracking system channel levels track from cue to cue Thus changes made in one cue may affect subsequent cues One way to keep channel level changes from tracking is to record a block cue A block cue sets tracked channels at specific levels rather than letting levels track through from previous cues and sets all unused channels to zero Often a block cue is used for blackout cues and at the beginning or end of an act This ensures that when you modify a cue the changes don t track into the blackout or the following act A cue may be completely blocked or individual channels may be blocked Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels or fixture attributes and set levels 3 Press Record 1 0 Records cue 10 Enter Live RECORD CUE 10 4 Press Cue 1 0 S2 Re records cue 10 as a block Block Enter cue All channels not assigned levels in step 2 are set to zero Live CUE 10 BLOCK Note A block cue all channels blocked is marked on the cue list under BI with a If only specific channels are blocked the cue is marked with a 154 29 If a focus group is tracking into a block cue each channel of the focus group contains a move in the block cue rather than the reference to the focus group Chapter 10 Cues Recor
299. s that are shared by all discrete attributes in the personality 2 Frame Tables are used in displays because the numerical value of the level is less important than what it means When a fixture s attribute controls color for instance there are only a limited number of colors that can be produced Therefore continuous ranges of levels for that attribute produce the color not just individual levels For example the range 0 10 might code for blue the range 11 15 might code for green and so on ML displays show a label taken from one of the personalities Frame Tables so that you won t need to translate in your mind from a number to a color When you patch a fixture using a personality that includes frame tables you can specify which of the four tables of that personality the fixture will use for its discrete attributes ETC provides labels for the first Frame Table which is called the default Frame Table Having four possible frame tables for each personality means that you can have multiple moving lights of the same type but with different colors or gobos in each When you create a new frame in an attribute s table its label is used by all four tables You may change the label of any frame in any of the four Frame Tables including those in the default If you edit a label later you edit only in the selected table This is useful because in most cases you use only a few custom frames gobos colors etc 112 21 A show
300. se ue Meee eee ee eee led Eo eR PEN OE G Groups DISplay esras se aes ola mew m aem ene ewe Ctrl F10 Group List Command Ctrl F10 Ctrl F3 Ctrl F3 Group List Playback uta relc 4 uut us rs Group Sheet ica dik eee REEL ERR Ctrl F10 Ctrl F3 TAC Dike aree Eb cal ee bb rb tutte EN OMG ip O epee EMI E AIt H A CE T Alt I Labels ilie reas A eee Rue EUER ANE B ast onc Led dem ec ET ie Les PgDn BC Tr AIT Shift F9 Love losa nm m RR a glee coe Salen ead Age giao es V IA a A a a A Alt L Nora H Bd PIE K Live DISPI Y sss serrer Renee ke eR mE F5 koad QUE iid aes oe Sue Fei peri ue F4 LOTA SUD a a A bene E RENE C Macros uc eet ae RE Ib td EL ses M Mac Loi OE Ow teed od IW ERE Reece are Alt 1 7 MENE IM MAS aed daa eared Asts etsi Ax Alt 8 MITO Iu Seas Peed yen aie eee Ed WS RR Shift F3 ML Blind DISplay s dre UR Rn ern ttes F6 F6 Chapter 28 Accessories ML Group Display lees Ctrl F10 Ctrl F10 ML Live DiSplay uu enmt a F5 F5 More Sont Kaya stas rt AENA EAEAN NIEDA E EAEE n e E goalie E E E PgUp Olives via a a A Pade Uae eae 0 PAGS et Mitt atl aa E E T aed oe seed ES Shift F5 Page sek dad RE va RR we EY Shift F6 Park xoswibie wicked eka ee eh eke a Eis N Park Displays aeria a E aden raves ate Ctrl F9 PAM va Ce Pr P Pateh Display dtm tenet egre ase wate F8 POSITION zig e xe in duces Metaweb RUP Rob OR ad riego id d AIt P PLOT Gc ae aea RA L Rate Playbacks s iere xx a Rn n Alt F10
301. ss Patch 2 f patch is displayed in By Selects By Dimmer patch Channel or By Label mode display press S1 By Dimmer 3 Use the keypad to enter Patch DIMMER 4 8 the numbers of the dim mers you want to patch Use and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer 4 Press At then enter the Patch DIMMER 4 gt 8 O channel number to which CHAN 2 you want to patch the selected dimmers You may press S8 Channel in place of At 5 Press Enter Patch DIMMER 4 8 CHAN 2 a Fora dimmer set to Dimmer Double press S5 A or S6 B after entering the dimmer number If you select a multiplexed dimmer without specifying A or B the selection defaults to A b As long as the selected dimmer number is on the command line e the channel assignment may be changed or a proportional level assigned without reselecting the dimmer and e you may press Next to go to the next dimmer Obsession Il User Manual 55 Patching by channel Press 4 in By Channel mode to choose between Display Labels and Display Dimmers The keypad defaults to channel selection Follow these steps to patch a dimmer or dimmers to a control channel Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Patch 2 If patch is displayed in By Selects By Channel mode Dimmer or By Label mode press S2 By Channel 3 Use keypad to enter the Patch CHAN 18 number of the channel to which you want to patch 4 Pres
302. ss the Group key the touchscreen switches automatically to the group display The touchscreen remains on the display until a different command is issued When the command line calls for the kind of information showing on the touchscreen simply touch it to make your selection If more than one selection is allowed such as for a range of attributes every choice you make by touch will be entered on the command line The maximum number of attributes libraries and groups can be displayed as buttons on the touchscreen with 24 shown on each page A Next button is displayed on the attribute display which you use to move to the following page Back and Next buttons appear on the Library and group pages for the same purposes When you get to the last page for all three displays pressing Next one more time takes you back to the first page Each button is labeled by the name if recorded and number of the attribute library and group it represents When you select a fixture the touchscreen highlights those attributes on each page that are contained in that fixture s personality You may move attributes to different positions on the touchscreen buttons and pages if you wish Obsession ll User Manual 99 Encoders and trackpad setup Attribute assignments The Encoder Setup display lets you assign attributes to encoders and the trackpad for encoder pages Each of the six encoder pages can have a different set of encoder and trackpad assign
303. ssigned a High and Low level a Step time and an In Dwell and Out time Note If an effect step includes groups its high and low values are proportional levels Step time Step time is the time between the beginning of a step and the beginning of the next step Default is one second Obsession Il User Manual 237 In time In a positive effect In time is how long it takes the step to fade from its starting level to its high level to start the step In a negative effect it is the time it takes to fade from its high level to its low level Default is zero seconds Dwell time Dwell time is how long the step holds levels between the In fade and the Out fade Default is zero Out time In a positive effect Out time is how long it takes the step to fade from its high level to its low level to end the step In a negative effect it is the time it takes the step to fade from its low level to its high level Default Out time is zero seconds Note If the In Dwell Out times are 0 0 0 the step snaps to its High level and remain there until the Step time has elapsed Then it snaps to its Low level High and Low levels The High and Low levels represent the range of levels channels in the step are allowed to reach Default High level is Full default low level is zero 238 Chapter 16 Effects Create effects and steps As you create a series of steps in Effect display mode you create an effect When you create a new step it
304. ssors console s and monitor The processors will boot up together comparing shows on both hard drives and copying shows from the primary to the secondary processor if the shows are unlike Note the display If the processors achieve tracking you will see the Live display on the monitor s screen Go to step 4 below If redundant tracking is not achieved within one minute you will see the following Advisory message The backup unit does not respond The main unit is now operating as a stand alone system The backup system has been disconnected from the network To reconnect the backup unit to the network you must restart both the main unit and the backup unit together If you have a DMX switching module installed please check that it is set to accept DMX from the appropriate unit Press any key to continue If tracking was not achieved press any key to continue You may either operate with one processor or make another attempt to start the processors in redundant tracking If the show you want is not in the primary processor s memory or on its hard drive insert the show diskette into the primary processor s disk drive Do not use the secondary processor s disk drive If in doubt determine which is the primary processor by inspecting the LEDs on the front of both processors If the show is not already in memory read it into memory from the hard drive or disk drive See Chapter 21 Hard drive functions page 285 or Chapter 19 Disket
305. t your system e Set system date and time Obsession Il User Manual 43 Setting the number of dimmers You should set your system for the number of dimmers it can control Obsession II 750 defaults to 1 536 dimmers Obsession 1500 defaults to 1 536 dimmers and Obsession I 3000 defaults to 3 072 dimmers Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setupl 2 Select 1 System Settings Selects System Settings menu and press Enter 3 Select 1 Number of System Settings ENTER Dimmers and press Enterl NUMBER OF DIMMERS 4 Use the keypad to enter the System Settings ENTER desired number of dimmers NUMBER OF DIMMERS 800 5 Press Enter System Settings ENTER NUMBER OF DIMMERS 800 Please Confirm 6 Press Enter to confirm the System Settings ENTER number of dimmers or NUMBER OF DIMMERS 800 press Clear to cancel the Please Confirm Y operation Setting the number of channels Obsession II 750 lets you control your dimmers through up to 750 control channels Obsession II 1500 allows up to 1 536 control channels and Obsession II 3000 allows up to 3 072 control channels To set the number of channels the system can address follow the steps above but select 2 Number of Channels in step 3 Is edi you use this setting to increase the number of dimmers the new dimmers are automatically patched to channel zero 44 Chapter 4 System settings Selecting Cue Only or Tracking mode
306. te functions page 271 for information about reading a show into memory The show is read simultaneously into both processors For more information see Redundant tracking page 362 The Hardware Setup procedure that enables redundant tracking is covered on page 365 2 Torestart first shut down the processor that has booted up with the console See System Shutdown page 5 Then shut down the other processor manually by pushing the processor s power switch Go to step 1 above to restart Chapter 1 Getting started System Shutdown The System Shutdown procedure protects your show data by making sure you discontinue operations in an orderly way In addition it turns off your processor in a single processor system or if you re using redundant tracking in a dual processor system it turns off both processors All you need to do after completing the simple 4 step procedure below is turn off the console monitor s and any other powered devices in your system If you can avoid it never shut your system down by simply turning off the power If that happens the next time you start Obsession II a warning message will display Keystrokes Actions Command line 1 Press Setup 2 Press S8 Advisory System Shutdown Do you wish to shut the sys tem down now Press Enter to proceed with shutting the system down Otherwise press Clear Command line Setup SHUT SYSTEM DOWN 3 Press Enter Setup SHUT SYSTEM DOWN Ple
307. te wheel movements Each macro can contain as many keystrokes as memory allows In addition you can put a macro keystroke at the end of a macro sequence to link it to another macro Obsession Il User Manual 255 Use Learn The Learn function lets you create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes Rerun the recorded keystroke sequence by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit the sequence in Macro mode Keystrokes 1 Press Live 2 Press Learn 3 Press Macro 7 Enter 4 Enter 1 Thru 5 At 5 Enter 5 Press More Softkeys S7 Macro Wait 5 6 Press Enter Enter 1 Thru 1110 Full Enter 8 Press More Softkeys S7 Macro Wait 5 9 Press Enter 10 Enter 1 Thru 1 0 Out 11 Press Store Macro 12 Press M7 256 39 Learn works in any display mode Chapter 17 Macros Action Command line Live LEARN Learning Macro 7 flashes above the command line Live LEARN MACRO 7 8 Sets channels 1 through 5 at 50 percent Live CHAN 1 5 508 Inserts a five second wait into the macro Live CHAN1 gt 5 508 MACRO WAIT 5 Live CHAN 1 5 508 Sets channels 1 through 10 at Full Live CHAN 1 gt 10 FULL E Inserts a five second wait into the macro Live CHAN 1 gt 10 FULL MACRO WAIT 5 Live CHAN 1 gt 10 FULL Sets channels 1 through 10 at zero Live CHAN 1 gt 10
308. ted QuickGuide from ETC s internet website at www etcconnect com Chapter 28 Accessories Show Translator Why a translator is needed If you have a show that was created on an Obsession ll system running system software older than 4 x you can translate that show to run under 4 x software Obsession Il shows are upward compatible which means they run in newer releases of software after being created with older releases But not without translation Translation is automatic for shows stored in an Obsession Il hard drive when the system is upgraded according to the instructions provided Translation must be done manually however for shows stored on diskettes The show translator for shows stored on both a hard drive and diskette is provided with the Obsession ll system software You can also obtain it from the ETC website www etcconnect com or by calling ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 Operating the Show Translator Normally you would not need to translate shows on your hard drive if you obtained an Obsession with 4 x or later system software or if you converted to 4 x system software according to instructions provided in an ETC upgrade kit All 3 x shows are converted automatically by an upgrade This discussion of the Show Translator therefore is aimed at those who have older shows on diskettes and need to perform this translation The Show Translator runs from MS DOS not from the Obsession Il system software It
309. ted by 4 Press Enter Live CUE 1 PART 2 WAIT 4 Move channels to another part of a multipart cue Update in Live allows you to move channels to another part of a multipart cue Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Live 2 Press Cue 5 Enter Selects cue 5 Live CUE 5 3 Press 4 Thru 7 2 Selects channels 4 through 7 Live CHAN 4 gt 7 4 Press S4 Update Part Moves channels 4 through 7 2 Enter from their current part into part 2 Live CHAN 4 gt 7 UPDATE CUE 5 PART 2 a If you do not enter channels in step 3 the update command acts the way it always has 182 Chapter 12 Multipart cues Record a multipart cue in Blind Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Bling 2 Press Cue then enter the Selects cue number number to assign to the new Blind CUE2 cue 3 Press Part then enter the Selects part number number to assign to the new Blind CUE 2 PART 1 part 4 Press Enter Blind CUE 2 PART 1 Select desired channels and Blind CUE 2 PART 1 set levels then press Enter CHAN 1 5 E 50 E 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have created all the parts Note If you create a new cue any channels set to a level in the previous cue track into the new cue Their levels appear in magenta If you create anew cue and Clear Channels in Cue Only is enabled any channels set to a level in the previous cue are set to zero in the new cue Obsession Il User Manual 183
310. ted to return specially modified or custom equipment or merchandise invoiced more than six 6 months prior to date of Customer s return request Obsession ll User Manual v Table of contents Declaration of conformity 0 00000 0 i Limited warranty Vor ce e c o A ite Daw it ia t No te Saag iv Chapter 1 Getting started eee 1 New Features exe Bee PR 2 Helps ad denda sug eh abad o vide hehe Aa des Et to yes V 2 Using this manual l l ess 2 Output level conventions 0 00000 eee eee 3 Starting in Redundant TrackinQ o ooo o o o o 4 SYSTEM SUI WM 3 sse eM uid eq ag loe ede duda 5 Electronic backup maintenance o o oooooo 5 C stommer ServiGecss e eU rd Cave DIE RUE 6 Chapter 2 Take Control oo 7 Take control on boot Ups croata bee ee es leas 8 Dimmer Taken advisory 000 00022 ee 9 Chapter 3 Monitor displays 000 11 Command display features 20 0 0 0 0000005 12 SOME Sd tele pe eee e Pe dee bdo 12 MOFGSOTtKGVS Les t ea t 12 Command mato ente tte a e 12 Using the command line aana naaa aaa 13 Irc EIE 13 COSO MA APRA EE oed C UA D cn fce ei 14 Command displays xs rar RR En 15 INIT ELE NIRE MEC 15 BINE iei D AUD HUC PS 16 Circe E A te a eral 17 ML Live ML Blind and ML Group 18 UDI AST Resse ee A A 20 PRANK Se eeies iat E A AS 21 Efecto OU 6 ot Reins ata cc tinh fuse od hey 22 Patel vere cheered e ue red
311. th Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Cue Only Track Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They are set to zero in the next cue unless that cue has another setting for those channels Delete cues without Cue Only Track S6 Delete Cue 1 Enter Enter When you delete a cue any levels that tracked from that cue into subsequent cues are removed from those cues Delete cues with Cue Only Track S6 Delete Cue 1 Cue Only Track Enter Enter When you delete a cue any levels that tracked from that cue into subsequent cues are placed into the next cue as move instructions They will track forward from that cue Copy cues without Cue Only Track S1 Select Cue 1 56 Copy to Cue 6 Enter When you copy a cue levels track into it from the cue before its new location and levels in the copied cue track forward into the next cue Copy cues with Cue Only Track S1 Select Cue 1 S6 Copy to Cue 6 Cue Only Track Enter When you copy a cue levels that tracked from the cue before its new location to the cue that follows its new location are placed into the next cue as move instructions They will track forward from that cue Levels in the copied cue don t track Chapter 11 Tracking Cue only In Cue Only mode Change levels without Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They are set to zero in the next cue unless that cue has ano
312. the group This occurs whether you recorded the group with the Group or the Focus Group command See Determining what is recorded into a group page 196 for further information Use the Focus Group command to set the pan and tilt attributes as follows Keystrokes Action Command Line 1 Goto ML Live 2 Press 1 Selects fixture 1 ML Live FIXTURE 1 3 Press S5 Position Puts the pan and tilt position attributes on the encoders ML Live FIXTURE 1 POSITION 4 Press At Focus Group Identifies group 3 to which 3 levels will be set 5 Press Enter Sets pan and tile at levels in group 3 MLLive FIXTURE 1 POSITION FOCUS GROUP 3 m a Youcan also select the group on the touchscreen See Touchscreen page 99 for more information b If you press Next or Last after Enter the focus group operation just completed is cancelled and the next higher or lower focus group is used for the command Obsession Il User Manual 133 134 Using grouped channels to set attribute levels You can also use the levels in cues and submasters to set attribute levels For this purpose the channels in the cue or submaster are automatically treated by Obsession as if they are elements of a group If the channels of the selected attributes are contained in the grouped cue or submaster the attributes are set to the levels in the cue or submaster Follow the procedure below to set selected attributes to the levels in a cue Keyst
313. the cue to remove links ML Live UPDATE FOCUS GROUP CUE 3 8 a You don t need to specify fixtures but if you don t all fixtures are selected b You don t need to specify attributes but if you don t all attributes for the selected fixtures are selected Modifying cue attributes Follow these steps to modify cue attributes Keystrokes 1 Press Live Action Command line 2 Press Cue then enter the Selects the cue desired cue 3 Press the key or softkey that corresponds to the attribute to modify 4 Enter the new setting for the attribute 5 Press Enter Chapter 10 Cues Modifies cue attribute Re records cue with modifications Deleting a cue You may delete a cue in Live ML Live Blind or ML Blind modes Following is the procedure in Live or Blind modes Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press S6 Delete Cue Live DELETE CUE 2 Enter number of cue to Selects cue to delete delete This is optional if Live DELETE CUE 5 you wish to delete the cur Please confirm rent cue Press Enter 3 Press Enter Deletes cue Live DELETE CUE 5 Please confirm 8 a If Obsession ll is in tracking mode press Cue Only Track after you enter the cue number to keep modifications from tracking into subsequent cues If in Cue Only mode Cue Only Track will force changes to track For further information see Cue Only Track key page 175 Obsession Il User Manual 159 Working with cues
314. the specified dimmer is outside the range of shared dimmers in the Ethernet system only dimmer settings are given in the About Dimmer display If the specified dimmer is within the range of shared dimmers not only are dimmer settings given in the About Dimmer display but also the display identifies the Obsession that has control of the dimmer if any Both types of About Dimmer displays are illustrated after the procedure below An explanation of the features in both displays is given after these illustrations Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press About Dimmer ABOUT DIMMER 2 Enter the number of the ABOUT DIMMER 6 desired dimmer 3 Press Enter About Dimmer display appears ABOUT DIMMER 6 4 Press Clear Display is cleared About Dimmer 1 FL Not Parked About Dimmer when the dimmer is outside the shared range Obsession ll User Manual 63 About Dimmer 87 FL Not Parked Obsession II 192 168 2 10 About Dimmer when the dimmer is within the shared range Label The dimmer s label Channel The channel to which the dimmer is assigned Proportion The dimmer s assigned proportional level Profile The dimmer s assigned profile Park status The level at which the dimmer is parked if any If Dimmer Doubling is installed the User that parked the dimmer is noted Controlled by Type of device that is controlling this dimmer Address Network address of the controlling device Label Name ass
315. ther setting for those channels Change levels with Cue Only Track 1 Thru 5 Full Cue Only Track Enter Cue 1 sets channels 1 through 5 to full They remain at full until a subsequent cue sets them to a different level Delete cues without Cue Only Track S6 Delete Cue 1 Enter Enter When you delete a cue any levels that tracked from that cue into subsequent cues are placed into the next cue as move instructions They will track forward from that cue Delete cues with Cue Only Track S6 Delete Cue 1 Cue Only Track Enter Enter When you delete a cue any levels that tracked from that cue into subsequent cues are removed from those cues Copy cues without Cue Only Track S1 Select Cue 1 S6 Copy to Cue 6 Cue Only Track Enter When you copy a cue any levels that tracked from the cue before its new location to the cue that follows its new location are placed into the next cue as move instructions They will track forward from that cue Levels in the copied cue don t track Copy cues with Cue Only Track S1 Select Cue 1 S6 Copy to Cue 6 Enter When you copy a cue levels track into it from the cue before its new location and levels in the copied cue track forward into the next cue Note If you create a new cue any channels set to a level in the previous cue track into the new cue Their levels appear in magenta If you create anew cue and Clear Channels in Cue Only
316. there you can update the group selectively to remove them The links in the group are replaced by the focus group levels Keystrokes 1 GotoMLLive 2 Press 1 and 3 3 Press S4 Position 4 Press Focus Group Enter 5 Press S4 Update 6 Press Focus Group Group 3 Enter Action Command line Select a display Selects fixtures 1 and 3 ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 Selects the position attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION Removes the links from the selected fixtures and attributes ML Live FIXTURE 1 AND 3 POSITION FOCUS GROUP m Updates the group to remove links ML Live UPDATE FOCUS GROUP GROUP 3 m a You don t need to specify fixtures but if you don t all fixtures are selected b You don t need to specify attributes but if you don t all attributes for the selected fixtures are selected Obsession Il User Manual 205 Labeling groups Use the following procedure to label groups with the alphanumeric keyboard 94 Keystrokes Action Command line 1 2 Press Group Selects Group display mode Press S1 Select Group Group GROUP 1 and enter the group to label Press Label Group GROUP 1 LABEL Enter a label up to 20 char Group GROUP 1 LABEL Fire acters Press Enter on the Group GROUP 1 LABEL Obsession 2 keypad Fire m Deleting groups Use the following procedure to delete a group 9 To delete all groups at once see Chapter 23 Clea
317. through 6 are not installed 4 Jumper 13 must always be off Jumper 14 should always be installed 392 Appendix B References Appendix C Error messages Programming errors An effect is loaded in this submaster When an effect is loaded in a submaster most attributes can t be assigned or edited You may edit the rate An effect is recorded in this cue or part When an effect is loaded in a cue or part most attributes can t be assigned or edited You may edit the rate link follow or wait Conflicts with DMX port configuration Multiplex mode must be set appropriately to carry out this action Cue number must be in the range 0 1 999 9 Cue numbers must be between 0 1 and 999 9 Dimmer check requires a single dimmer A dimmer check runs through dimmers sequentially one at a time It is not possible to check multiple dimmers simultaneously Dimmer is not in multiplex mode Dimmer must be in multiplex mode to use the A and B suffixes Dimmer not found When selecting dimmer by label label must match exactly Confirm that upper and lower case letters are correct for the dimmer Dwell must be Hold if up down times are Manual Do not attempt to enter a dwell time if your fades are manually controlled Elements list invalid or too long Element lists may only be 42 characters long Error Appears on the RFUs LCD display to indicate any error Obsession Il User Manual 393 Illegal with multiple cues selected Select only
318. tion in progress Please stand by Command line reads Hard Drive Functions READ ALL Y Please confirm 8 Once the show information is read into memory the screen Switches to the Live display Reading only a show When you read just the show from the hard drive and load it into memory the new show overwrites the current show but does not affect the current system settings To read only the show information follow the steps listed above but press S6 Read Show Enter in step 4 Chapter 21 Hard drive functions Reading part of a show You may retrieve specific parts of a show from the hard drive When you read part of a show and load it into memory the new part overwrites the current part You may read the patch or you may read cues submasters effects groups profiles or macros The available parts appear on the softkeys Fades are interrupted during the read operation and do not resume when read is complete Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Setup 4 Hard Selects Hard Drive Functions Drive Functions Enter menu 2 Use level wheel or Next Highlights the selected show Last Page or Page on the display to select show You may also press S1 Select By Name enter the show s name on the alphanumeric keyboard and press Enter 3 Press S7 Read Part Of Displays softkeys for partial Show show selection 4 Press the softkey for the Hard Drive Functions part you want to rea
319. to the bump time assignment if the effect is loaded to a submaster Change upfade dwell and downfade Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Effect 2 Press Effect enter effect Effect 3 M number and press Enter 3 Press Time enter the Effect 3 E TIME 5 upfade and press 4 Enter the dwell and press Effect 3 TIME 5 2 5 Enter the downfade Effect 3 TIME 5 2 5 6 Press Enter Effect 3 TIME5 2 5 Change upfade only Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Time Effect 3 E TIME 2 Entertheupfadeandpress Effect 3 8 TIME 4 3 Press Enterl Effect 3 E TIME 4 E Obsession Il User Manual 243 Change downfade only Keystrokes 1 Press Time 2 Press 3 Enter the downfade 4 Press f Enter Action Command line Effect 3 TIME Effect 3 TIME Effect 3 Y TIME 4 Effect 3 TIME 4 Change up and downfade to the same time Keystrokes 1 Press Timel 2 Enter the fade time 3 Press Enter Change dwell only Keystrokes 1 Press Time 2 Press 3 Enter the dwell Press S6 Hold to set a held dwell time 4 Press Enter Reset Hold dwell time Keystrokes 1 Press Timel Enter Chapter 16 Effects Action Command line Effect 3 TIME Effect 3 TIME 3 Effect 3 TIME 3 Action Command line Effect 3 TIME Effect 3 TIME Effect 3 TIME HOLD Effect 3 TIME HOLD Action Command line C
320. to the command keys Output level conventions Obsession ll consoles use a last action convention rather than a highest level convention to determine levels for channels affected by several outputs Obsession reads and outputs the most recent output level it receives for a specific channel Obsession ll s submasters however generally operate on a highest level basis A channel remains at the level set by a submaster unless another output sets it at a higher level A level setting entered on the keypad however does affect submaster levels on a last action basis For example if a channel is included in a submaster and a cue is playing back in a physical fader Obsession ll sets the channel at the level set by the submaster if that levelis the greater of the two settings In the following table the first output affects the second output on either a highest level or last action basis as noted Subs 3 Cues Highest level Cues 3 Subs Highest level Subs 3 Keypad Highest level Keypad 3 Subs Last action Keypad 3 Cues Last action Cues 3 Keypad Last action Obsession ll User Manual 3 Starting in Redundant Tracking The dual processing system DPS can operate with redundant tracking If the primary processor in a redundant tracking system fails the secondary processor takes control automatically without interrupting the ongoing operations Start your DPS in redundant tracking using the following procedure 1 Turn on both proce
321. tributes and fixtures are selected then only the selected attributes of the selected fixtures are affected by tracking Any unaffected channel or attribute is allowed to track in unless the Clear Channels in Cue Only option is on and the command is a Record of a new Cue at the levels in the previous cue Cue Only In Cue Only mode if you modify a channel level the new level only affects the current cue leaving the next cue unchanged Levels do not affect subsequent cues unless you use the Cue Only Track key In the following case five cues are recorded in Cue Only mode in Blind to create the same sequence Since levels do not track forward each cue must set all its own levels The bold characters indicate levels set by that cue In each new cue levels from the previous cue are set to zero Thus in cue 5 there is no need to set levels to zero since they fade out automatically when the cue starts Channel 1 Channel2 Channel3 Channel 4 Cue 1 FF Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 50 0 0 0 174 Chapter 11 Tracking Cue only Cue Only Track key The Cue Only Track key allows you to momentarily treat the Obsession ll system as if it were in the opposite mode from its current setting Each of the following examples shows the keystroke sequence required to set the levels of channels 1 through 5 to full and the results of that action Live In Live use the Cue Only Track key only when recording or up
322. ts must contain the same number of items 394 Appendix C Error messages Macro wait time must be terminated by Enter A Macro Wait entry in a macro sequence must be followed by the Enter key Go to Macro display mode and edit macro sequence Maximum command line length exceeded A command line may be up to 200 commands or 1 024 characters long whichever comes first Must be the active cue You may not update any cue other than the active cue In Live mode a selective record or a record to a multipart must be to the active cue Not valid in current configuration You may not change the beginning number of a DMX512 port if the port is multiplexed Parts cannot be combined in list You may not use specific parts of a multipart cue in a list using Thru or Only whole cues including multipart cues may be included Resulting elements list is too long When Obsession ll generates element lists using a one to one channel assignment the element lists created may not use more than 42 characters each Show not found When you select a show from the hard disk by name be certain the name you enter matches the show s name exactly Check upper and lower case letters and make sure they are correct Stage levels may change Please confirm When you update a submaster set the submaster s slider to 10 to avoid possibly changing levels on the stage If an output s level is higher than the current level of the slider Obsession ll
323. ts us UR om afe aio Eus ie a Z PXIBIETSIS ELE Alt F9 ATIS v ERE CER AAA P CR VT SCR AD ter Ls A SU M Eh ee A AttriBUte ISE ista eiut alea f cic dae a aic a eu crie boda BOM Saee E at avs ta teta af cate pc c arta Rugs af pce d AIt B BlackoUtuesu ad ERRAT ac a E EORUM a ce Shift F10 B ind Displayzi4 ir reise cadet ld nen aie F6 Channel EU Alt F erm Backspace 3 Press Shift F1 on the alphanumeric keyboard to display an abbreviated version of this list Obsession Il User Manual 347 348 COON iita tret Met urit me Le Mg oda cats orm AIt C Cont Macia ciate Raich iets a ee par diate ee ads Alt 0 Copy FIXEULG gt ses ete toa e bale aie Alt X GUC dee asset us riu Rr ER m AMEND ened bod Q Cue List Command F5 or F6 Ctrl F3 Ctrl F3 Cue List Playback iun due eni RR Re n RR ts Cue Only Track sub ee aoe whee et ec oe Rede A Cue ShB8et xot i ae F5 or F6 Ctrl F3 DIME si hie ote ri Seeded dun AAA aha le d D Edit corrimand line ues Ee RE RECETA E ed gt lt EN A A SN A A saa E Effects Display wa 222r aa ett ein ce eee nets e REOR F10 Encoder Pages 1 6 4 22129 agree a a a Ctrl 1 6 EXP o eee Rma ke eee ele e lans Shift F7 Faders di e Alt F1 F8 Fixture LISt s cerle a e ci Gut Focus Group a quse a cd Gee ea aes Alt G Follow ee eres Petey aaa eee a Y Fill E E uh em oe cd se oe eds cnt oe t ded F cp it ese faced aioe Seed aed aoe vata ae ia ee F1 GOVTO CUC PC PLE F2 GOTO PAGS m Shift F8 OUR ivre ee
324. tsteps 1 3 for the other processor The change takes place the next time the system is rebooted DMX Out from Backup This feature is applicable only for systems with redundant tracking redundant tracking enabled as explained above Examine and set this feature independently for each of the two processors while the other processor is switched off The ON status provides DMX output from both processors concurrently while OFF means that DMX output is provided only by the primary processor 1 Switch one of the processors ON and the other processor OFF 2 Press 4 Enter to choose the DMX out from Backup option 3 Press Enter Enter to change the status of DMX Out 4 Repeat steps 1 3 for the other processor The change takes place immediately Appendix A Installation and setup Installing monitors Insert the end of the monitor power cord in the console connector labeled Power out Connect the video cable to the console connector labeled CRT 1 Repeat for second monitor using the connector labeled CRT 2 Turn console and monitor power switches to their On positions VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout ONoOnRWDN XA SI O aRwWN O Red video Green video Blue video Ground Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground nc Ground Ground nc H H V sync V sync nc Obsession Il User Manual 367 Connecting DMX512 devices Console DMX512 ports DMX512 outputs
325. turning the console power off connect the SMPTE cable to the console connector labeled SMPTE ao A O N SMPTE console connector 3 pin female XLR Balanced SMPTE pinout 1 Common 2 Signal 3 Signal Note For unbalanced input make the following connections in the user cable Connect XLR pin 1 and pin 2 together tying Common to Signal The unbalanced signal connects to XLR pin 3 Signal Obsession Il User Manual 383 384 Appendix A Installation and setup Appendix B References The original Obsession s remote console and the Designer s Remote Console can be used with Obsession 11 2 This chapter explains how to install and set them up with an Obsession II system e Obsession remote console e Designer s Remote Console DRC 9 The original Obsession full console which contains a processor hard drive and a disk drive unit cannot be used with Obsession ll Obsession Il User Manual 385 Installing an Obsession remote console AC power input following illustration shows the back panel connectors on the original Obsession remote console Serial port 9 pin male D RFU 6 pin female XLR ETCNet Switched accessory outlets Parallel printer 25 pin female D VGA CRT outputs 15 pin female mini D 1 Place console on a hard stable flat surface at least six feet from dimmers and high current AC lines Leave
326. u 5 Sub Sheet SUB 1 gt 58 CHAN 1 gt 5 5 Press Full Sub Sheet SUB 1 5 CHAN 1 5 FULL 6 Press Enter Sets channels 1 through 5 to full in submasters 1 through 5 Sub Sheet SUB 1 58 CHAN 1 gt 5 FULL 8 Copying ranges When you copy a range of submasters all submasters in the range are copied whether or not anything is recorded in the submaster memory For example suppose you copy a submaster range including recorded submasters 1 3 and 5 to a new range starting with submaster 6 To copy a range of submasters specify the starting submaster number of the new range In this case your command line would read Sub Sheet COPY SUB 1 5 6 8 The recorded submasters are numbered 6 8 and 10 Unrecorded submasters 2 and 4 are copied to submasters 7 and 9 Note A new submaster will replace the existing submaster even if the new submaster is unrecorded Obsession Il User Manual 233 Submaster List The Submaster List shows all the submasters on the Command display Pages 1 and 2 are displayed separately with 24 submasters shown at a time Submasters with recorded levels additive submasters are displayed in green inhibitive submasters in red Submasters with no recorded levels are gray The currently selected submaster is highlighted Use Page and Page to move back and forth within each page Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub S4 Sub Displays Submaster List page 1 List 2
327. ub Copy Sub Flexichannel FC Hold a See Flexichannel under Live Blind page 399 Suh Display Spreadsheet SS Sub List SL Return Unload Sub Copy Sub Flexichannel FC Return a See Flexichannel under Live Blind page 399 Group Group List GL Select Group Speadsheet GS Group List GL Spreadsheet GS Return Rate Delete Group Delete Group Copy Group Copy Group Flexichannel FC a See Flexichannel under Live Blind page 399 Spreadsheet GS Group MS Select Group Attribute Library Group List GL Fixture Return Delete Group Copy Group Flexichannel FC Return a See Flexichannel under Live Blind page 399 Obsession Il User Manual 401 ML Group ML Group ML Group MS ML Group MS MS Attribute All Library List Library Attribute List Copy Fixture Spreadsheet gt GS Fixture List Select Group Group List Position Delete Group Copy Group a See Group Spreadsheet under Group page 407 402 Appendix D Softkeys Return gt Other MS Effects Return gt Other MS Effect List EL Step Step Time In Dwell Out Lo Hi Levels Delete effect Copy effect Attribute gt EA Hold Editing Features gt EF Effe
328. ubmaster or Clear to Please confirm E cancel Hint To save time clear a range of submasters in the Sub List or Spreadsheet displays Use the 4 and Thru keys to enter ranges To clear all submasters use the Clear Functions menu Obsession Il User Manual 231 Submaster Spreadsheet The Submaster Spreadsheet display shows the channels in all submasters and their levels on the Command display Pages 1 and 2 are displayed separately FL FL FL Sub Sheet SUB 1 u Use Page and Page and the arrow keys to move around within each page As you scroll through the submasters the one you are currently on is highlighted in yellow and its channels are white Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub S3 Spread Enters Submaster mode and sheet displays the spreadsheet for submaster page 1 2 Press Sub Page 2 Switch from Blind submaster Enter page 1 to page 2 3 Press Sub Pagel 11 Switch from Blind submaster Enter page 2 to page 1 232 Chapter 15 Submasters Range editing in Submaster Spreadsheet The Submaster Spreadsheet allows range editing of all attributes visible on the screen For example if you wanted channels 1 through 5 to be at full in submasters 1 through 5 you could set the levels in one command Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Sub S3 Spread sheet 2 Press Sub 1 Thru 5 Sub Sheet SUB 1 5 Press Enter Sub Sheet SUB 1 gt 5 8 4 Press 1 Thr
329. ures Installing the single processor Obsession ll system Installing the dual processor Obsession ll system Remote console setup Hardware setup Installing monitors Connecting DMX512 devices Setting DMX512 configuration Installing the alohanumeric keyboard Installing a printer Installing and configuring the Remote Focus Unit Installing and configuring a Remote Interface Installing and configuring a Remote Video Interface Setting up ETCNet Installing MIDI Installing SMPTE Obsession Il User Manual 355 Console installation Single processor system Shown in the diagram below are the connections for the network cable and locations of the keyboard connector KB and power switch SW for a single processor Obsession system Go to Console Setup when your console installation is complete If you have any questions about setting up your system call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 BE Console rear panel 99 ME LR M gi y e o Processor front panel KB Processor rear panel l For a single processor system without a concentrator do not connect
330. urrent effect s dwell time set to Hold Effect 3 E TIME Random rate When you select a random rate for an effect Obsession applies a random rate to the assigned step time and a separate random rate to the step fade times This causes the effect to run at varying speeds changing at random within a range that you select Keystroke Action Command line 1 Press S5 Attribute Displays attribute softkeys 2 Press S7 Random Rate Effect 4 LO RANDOM RATE 3 Enter the slowest desired Effect 4 LO RANDOM effect rate RATE 20 4 Press and enter the Effect 4 LO RANDOM RATE highest desired effect rate 20 HI RANDOM RATE 80 5 Press Enter Effect 4 LO RANDOM RATE 20 HI RANDOM RATE 80 8 You can manually control effect rates by modifying the rate of the submaster or cue the effect is loaded into Rate adjustments affect step times and step In Dwell Out times They do not change the effect s In Dwell Out times See Live control of a submaster s rate page 221 and Rate override page 192 Obsession Il User Manual 245 246 Modify effects You may modify recorded effects by adding or deleting effect steps changing step attributes and adding or deleting step elements Insert steps You can insert a step at any point in an effect This example inserts a new step between steps 4 and 5 Keystrokes 1 Press Effect 2 Press S7 Edit Features 3 Use the T and J keys to highlight the step to insert and
331. use or misuse or any accessories or parts not supplied by ETC Warranty does not cover consumable parts such as fuses lamps color media or components warranted directly to the owner by the original manufacturer ETC s warranty does not extend to items not manufactured by us Freight terms on warranty repairs are FOB ETC factory or designated repair facility Collect shipments or freight allowances will not be accepted ETC s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be to repair or replace at ETC s option such parts as shall be determined to be defective on ETC s inspection ETC will not assume any responsibility for any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without ETC s prior written authorization ETC shall not be responsible for any incidental general or consequential damages damages to property damages for loss of use time profits or income or any other damages The owner s obligations during the warranty period under this warranty are to notify ETC at ETC s address within one week of any suspected defect and to return the goods prepaid to ETC at their factory or authorized service center THIS WARRANTY IS CONTINGENT ON THE CUSTOMER S FULL AND TIMELY COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF PAYMENT SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THIS WARRANTY IS iv Limited warranty EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
332. ust return the slider to zero before you take control of another cue on that fader Note Cues recorded with manual fade times are under slider control as soon as you press Go Obsession Il User Manual 191 Rate override Rate override allows you to play back a cue faster or slower than its recorded rate The rate wheel adjusts the fade rate Fade rate is expressed as a percentage A cue with a fade rate of 100 percent plays back at its recorded fade time A fade rate of 300 plays the cue back three times faster and 50 plays the cue back half as fast You may take control of a cue s fade rate while the cue is running or while the cue is pending Press multiple fader keys to control multiple fades Follow this example to place a cue running on a physical fader under rate control Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Rate Activates rate control Live RATE 2 Press the fader key for the Selects faders to control fader in which the cue is Live RATE F2 running or pending 3 Move rate wheel Fades are controlled by the rate wheel Move the wheel to adjust fade rates Live RATE F2 192 Chapter 13 Playing back cues Follow this example to control the fade rate of a cue running on a virtual fader Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Go to start cue 2 Press Rate Activates rate control Live RATE 3 Press Cue and enter the Selects fader to control number of the cue Live RATE CUE2 4 Press Ente
333. ut the effect and each step within the effect Effect List Channel A list of effects in the current show including each effect s label A report based on your current settings in the Usage Channel Usage display Printing with flexichannel active The Flexichannel mode currently active in Live determines how cues groups and submasters are formatted in printer output Only channels that are currently visible on the displays print Obsession Il User Manual 295 296 Printing setup functions Press Setup 6 Enter 2 Enter to go to the Print Setup Functions menu The table below shows what you get for the options on that menu System The current contents of the System Settings Settings menu 1 O Config The current contents of the Input Output Configuration menu Patch The current dimmer to channel patch in the format of the current Patch display mode By Dimmer or By Channel Profiles Current profile assignments SMPTE Full information about all SMPTE events in events the show including event number event time the element cue submaster or macro recorded in the event and rates and labels Macros A list of macros in the current show including complete information about the macro and its keystrokes Memo The current contents of the Memo display For the Patch option if you want to restrict the range of channels or dimmers printed press Dim if in By Dimmer mod
334. ve seconds to the first cue Assigns a follow time of five seconds to the remaining cues Selects the last cue in the playback loop Live CUE 5 Creates a loop by linking the last cue to the first cue Live CUE 5 LINK 1 Live CUE 5 LINK 1 4 a The number to the right of the slash indicates the number of times you want the loop to repeat after it runs the first time Enter 4 to the right of the slash to play the loop five times If you do not enter a repeat number the loop will run indefinitely To break out of an infinite loop press Go Obsession Il runs the next cue after the loop Obsession Il User Manual 151 152 Using Link to link a macro to a cue Link allows you to automatically run a macro when a cue runs If you want the macro to delay before running start the macro with a Macro Wait See Chapter 17 Macros page 255 for information about creating macros Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Live 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record 6 Selects cue 6 Live RECORD CUE 6 4 Press Link Macro 2 Records cue 6 linked to macro Enter 2 When you press Go to play cue 6 macro 2 will run at the same time Live RECORD CUE 6 LINK MACRO 2 Recording with non default output profiles You may record a cue having upfade an downfade times controlled by any one of 32 output profiles Select from nine preset profiles or create custom profiles to suit your nee
335. versing the functional assignments of the the two processors Redundant tracking is unaffected by this reversal The secondary LED lights to confirm the reversal The reversal remains in effect unless reversed back to normal with the console key switch or until you power down the console When the console is powered up again the system returns to normal tracking The console keyswitch has one additional purpose When both processors are running but not in redundant tracking you can specify which of the two processors actually communicates with the console Move the keyswitch toward either Primary or Secondary and that LED will light Console LEDs Neither light lit Tracking disabled One light lit Tracking enabled Steady LED shows whether the designated primary or secondary processor is mastered by the console One light blinking Tracking enabled but interrupted Blinking light shows whether the desig nated primary or secondary processor is mastered by the console 364 3 Normal tracking refers to the Primary and Secondary assignments made in Hardware setup page 365 Appendix A Installation and setup Hardware setup Some ETCNet and redundant tracking functions are under software control For example you may determine from setup menus whether ETCNet is enabled whether your system operates with redundant tracking which processor in a dual processor system is the primary one
336. vert a multipart cue into a standard cue you must first group all the channels in the cue into one part then copy that part over the entire cue Obsession allows you to treat all channels of a cue as if they are in a group and manipulate them as you would any group To group a cue first you press Group to specify that the following input is to be considered as a group Then instead of specifying a group number you press Cue and give the cue number Follow this procedure to convert the multipart cue created on the previous page back to a standard cue Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Bling 2 Press Cuel 4 Part 1 Selects part 1 of cue 4 Enter Blind CUE 4 PART 1 3 Press Group Cue 4 Groups all channels of cue 4 into Enter part 1 Blind CUE 4 PART 1 GROUP CUE 4 4 Press S7 Copy Cue 4 Selects cue 4 to copy Blind COPY CUE 4 5 Press Part 1 Restricts copy to part 1 of cue 4 Blind COPY CUE 4 PART 1 6 Press At 4 and press Copies part 1 of cue 4 to cue 4 Enter Press Enter Blind COPY CUE 4 PART 1 4 Please confirm Y Delete a part from a multipart cue Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Blind 2 Press Cue 4 Part 1 Blind CUE 4 PART 1 Enter 3 Press S6 Delete Cue Deletes part 1 from cue 4 Enter Enter Blind DELETE CUE 4 PART 1 E Please confirm Y Note If the Obsession ll system is in tracking mode removing a part may affect subseque
337. w range In this case your command line would read Spreadsheet COPY CUE 1 gt 1 7 5H The cues in the new range are numbered 5 5 2 and 5 7 To whole numbers To number by whole numbers specify a whole number range Both the old and new ranges must contain the same number of items In this case your command line would read Spreadsheet COPY CUE 1 gt 1 7 0 5278 The cues in the new range are numbered 5 6 and 7 To tenths To number by tenths specify a range of tenths Both the old and new ranges must contain the same number of items In this case your command line would read Spreadsheet COPY CUE 1 gt 1 7 5 0 25 5 28 The cues in the new range are numbered 5 5 1 and 5 2 Obsession Il User Manual 167 168 Blind Cue List The Blind Cue List displays cues and their attributes and allows range editing of attributes ue List CUE 37 Follow this example to modify a cue in the Blind Cue List display Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Blind 2 Press S4 Cue List Displays the Blind Cue List 3 Use the keypad to enter Selects desired cue s the cue to modify Use Cue List CUE and Thru to select mul tiple cues Enter the cue attribute to Cue List CUE 4 TIME change For example press Time Enter the new setting for Cue List CUE 4 TIME 2 E the attribute and press Enter a You can also select cues by scrolling through the Blind Cue List with the level wheel Chapte
338. w range is either identical to the original range or renumbered to consecutive numbers For example suppose you copy groups 1 3 and 5 to a new range starting with group 6 The groups in the new range can be numbered two ways To a matching range To match the original range specify only the starting group number of the new range In this case your command line would read Group Sheet COPY GROUP 1 5 6 The groups in the new range are numbered 6 8 and 10 To consecutive numbers To number by consecutive numbers specify a number range Both the old and new ranges must contain the same number of items In this case your command line would read Group Sheet COPY GROUP 1 gt 5 6 gt 88 The groups in the new range will be numbered 6 7 and 8 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Group List The Group List available from either the Group or ML Group displays identifies the label of each group according to its number Use Page Page Next and Last to scroll through the groups The selected group appears in white 1 Morning Range editing in the Group List Follow the procedure below to label or relabel a number of groups group in Group List An analogous procedure is available for Group List selected from the ML Group display Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Group S4 Group Displays Group List List 2 Press Group 1 Thru 5 Group List GROUP 1 5 3 Press Label and use the
339. wish to permanently lose all show system and I O settings back up the show and the I O configuration to a diskette or the hard drive before performing a Reset System Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 2 Reset Sys tem and press Enter 4 Press Enter 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Chapter 23 Clear functions Action Command line Selects System Settings menu System Settings RESET SYSTEM System Settings RESET SYSTEM Please Confirm System Settings RESET SYSTEM Please Confirm Chapter 24 Multiuser This chapter explains how to install and configure a Multiuser system and describes how Multiuser affects the way you work When you work on an Obsession Il that is not connected to other devices your keystrokes appear on the command line you press Enter and the console executes that command This changes when your system includes multiple devices consoles Remote Interfaces etc connected via ETCNet With multiple networked devices often more than one user may try to do work at the same time When they do the command line may merge their entries resulting in illegal commands Multiuser avoids conflicts by assigning all network devices to one of two user groups User 1 or User 2 For added flexibility Multiuser lets you assign Remote Focus Units RFUs to one of three user groups called Phantom 1 Phantom 2 or
340. y across a range of steps assign the channels to the steps on a one to one basis You may enter the numbers of steps and channels you want and create all the steps at once To create multiple steps simultaneously enter step numbers using Thru and Then select all the channels you want in the effect using Thru and Obsession ll assigns channels to each step in turn If there are more channels than steps it assigns a channel to each step then returns to the first step and continues assigning channels one per step until all channels are assigned The example on the next page demonstrates a one to one assignment In the example channels 1 through 22 are assigned to steps 1 through 10 automatically Channels are assigned as shown Step Channels 2 2 12 22 3 3 13 4 4 14 5 5 15 6 6 16 7 7 17 8 8 18 Chapter 16 Effects Follow these steps to create a ten step effect using a one to one channel assignment Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Press Effect 2 Press Effect Enter the EFFECT 2 effect and press Enter 3 Entertherange of stepsto Effect 2 M STEP 1 gt 10 create 4 Press Enter Effect 2 S STEP 1 10 8 ELEMENTS 5 Enter the range of chan Effect 2 STEP 1 gt 10 nels to assign to the steps ELEMENTS 1 22 6 Press Enter Effect 2 STEP 1 10 ELEMENTS 152522 Assign effect characteristics Each step in an effect is assigned its own attributes and time valu
341. y press Focus Group instead of Group The results you can expect when recording with the Group command versus recording with the Focus Group command are summarized under Determining what is recorded into a group page 196 Using the entire look Following is the procedure to create a group using all channels or fixture attributes on stage Keystrokes Action Command line 1 Go to Live mode Select a display 2 Select channels and set Creates look channel levels Or select fixtures fixture attributes and their levels 3 Press Record Live RECORD 4 Press Group Live RECORD GROUP 5 Enter the group to record Live RECORD GROUP 1 6 Press Enter Live RECORD GROUP 1 a You may press Next to select the next unrecorded group number in sequence 198 Chapter 14 Groups and focus groups Creating a selective group To create a group using some but not all of the channels or fixture attributes on stage do a selective record You can either specify the channels to include or specify the channels to leave out The procedure is given below for channels 1 20 on stage Modifications are suggested when the channels represent attributes Keystrokes 1 2 Go to Live mode Enter 1 Thru 1110 Or Enter 1 1 Thru 2 0 2 Press Record Press Group Enter the group to record Press Enter Action Command line Select a display Live CHAN 1 gt 10 or Live CHAN 11 gt 2

Obsession II 4.1 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents